Sonet Operating Manual

ANT-20, ANT-20E,
DominoCom ANT-20
Advanced Network Tester
“SONET Version”
BN 3035/42,
BN 3035/22,
BN 3035/12
Software Version 7.20
Operating Manual
BN 3035/98.22
Please direct all enquiries to your
local Wavetek Wandel Goltermann sales
company. The addresses are given at the
end of this handbook.
Copyrights
This product or parts of it are based upon
Recommendations and/or Standards of the
Standardization Sector of the International
Telecommunication Union - ITU-T and/or of the
European Telecommunications Standards Institute -
ETSI. These Recommendations and Standards are
subject to copyrights of these organizations. Without
written permission of the ITU-T and/or ETSI it is not
permitted to copy ITU-T Recommendations or ETSI
standards or parts thereof and/or make them available
to third parties.
Wavetek Wandel Goltermann

Eningen GmbH & Co.
Mühleweg 5, 72800 Eningen u. A.
© 2000
Author: MDD/TD
Translator: John Nutley
Order no.: BN 3035/98.22
Edition: 12/00.07 (V 7.20)
Previous edition:
11/00.04 (V 7.1)
Subject to change without notice.
Our normal guarantee and delivery
terms apply.
Printed in Germany
Test Sequencer for ANT-20 (Demo)
CVI Application Test Sequences

Dear customer,
your ANT-20 now comes with a pre-installed demo version of our ANT-20 test sequencer tool,
which belongs to the CATS (= CVI Application Test Sequences) family of products from
Wavetek Wandel Goltermann.
CATS is a test automation software based on the popular National Instruments product “Lab
Windows CVI Test Executive”, and it may be used to make routine, consecutive test jobs in
• R&D
• Acceptance Testing
• Installation
• Troubleshooting
as easy as the click of a mouse button.
CATS usually runs on a Windows PC and can control one or more test instruments in small
Automatic Test Systems via the IEEE bus or other communication interfaces.
Since the ANT-20 itself is a PC-based test instrument, Wavetek Wandel Goltermann provide
the unique ANT-20 Test Sequencer as a stand-alone application that runs on the instrument's
internal PC. Hence, no external controller PC is needed to take full advantage of this test
automation tool.
Operation of the ANT-20 Test Sequencer Demo

You may start the demo version by leaving the ANT-20 user interface and then double clicking
on the ANT-20 Test Sequencer icon in the Windows Program Manager.
Please follow these hints to walk your way through the demo
The demo is not protected by a password. When you are prompted by the program to enter your
user name and password, simply press the “Enter” key. The preset sequence will then be
loaded automatically. Start the sequence by clicking on the “Test UUT” button. You can enter
any text you like in the “UUT No.” field.
The preset demo sequences “_DEMO... .SQU” are a selection of typical test cases with loop
measurements between the generator and receiver of the ANT-20.
You may change the individual parameters in a test case by double-clicking on the appropriate
line in the display. The sequence can be edited from the “SEQUENCE / EDIT SEQUENCE”
menu.
You can also create your own test sequence using the demo. Use the test cases provided by
Wavetek Wandel Goltermann as templates. This test sequence cannot be saved for
subsequent use.
We hope you find the demo useful. If you want to know more about the ANT-20 Test Sequencer
and the CATS product range, please contact your local Wavetek Wandel Goltermann sales
engineer.
If you have questions or suggestions regarding this demo, please contact Walter Besse at:
Email: walter.besse@wwgsolutions.com
or
FAX: --49 7121 862 054 c/o Walter Besse.
Introduction 1
Getting started 2
Operating Fundamentals 3
Virtual Instruments 4
Application Guide 5
Standards/Abbreviations 6
Technical Background 7
Maintenance 8
Remote Operation 9
Specifications 10
11
Index 12
ANT-20/ANT-20E Mainframe, SONET Version
Contents
Introduction
1 The ANT-20, ANT-20E concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-1
2 ANT-20: Supremely easy to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-4
Getting Started
1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-1
2 Packing and unpacking, transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-6
3 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-8
4 Protective cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-12
5 Carrying handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-13
6 Instrument checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-14
7 Data backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-14
8 DominoCOM ANT-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-16
Operating Fundamentals
1 Control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-1
2 Basic operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-8
3 Switching on the ANT-20/ANT-20E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-8
4 ANT-20 windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-13
5 Creating, saving and loading applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-21
6 Measuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-27
7 On-line help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-33
8 How to use the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-34
9 Printing and exporting results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-37
10 ANT-20/ANT-20E behavior in the event of an

AC power failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-44
i
Mainframe, SONET Version ANT-20/ANT-20E
Virtual instruments
1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-1
2 Signal Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-3
3 Anomaly/Defect Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-12
4 Anomaly/Defect Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-14
5 Overhead Generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-23
6 Overhead Analyzer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-27
7 Pointer Generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-32
8 Pointer Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-35
9 PDH Generator/Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-38
10 Performance Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-41
Application Guide
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
2 In-Service Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
3 Automatic Trouble Scan function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
4 Automatic Scan function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
5 Automatic Search function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
6 APS switching time measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
7 Bit error rate test (BERT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
8 Performance analysis to G.821, G.826, G.828, G.829,

M.2100, M.2101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
9 Pointer stress test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
10 Editing and analyzing the Transport/Path overhead . . . . . . . . . . A-29
11 DCC/ECC bit error test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
12 Maximum Tolerable Jitter (MTJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-37
13 Fast Maximum Tolerable Jitter (F-MTJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40
14 Jitter Transfer Function (JTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-43
15 Phase Hit Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-47
ii
16 Wander Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-50
17 Wander Analysis to 2.5 Gbit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-53
18 Maximum Tolerable Wander (MTW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-58
19 Consecutive Identical Digit (CID) Test

to G.783, Appendix X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-61
20 Setting the ATM signal structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-63
21 ATM bit error rate test (ATM-BERT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-66
22 ATM latency test for ATM switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-71
23 ATM latency test with background load

(ATM Background Generator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-75
24 Sensor test - loss of cell delineation (LCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-78
25 Measuring the CLR with a variable cell rate (VBR traffic) . . . . . . A-81
Standards/Abbreviations
1 Recommendations/Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SA-1
2 Alarm messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SA-9
3 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SA-12
Technical Background
1 Multiplexing structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TB-1
2 Pointer action generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TB-2
3 Performance Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TB-6
Maintenance
1 Cleaning the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-1
2 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-1
3 Exchanging Versacon inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-2
4 Replacing the fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-3
5 Replacing the air filter pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-4
iii
Remote operation
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RO-1
2 Remote Operation via Modems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RO-2
3 Remote Operation via Ethernet (IEEE 802.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RO-6
Specifications
1 Generator section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2
2 Receiver section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-5
3 DS1 and DS3 signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-9
4 E1 to E4 signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-16
5 Measurement modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-22
6 Automatic measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-27
7 Other inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-36
8 Built-in operation and control computer (PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-39
9 General specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-42
Index
iv
1
Introduction
Contents
Introduction
1 The ANT-20, ANT-20E concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-1
2 ANT-20: Supremely easy to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-4

2.1 Ideal for mobile use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-4
i
Notes:
ii
Introduction
1 The ANT-20, ANT-20E concept

ANT-20
There is an ever-increasing demand for flexible and versatile measurement solutions for
installing, maintaining and troubleshooting modern networks to allow testing of various network
elements. Such measurement concepts must also be economic, due to the highly competitive
situation which affects manufacturers, installers and private and public network operators alike.
Simple solutions for individual measurement tasks used to be sufficient. These days, well-
planned measurement concepts which can keep pace with the rapid pace of network and
system development are needed. The measurement equipment must be able to handle both the
classical measurements for the plesiochronous hierarchy as well as being able to analyze the
SDH and SONET mappings for STM-1/STS-1.
In the same way, measurement equipment must be able to solve complex measurement
problems for systems operating at high bit rates, such as STM-4/OC-12 and STM-16/OC-48.
ATM test functions and performance quality analysis on ATM links are further features of the
ANT-20 which ensure its suitability for future applications. It can handle ATM frame structures
on PDH and SDH interfaces at up to 155 Mbit/s.
The ANT-20 Advanced Network Tester is thus a future-oriented solution to measurement tasks
in SDH and SONET networks, covering a previously unimaginable range. In particular, new
measurement tasks arise where communications involve transfers between networks using
different standards, or where new technology such as ATM network elements is employed. The
ANT-20 is already equipped with the foundation for handling these future tasks.
ANT-20E
The Advanced Network Tester ANT-20E (E = Extended) is the logical further development of
the ANT-20. All the advantages of the ANT-20 concept have been retained and allow for
extended combinations of functions within a single portable instrument.
The ANT-20E can, for example, measure synchronous functions at high bit rates and also jitter
simultaneously. To do this, the 2.5 Gbit/s Module and the 2.5 Gbit/s Jitter Module can be
combined with the 622 Mbit/s Jitter Module in the ANT-20E. This eliminates the complicated
and time consuming need for several different test instruments during network installation or
troubleshooting.
The ANT-20E can make measurements on all standard electrical and optical interfaces from
2 Mbit/s up to STM-64 and from DS1 up to OC-192. It can resolve signal structures up to the
10 Gbit/s level and analyze them down to the lowest level. Access to all standardized mappings
is available both for different transmission methods (SDH, SONET, ATM) and for mixed
structures (e.g. DS1 in STM-1).
The ANT-20E is equipped with a powerful operating processor and 16 MB RAM. The use of the
Windows95 operating system provides for extra advantages:
• Standard software ensures future viability
• Modern operating system
• Other Windows95 compatible software can be used
• Matches the normal work environment
• Easy access to PCMCIA interface without additional software
Introduction I-1
I-2
Fig. I-1
Add/Drop Mux
- Test for correct
path switching
- Test of alarm
Mainframe, SONET Version
sensors
- Capture range test Cross Connects
- Pointer simulation - Test for correct
and analysis path switching
- Synchronization test - Check of alarm
- Jitter tests sensors
- Tributary perfor- - Pointer simulation
mance analysis and analysis
- Signal delay
- Investigation of
jitter behavior
The wide range of applications

Comms systems
- Test for correct
use without the need to learn new operating procedures.
transmission for
STS-3/12/48/192
ATM Multiplexers STM-1/4/16/64 or
- Test for correct - Pointer simulation
path switching and analysis
(BERT) - Performance
- OAM test (ITU-T G.826/G.821
- ATM layer perfor- G.828/G.829
mance tests M.2100/M.2101)
(cell loss, cell - APS test (automatic
delay, etc.) International
setting) Gateways
- Traffic and error
statistics - Simultaneous
SDH and SONET
mappings
- Test of path
configuration
- Test for correct
path switching
The PC concept and standard color display screen of the ANT-20E make for superior ease of
ANT-20/ANT-20E
Introduction
The ANT-20 can always provide the answer to the wide range of measurement tasks on modern
network components, as the functions can be combined to match your current requirements just
like adding building blocks. Functions can be added at any time.
Color TFT display

Touchscreen
Mapping ATM functions

STM-1 STM-0 STS-1 ATM Module
(with STM-1/STS-3c mapping)
C-12 (2 Mbit/s) STM-0 (2 Mbit/s) VT1.5 SPE (DS1)
C-2 (6.3 Mbit/s) STM-0 (1.5 Mbit/s) VT6 SPE (DS2) Additional ATM mapping:
C-3 (34 Mbit/s) STM-0 (45/34 Mbit/s) STS-1 SPE (DS3) E4 (140 Mbit/s) G.804
C-4 (140 Mbit/s) VT2 SPE (E1) E3 (34 Mbit/s) G.804
C-11 (1.5 Mbit/s) E1 (2 Mbit/s) G.804
C-3 (45 Mbit/s) STM-1/VC-3
Drop&Insert DS1 (1.5 Mbit/s) G.804
(with Through Mode and Block&Replace Mode) DS3 (45 Mbit/s) G.804
Extended Overhead Analysis STS-1
(with APS Time Measurement and SOH/TOH/POH Byte Capture)
PDH functions OC-12c/STM-4c ATM Broadband

Demux Chain x 64 k/140 M BERT, ATM Testing Analyzer/Generator*
Mux/Demux Chain x 64 k/140 M Virtual Concatenation QoS Tester for SVC and PVC
Mux/Demux Chain M13 (n x 64 k/DS3) OC-48c/STM-16c BERT * Module for expansion slot
Optical interfaces Jitter and Wander to O.172*

STM-1, OC-1/3, 1310 nm O.172 Jitter/Wander Generator up to 155 Mbit/s
STM-1, OC-1/3, 1550 nm O.172 Jitter/Wander Generator 622 Mbit/s
STM-1, OC-1/3, 1310 & 1550 nm
STM-1/4, OC-1/3/12, 1310 nm O.172 Jitter Analyzer up to 155 Mbit/s
STM-1/4, OC-1/3/12, 1550 nm O.172 Jitter Analyzer 622 Mbit/s
STM-1/4, OC-1/3/12, 1310 & 1550 nm O.172 Jitter/Wander Generator/Analyzer 2488 Mbit/s**
STM-16, OC-48, 1550 nm* O.172 MTIE/TDEV Analysis

STM-16, OC-48, 1310 nm*
STM-16, OC-48, 1310/1550 nm switchable*
STM-64, OC-192, 1550 nm* * Module for expansion slot
* Module for expansion slot ** ANT-20E only
Miscellaneous
V.24 remote control
GPIB remote control
LabWindows/CVI driver
Remote control via modem
Remote control via LAN
Test Sequencer for
SDH/SONET/ATM
Fig. I-2 Additional functions available for the ANT-20
Introduction I-3
2 ANT-20: Supremely easy to use

The ANT-20 Advanced Network Tester ANT-20 combines the advantages of cost-effective
customized solutions with supreme ease of use in a unique way. The instrument provides basic
configurations which are international in scope for installation, acceptance, maintenance and
troubleshooting. Options can be added at any time to extend the facilities of the basic
configuration and match the ANT-20 to new requirements. The standard Windows user
interface is supported by the strongly application-oriented operating structure. MS-DOS, MS-
Excel, Windows, Windows 3.11 and Windows95 are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation. The graphics user interface makes for fast setting of the instrument to sut the
application. All the important parameters and results for the current task are displayed
simultaneously. On-line help ensures that you can correctly use all functions of the ANT-20. A
full keyboard is fitted to make input of text for documentation purposes that much easier. Rapid
switching between several windows displayed simultaneously is particularly practical: The
ANT-20 can be precisely configured for every application.
The modular, future-oriented software architecture is clearly shown in Fig. I-3. The ANT-20 can
be re-configured to match a new requirement quickly and simply by adding extra hardware and/
or software. Remote operation from a standard PC is possible, as is the exporting of
measurement data for processing and evaluation. The ANT-20 is ready to accept future remote
operation interfaces such as LAN, ISDN, infra-red or GSM (via PCMCIA slots).
Virtual instruments
G.821/G826/M.2100
Windows
ATM traffic tester
Pointer tester
Applications
SOH monitor
Error tester
SOH editor
AT processor
Test box
processor Instrument driver
Measurement
hardware Test module
Fig. I-3 ANT-20 software architecture
2.1 Ideal for mobile use
Despite the exceptional flexibility and wide range of functions of the ANT-20, it is one of the
most compact instruments of its class. The low-volume casing with extra large area display
screen was designed specifically with the requirements of mobile use in mind. The protective
cover and carrying handle also have other useful functions (see the section “Getting started”).
I-4 Introduction
Getting Started 2
Contents
Getting Started
1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-1

1.1 Correct usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-1
1.2 AC line voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-1
1.3 Safety class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-1
1.4 Faults and excessive stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-2
1.5 Repair and maintenance instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-2
1.6 Laser safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-4
2 Packing and unpacking, transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-6

2.1 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-6
2.2 Checking for transport damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-6
2.3 Packing for transport and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-6
2.4 Operation after storage and transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-7
2.5 Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-7
3 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-8

3.1 AC line operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-8
3.2 Lithium batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-8
3.3 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-9
3.3.1 Solving problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-9
4 Protective cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-12
5 Carrying handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-13
6 Instrument checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-14
7 Data backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-14

7.1 ANT-20 with Windows 3.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-14
7.2 ANT-20 (Windows95) and ANT-20E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-15
8 DominoCOM ANT-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-16

8.1 “Remote” operation of the DominoCOM ANT-20 . . . . . . . .G-16
8.2 “Local” operation of the DominoCOM ANT-20 . . . . . . . . . .G-17
8.3 DominoCOM ANT-20 accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-17
i
Notes:
ii
Getting Started
1 Safety instructions
This instrument was shipped in perfect condition. To ensure that this condition is maintained
and that operation is safe, please follow the instructions in this section carefully.
1.1 Correct usage
This instrument may only be used under the conditions and for the purpose for which it was
constructed. Further information on this is given in the sections “Specifications” and
"Introduction" of this operating manual.
Use outside the specified conditions may be dangerous and may also damage the
instrument.
Sec. 1.4, Page G-2.
In particular, the instrument must not be connected to measurement circuits for which it is not
designed.
1.2 AC line voltage
Before switching the instrument on, make sure that the instrument operating voltage
corresponds to the voltage of your local AC power supply.
Instrument AC line voltage ranges AC line frequency Power consumption
ANT-20 100 V to 127 V 50 Hz or 60 Hz < 300 VA
ANT-20E 200 V to 240 V < 600 VA
Table G-1 AC power supply ranges for ANT-20, ANT-20E
1.3 Safety class
The ANT-20 is a Safety Class 1 equipment as defined in EN 61010-1 (IEC Publ. 1010-1). The
AC line cord supplied with the instrument contains a protective ground conductor. The AC line
plug may only be inserted into AC line socket outlets equipped with a protective ground contact
unless the AC line circuit is specially isolated.
The protective ground conductor must not be interrupted, either inside or outside the
instrument casing.
A connection to measurement circuits carrying dangerous voltages is not intended.
If the AC line protective ground connection can be used for this purpose, connect the
instrument to the AC line before connecting it to the measurement circuit.
If the measurement circuit itself is equipped with a protective ground conductor, this should be
connected to the instrument casing before connecting the rest of the measurement circuit.
Getting Started G-1

1.4 Faults and excessive stresses
If it is suspected that the instrument is no longer safe to use, it should be taken out of service
and secured against unintentional operation. This situation is possible if:
• the instrument is visibly damaged,
• the instrument does not work,
• the instrument is exposed to stresses of any kind which are outside the permitted limits,
• the instrument has been stored for a long period under unsuitable conditions or handled
roughly during transport (see Sec. 2, Page G-6).
In such cases, contact your nearest Wavetek Wandel Goltermann Service Center. The
addresses are listed at the end of this operating manual.
1.5 Repair and maintenance instructions
If the covers are removed or parts of the instrument are manipulated using tools, it is possible
that other parts carrying dangerous voltages may be exposed. The connectors may also be live.
For this reason, the instrument must be disconnected from all voltage sources before it
is opened. Simply switching it off using the AC line switch is not sufficient.
Capacitors in the instrument may retain a charge even long after the instrument has been
disconnected from all voltage sources.
If subsequent calibration, maintenance or repair of the opened instrument under voltage
becomes necessary, such work should only be performed by trained persons familiar with the
risks involved.
Repairs
Repairs must be carried out by trained persons. The constructional features of the instrument
must not be altered in any way which might adversely affect the safety characteristics of the
instrument. In particular, creepage and air paths and the insulation spacing must not be
reduced.
Wherever possible, use only original spare parts for replacement. Other parts may only be used
if they do not adversely affect the safety characteristics of the instrument.
Fuses
Use only the prescribed fuses (see Sec. 3.1, Page G-8).
G-2 Getting Started

Tests after repairs and maintenance

The insulation resistance and the protective ground connection of the AC line circuitry must be
checked after repair or maintenance work on the instrument. Check the connection and general
condition by visual inspection and measure the resistance between the protective ground
contact of the AC line plug and the instrument enclosure. The resistance must be < 0.1 Ω.
Shake the cable during the measurement. Resistance variations may mean that the cable is
faulty; in such cases, the cable must not be reused.
Repeat the measurement using a new cable. If the cause of the changes in resistance proves
not to be due to the cable, the instrument must be taken out of service until the fault has been
determined and repaired in accordance with the safety requirements.
Measure the insulation resistance between the AC line terminals which have been shorted
together and the protective conductor terminal of the instrument using a 500 V insulation tester.
Ensure that the instrument's AC line switch is in the "I" position. The insulation resistance must
be > 2 MΩ according to EN 61010-1. If the resistance is less than 2 MΩ, the instrument must be
taken out of service and repaired.
Getting Started G-3

1.6 Laser safety
The following options for the ANT-20 are fitted with laser output devices:
• BN 3035/90.40 through BN 3035/90.59
• BN 3035/91.40
• BN 3035/91.41
• BN 3035/91.53 through BN 3035/91.59
Optical radiation with wavelengths in the range 1300 to 1600 nm is present at sockets [18], [47]
and [103].
Maintenance and repair work on the laser sources should only be carried out by qualified
service operatives familiar with the risks involved.
The laser source is active if the yellow LED next to the connector is on.
Invisible laser radiation.

Laser light can cause irreparable damage to the eyes, particularly to the retina.
⇒ Never look directly into the generator outputs [18], [47] and [103] or the connector end
surfaces of the connected cables (free ends) if the laser sources are activated.
Caution ⇒ Never use a microscope to check the generator outputs if the laser sources are activated.
⇒ Do not activate the laser sources until all measurement connections have been made.
The output power at socket [18] of the STM-4/OC-12 module is within the limits for a
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT.
The output power at socket [47] or [103] of the STM-16/OC-48 module or STM-64/OC-192 is
also within the limits for a CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT (IEC 825-1: 1993) during normal
operation. Under fault conditions, the output power level may exceed these limits and the output
is then a CLASS 3A LASER PRODUCT (IEC 825-1: 1993).
OC-1/3/12 DATA LASER ON

STM-1/4 0 dBm
LASER ON
103
LASER ON
DATA
18 47
0 dBm
Mainframe STM-16/OC-48 Module STM-64/OC-192 Module
Fig. G-1 ANT-20 optical connections
G-4 Getting Started

Affixing the laser safety warning labels

A laser safety warning label in the local language indicating the laser class must be affixed to
the outside of the ANT-20/ANT-20E in such a position that it is clearly visible to the user.
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION

CLASS 1 DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW
DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

LASER PRODUCT
CLASS 3A LASER PRODUCT
Fig. G-2 Laser class safety warning labels
We recommend that the laser safety warning label is affixed to the front panel of the ANT-20/
ANT-20E below socket [05] (see Fig. G-3).
Use the following laser safety warning labels:
• CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
for Options BN 3035/90.43 through 90.48
• CLASS 3A LASER PRODUCT
for Options BN 3035/90.53, BN 3035/90.54, BN 3035/90.59, BN 3035/91.53,
BN 3035/91.54, BN 3035/91.59, BN 3035/91.40 and BN 3035/91.41
A sheet of laser safety warning labels is included with each module.
Note: If Options in the BN 3035/90.43 through 90.48 range and
BN 3035/90.53, BN 3035/90.54, BN 3035/90.59, BN 3035/91.53, BN 3035/91.54,
BN 3035/91.59, BN 3035/91.40 or BN 3035/91.41 are both fitted, the CLASS 3A
LASER PRODUCT label should be affixed.
Any CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT label already affixed to the instrument should be
removed or the new label affixed over it so that it is completely concealed.
Fig. G-3 Laser safety warning label on the front panel of the ANT-20/ANT-20E
Getting Started G-5

2 Packing and unpacking, transport
2.1 Unpacking
Do not discard the packing materials and any transport protection. These items have been
specially designed to be reused if they are not damaged. The instrument can only be reliably
protected against damage if the original packing is used when transporting it.
2.2 Checking for transport damage
After unpacking the instrument check it for transport damage. Such damage is likely if the
packaging itself has been severely damaged. Do not attempt to use an instrument which is
visibly damaged, as this may result in further damage to the instrument and may be dangerous
(see Sec. 1, Page G-1).
2.3 Packing for transport and storage
If the instrument is to be shipped, e.g. to a Wavetek Wandel Goltermann Service Center for
repairs, follow the instructions below to ensure that damage does not occur during transport.
Packing
If possible, use the original packing (undamaged) for shipping the instrument.
If the original packing is not available, use a strong box made from double-layer corrugated
cardboard which is at least 4 mm thick.
The box should be big enough to allow padding of at least 70 mm thickness to be placed all
round the instrument. The padding can be rigid foam plastic or corrugated cardboard.
The padding should cover as large an area of the instrument surface as possible and ensure
that the instrument does not move within the box. Any spaces can be filled with polystyrene
chips or similar.
The use of polystyrene chips as the only padding material is insufficient.
The box should be sealed along the butt edges using waterproof textile adhesive tape which is
at least 70 mm wide.
Storage under damp conditions

If transport is likely to take a long time or if the instrument is to be stored for a long period under
conditions where high air humidity is likely, it is a good idea to protect the instrument against
moisture using the original packing materials. Sachets of drying agent are placed in the plastic
bag containing the instrument, and the bag is sealed using strong adhesive tape.
Drying agent which is saturated with water must not be put or allowed to remain in the plastic
bag, as it may increase the humidity and cause damage. Drying agent which is saturated is pink
in color, unsaturated drying agent is blue.
Check list
Make a list of all the items in the box and place it in the box.
G-6 Getting Started

2.4 Operation after storage and transport
Storage and transport can subject the instrument to severe stresses. Refer to the safety
instructions Sec. 1, Page G-1 and all of the instructions for packing and unpacking, transport
Sec. 2, Page G-6.
Recovery time
Condensation may form on an instrument which has been stored or transported at a low
temperature when it is brought into a warm environment. To prevent any damage, wait until all
signs of condensation on the instrument surfaces have disappeared before switching the
instrument on. The instrument is only ready for use when it has reached the guaranteed
operating temperature range of +5 to +45 °C.
The latter also applies if the instrument has been stored at a higher temperature.
2.5 Ventilation
Make sure that the ventilation slots are not obscured during operation.
The instrument must not be operated above the permitted maximum ambient temperature of
+45 °C. Adequate ventilation must be provided.
Getting Started G-7

3 Power supply
3.1 AC line operation
AC line frequency
The ANT-20 is operated from AC line power supplies having a frequency of 50 or 60 Hz.
Fuse
The following type and value of fuse must be used:
Instrument version AC line voltage range Fuse type
ANT-20 100 to 240 V T3.15 A
ANT-20E 100 to 240 V T5.0 A
Table G-2 Fuses
Two spare fuses are supplied separately.
3.2 Lithium batteries
The ANT-20 contains lithium batteries for buffering the data storage memory. Replacement of
expired (flat) batteries can be carried out by your local Wavetek Wandel Goltermann Service
Center.
The batteries need not be removed from the instrument if it is to be scrapped.
G-8 Getting Started

3.3 Switching on
Switching on
The ANT-20 is switched on using the AC power switch located on top of the instrument
(switch position “I”).
When you switch on, the MS-DOS and Windows 3.11 (Windows95 for ANT-20E) operating
systems will start. MS-DOS, MS-Excel, Windows, Windows 3.11 and Windows95 are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The ANT-20 software will then start automatically.
The display will then look something like the next figure.
Fig. G-4 ANT-20 screen after switching on
3.3.1 Solving problems
The following situations may lead to a loss of the “CMOS setup” data:
• Switching off the instrument during boot-up
• Power supply failure during boot-up
• Software crash
To restore and save the “CMOS setup” data, proceed as follows:

1. Switch on the instrument.
2. Wait until the BIOS version is displayed on the screen.
3. Then press the “CTRL”, “ALT” and “F1” keys simultaneously.
This initiates the “CMOS Setup” program.
4. Use the “Tab” key or arrow keys to select the appropriate menus and make the settings
listed on the next page.
5. Save the settings and exit from the “CMOS Setup” program.
Getting Started G-9

“CMOS Setup” settings for 486-processor
Date/Time: Date: xx yy zzzz enter current date

Time: xx yy zz enter current time
Hard-Disk: C: USR1 842 8 38 NONE 841 124 [ ] ->AUTO

D: NONE 0 0 0 0 0 [ ]
First select C: USR1 and then press the “AUTO” key. All other parameters
will then be set automatically.
Floppy Disk: Drive A: Drive B:

(*) 1.44 MB (*) NONE
Boot Features: Boot Sequence:

(*) A:, C:
[✓] Num Lock on

[✓] Quick Memory Test
[✓] Simultaneous Display
System: [✓] Simultaneous Display (not available for every BIOS version)
Shadow: Cache:
[✓] System BIOS (*) CPU only
[✓] Video BIOS
Peripheral: Floppy FDC: IDE: LPT:

(*) Enabled (*) Enabled (*) AUTO
VGA Setup: [✓] Simultaneous (not available for every BIOS version)
All other settings can be selected to suit your requirements.
G-10 Getting Started

“C-MOS Setup” for Pentium-processor
Date/Time: Date: xx yy zzzz enter current date

Time: xx yy zz enter current time
Hard-Disk: Block Fast

Auto Type ... Mode 32-Bit PIO
Master (✓) USR1 ... (✓) (✓) (✓)
Slave ( ) None ... () () ()
First press “Auto All Drives”. Then set the missing flags.
Floppy Disk: Drive A: Drive B: Test Floppy Disk

(*) 1.44 MB (*) None ()
Boot Features: (*) A:, C: Boot Sequence

(✓) Halt on Errors
() Display Graphic Logo
(✓) Num Lock on
(✓) Quick Memory Test
System Option: Cache (*) External and CPU

Error Mode (*) None
DRAM Speed (*) 60 ns
Shadow (✓) System Bios Cachable
(✓) ISA Video Shadow
(✓) ISA Video Cachable
Peripheral: Serial Port A: Auto

Serial Port B: Auto
Parallel Port: Auto
Primary IDE: Auto
Floppy Disk: Auto Normal
PS/2 Mouse: Enabled
All other settings can be selected to suit your requirements.
Getting Started G-11

4 Protective cover
The next figure shows how the cover of the ANT-20 can be used.
Position 1
Position 2 Position 3
Fig. G-5 Uses of the ANT-20 protective cover
There are slots on the horizontal edge of the top side and on the lower horizontal edge of the
front panel for locating the locking clips (A) of the cover.
To make sure that the cover is properly fitted:

1. Place the guide edge (B) of the cover against the appropriate edge of the instrument.
2. Hook the clips (A) into the corresponding slots in the instrument.
3. Press the clips towards the cover until they lock into place.
Tip: The ANT-20E can only be tilted as shown in position 3.

5 Carrying handle
The carrying handle of the ANT-20 can be extended. Two positions are possible. The figure
below shows how to set these positions.
The ANT-20E is fitted with an adjustable carry strap instead of the carry handle.
A
Handle side B
Ends of
handle extention
(sprung)
A
1 (Handle position 1) 2
D
Grip
C F Handle extention
Slot D
3 (Handle position 2) 4
Fig. G-6 Changing the handle length
Notes on diagrams 1 to 4
1. Handle position 1: The ends of the handle extension are locked in the lower slots of the
handle sides. This is the shortest length of the handle.
2. To extend the handle: Press the ends of the handle extension (A) into the slots on both
handle sides simultaneously and slide upwards (B).
3. Pull the grip up until the ends of the handle extension lock into the upper slots in the handle
sides (C). This is the longest length of the handle (handle position 2).
4. To shorten the handle: Press the ends of the handle extension into the slots (D) on both
handle sides simultaneously and slide down (E). Push the grip down (F in diagram 3.) until
the ends of the handle extension lock into the lower slots in the handle sides.

6 Instrument checklist
The following items are supplied with the ANT-20/ANT-20E:
• ANT-20/ANT-20E Mainframe
• Protective cover
• Options (will be built in to the Mainframe according to your order instructions)
• Trackball (instruments equipped with touchscreen are supplied without trackball)
• AC line power cord
• Bag containing two spare fuses and tools
(allen key and mounting key)
• Windows and MS-DOS operating systems and handbooks (ANT-20) or
Windows95 operating system and handbook (ANT-20E)
• Operating manual
• Calibration certificate (or optional calibration report)
7 Data backup
7.1 ANT-20 with Windows 3.11
The ANT-20 software together with the MS-DOS and Windows operating systems are pre-
installed on the hard disk drive of the ANT-20. The instrument is ready to use immediately.
The following directories are stored on the hard disk drive of the ANT-20:
Directory Contents
c:\ant20\ … ANT-20 programs and data
c:\dos\ ... MS-DOS operating system
c:\windows\ … Windows
c:\wfw.sup\setup.exe Windows 3.XX setup program
\…
c:\ant20.sup\disk1\setup.exe ANT-20 setup program
\…
\disk2 \ …
\diskn \ …
Table G-3 Directories on the hard disk drive of the ANT-20
To back up the ANT-20 data, copy each one of the directories c:\ant20.sup\disk1 through
c:\ant20.sup\disk n on to a separate floppy disk.
Tip: It is a good idea to make a backup of all the data on the hard disk drive using a suitable
backup program.

7.2 ANT-20 (Windows95) and ANT-20E
The ANT-20/ANT-20E software together with the Windows95 operating system is pre-installed
on the hard disk drive of the ANT-20/ANT-20E. The instrument is ready to use immediately.
The following directories are stored on the hard disk drive of the ANT-20/ANT-20E:
Directory Contents
c:\ant20\ … ANT-20E programs and data
c:\windows\ … Windows95
c:\win95.sup\setup.exe Windows95 setup program
\…
c:\ant20.sup\disk1\setup.exe ANT-20E setup program
\…
\disk2 \…
\diskn \…
Table G-4 Directories on the hard disk drive of the ANT-20/ANT-20E
To back up the ANT-20E data, copy each one of the directories c:\ant20.sup\disk1 through
c:\ant20.sup\disk n on to a separate floppy disk.
Tip: It is a good idea to make a backup of all the data on the hard disk drive using a suitable
backup program.
Help with problems

If a reinstallation of the software is necassary for some reason, please contact your nearest
Wavetek Wandel Goltermann Service Center. The addresses are listed at the end of this
operating manual.
When making inquiries, always quote the following:
• ANT-20/ANT-20E serial number
• ANT-20/ANT-20E Software Package version number

8 DominoCOM ANT-20
The DominoCOM ANT-20 “Black Box” concept is the ideal solution for use in automatic test
systems.
• It is equipped with remote-control interfaces as standard.
• It is particularly suitable for space-saving rack mounting.
• It is easily stackable.
8.1 “Remote” operation of the DominoCOM ANT-20
The DominoCOM ANT-20 is connected to a standard or notebook PC via the V.24 or GPIB
interface.
SCPI commands are used to control the DominoCOM ANT-20.
LabWindows/CVI drivers can be supplied as an optional extra. They reduce the time required
for program development and simplify control of the DominoCOM ANT-20 or ANT-20.
Fig. G-7 DominoCOM ANT-20 in “Remote” mode
Tip: Further details on this operating mode are found in the Remote-Control Instructions,
BN 3035/98.09.

8.2 “Local” operation of the DominoCOM ANT-20
In addition to remote-controlled operation, the DominoCOM can also be operated as a stand-

alone measuring instrument.
A VGA monitor, mouse and keyboard need to be connected for local operation.
In this configuration, all the facilities of the ANT-20 Advanced Network Tester are available from
the DominoCOM version.
Fig. G-8 DominoCOM ANT-20 in “Local” mode
Tip: Further details on this operating mode are found in the Remote-Control Instructions,
BN 3035/98.09.
8.3 DominoCOM ANT-20 accessories
The following items are delivered with the DominoCOM ANT-20:

• V.24 remote control
• GPIB remote control
• Filter pads
• AC line cord
• 2 cables
• Configuration software DominoCOM ANT-20
• Remote control manual
Optional accessories:
• External keyboard US/English (BN 3035/92.04)
• Decoupler, -20 dB (BN 3903/63)
• TKD-1 probe (BN 882/01)

Notes:

3
Contents
1 Control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-1

1.1 ANT-20, ANT-20E front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-1
1.2 ANT-20 connector panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-2
1.3 ANT-20E connector panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-3
1.4 DominoCOM ANT-20 connector panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-4
1.5 Description of control elements and connectors . . . . . . . . . .O-5
1.5.1 Front panel control elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-5
1.5.2 Control elements and connectors on the
connector panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-5
1.5.3 Front panel LED array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-7
2 Basic operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-8
3 Switching on the ANT-20/ANT-20E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-8

3.1 Connecting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-8
3.2 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-8
3.2.1 After switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-9
3.3 Switching on with function key “F3” APPL pressed. . . . . . . .O-9
3.4 Further operating procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-10
3.5 Starting programs with the “Instant Access Buttons” . . . . .O-10
4 ANT-20 windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-13

4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-13
4.1.1 The “ANT20 - <Application Title>”
(Application Manager) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-13
4.1.2 Virtual instruments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-14
4.2 Elements of the “ANT20 - <Application Title>” window . . . .O-15
4.2.1 Minibar (Application Manager reduced form) . . . . . . . . . . .O-15
4.2.1.1 Displaying virtual instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-15
4.2.1.2 Starting and stopping a measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-15
4.2.1.3 Disabling entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-16
4.2.1.4 Enabling entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-16
4.2.1.5 Other important functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-16
i
4.2.2 Menu bar and pull-down menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-17

4.2.2.1 The “Application” menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-17
4.2.2.2 The “Instruments” menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-18
4.2.2.3 The “Measurement” menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-18
4.2.2.4 The “Configure” menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-19
4.2.2.5 The “Print” menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-19
4.2.2.6 The “Help” menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-19
4.2.3 Title bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-20
5 Creating, saving and loading applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-21

5.1 Selecting the virtual instruments for an application. . . . . . . O-21
5.2 Entering the signal structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-23
5.3 Saving an application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-25
5.4 Loading an application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-25
6 Measuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-27
6.1 Setting the parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-27
6.2 Starting and stopping the measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-29
6.2.1 Starting and stopping a measurement manually. . . . . . . . . O-29
6.2.2 Starting a measurement manually and
stopping automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-30
6.2.3 Starting and stopping a
measurement automatically (timer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-30
6.3 Displaying results e.g. anomalies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-31
7 On-line help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-33

7.1 Calling up on-line help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-33
7.2 Calling up a help topic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-33
7.3 Setting the size of the help window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-33
8 How to use the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-34

8.1 Arranging the application windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-34
8.2 Commonly-used controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-35
9 Printing and exporting results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-37

9.1 Installing a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-38
9.2 The “Print” menu – Application Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-39
9.2.1 Printing results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-39
9.2.1.1 The “Print Headers” dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-39
ii
9.3 The “Print” menu – Virtual instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-40

9.3.1 Printing out results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-40
9.3.1.1 The “Print” dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-40
9.3.1.2 The “Print Headers” dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-41
9.3.1.3 The “Printer Setup” dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-41
9.3.2 Exporting results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-41
9.3.2.1 The “Save as” dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-42
9.3.2.2 The “Export Format” dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-42
9.4 The “Screen Dump” print function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-43
10 ANT-20/ANT-20E behavior in the

event of an AC power failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-44
10.1 Backup data set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-44
10.2 Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-45
10.2.1 Manually triggered measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-45
10.2.2 Timer-controlled measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-46
iii
Notes:
iv
1 Control elements
1.1 ANT-20, ANT-20E front panel
Fig. O-1 ANT-20, ANT-20E front panel
Operating Fundamentals O-1

1.2 ANT-20 connector panel
Fig. O-2 ANT-20 connector panel
O-2 Operating Fundamentals

1.3 ANT-20E connector panel
Fig. O-3 ANT-20E connector panel

1.4 DominoCOM ANT-20 connector panel
Fig. O-4 DominoCOM ANT-20 connector panel

1.5 Description of control elements and connectors
1.5.1 Front panel control elements
see Fig. O-1, Page O-1 and Fig. O-5, Page O-7
Position Designation
I LED array
II ANT-20, ANT-20E display monitor
III Function key assignments during ANT-20 operation
IV Function keys
V Touchscreen pointer pen
VI Built-in keyboard
Table O-1 Front panel control elements
1.5.2 Control elements and connectors on the connector panel
Fig. O-2, Page O-2 (ANT-20), Fig. O-3, Page O-3 (ANT-20E)
and Fig. O-4, Page O-4 (DominoCOM ANT-20)
[01] Mouse connector

PS2 interface
[02] PCMCIA interfaces A and B
[03] External keyboard connector

PS2 interface
[04] External display monitor connector

VGA interface
[05] External printer connector

Parallel (Centronics) interface
[06] Serial interface

V.24 interface
[07] Monochrome monitor contrast control

(ANT-20 only)
[08] Floppy disk drive
[10] “Insert Tributary” input
[11] “Drop Tributary” output
[12] “Insert Tributary” balanced input or

balanced electrical input
[13] “Drop Tributary” balanced output or

balanced electrical output
[14] Electrical input (coded) 1.5 to 156 Mbit/s
Table O-2 Control elements on the connector panel

[15] Electrical output (coded) 1.5 to 156 Mbit/s
[16] Electrical input STM-1/STM-4 622 Mbit/s
[17] Optical input OC-1/-3/-12/STM-1/STM-4

1310/1550 nm
[18] Optical output OC-1/-3/-12/STM-1/STM-4

1310/1550 nm
[21] Input/output for DCC/ECC signals

V.11 interface
[22] Clock output (unjittered TX clock)
[25] Reference clock input

2048 kbit/s, 1544 kbit/s
[26] Trigger output
[90] Optical power splitter: Input
[91] Optical power splitter: 10% output
[92] Optical power splitter: 90% output
A Laser class label
B Manufacturer’s name
CE label
ANT-20 serial number
C AC line switch
AC line connector
Fuse
D “LASER ON” LED indicator is lit when laser

generator is on
E, F, G, H “LOS” Loss of signal LED indicators
I Empty slot for further options
J “LTI” Loss of timing interval LED indicator
K LED display for anomalies and defects

(DominoCOM ANT-20 only)
Table O-2 Control elements on the connector panel (continued)

1.5.3 Front panel LED array
HISTORY
LOS Loss of signal

LOF/OOF Loss of frame/Out of frame
MS-AIS/AIS-L Multiplexer section alarm indication signal/Alarm indication signal line
B1/B2 B1 or B2 Bit interleaved parity errors
MS-RDI/RDI-L Multiplexer section remote defect indication/Remote defect indication line
AU-LOP/LOP-P AU Loss of pointer/Loss of pointer path or AU-NDF
AU-AIS/AIS-P AU Alarm indication signal/Alarm indication signal path
HP-UNEQ/UNEQ-P High order path unequipped/Unequipped path
HP-PLM/PLM-P High order path path-label mismatch/Path label mismatch path
B3 B3 Bit interleaved parity errors
HP-RDI/RDI-P High order Path remote defect indication/ Remote defect indication path
(TU)-LOM Loss of multiframe
TU-LOP/LOP-V TU Loss of pointer/Loss of pointer VT or TU-NDF
TU-AIS/AIS-V TU Alarm indication signal/Alarm indication signal VT
LP-UNEQ/UNEQ-V Low order path unequipped/Unequipped VT
LP-PLM/PLM-V Low order path path-label mismatch/Path label mismatch VT
LP-BIP/BIP-V Low order path bit interleaved parity errors/Bit interleaved parity errors VT
LP-RDI/RDI-V Low order path remote defect indication/Remote defect indication VT
AIS Alarm indication signal (payload)
LOF/LCD Loss of frame (payload) / Loss of cell delineation
LSS Loss of sequence synchronization
RDI/(AIS-)Yellow Remote defect indication (payload) / (Alarm indication signal) yellow
FAS/CRC Frame alignment signal errors (payload) / Cyclic redundancy check error
TSE Test sequence errors (bit errors)
CURRENT
Fig. O-5 Meanings of the LED indicators on the ANT-20 front panel
The abbreviations refer to SDH and SONET events.

The following events apply to SONET only:
AIS-L RDI-L
LOP-P AIS-P
UNEQ-P PLM-P
RDI-P LOP-V
AIS-V UNEQ-V
PLM-V BIP-V
RDI-V (AIS-)Yellow

2 Basic operation
The ANT-20 or ANT-20E are operated just like any other Windows application. Entries are
usually made using the trackball. More complex entries are made using the built-in keyboard
and pre-defined function keys. An external keyboard can be connected to socket [03] if
required.
The following sections describe the operating concept of the ANT-20 and ANT-20E with the aid
of some typical examples. Most functions are self-explanatory, so you will become familiar with
the basic operation of the instrument fairly quickly. On-line help is provided to allow you to use
the ANT-20 to the full and to match it to your requirements. For this reason, these operating
instructions have been kept brief. On-line help is accessed by pressing function key F1 (see
Sec. 7, Page O-33).
The ANT-20 and ANT-20E differ in the operating systems that they use. The ANT-20 (series A
through W) uses “Windows for Workgroups 3.11”. The ANT-20 (from series X) and ANT-20E
use “Windows95”. All the “screen shots” illustrated in this operating manual are taken from the
“Windows95” environment. They are practically identical with the “Windows3.11” displays.
Where the ANT-20 differs from the ANT-20E, this is indicated separately.
3 Switching on the ANT-20/ANT-20E

Before switching the instrument on, observe the following precautions:
• The instrument must not be damaged in any way that would affect safe operation.
• The instrument must not be switched on if condensation is present.
• The local a.c. line voltage and frequency must match the a.c. line voltage and frequency
ranges of the ANT-20/ANT-20E.
• The protective ground conductor must be properly connected.
3.1 Connecting up
1. Connect the ANT-20/ANT-20E a.c. line input to the local a.c. power supply using the line
cord supplied with the instrument.
2. Connect the signal output [14] and signal input [15] together with a screened coaxial cable.
3.2 Switching on
⇒ Switch on the ANT-20/ANT-20E by setting the POWER switch to the “I” position.

3.2.1 After switching on
The ANT-20/ANT-20E is factory-configured to perform the following actions when it is switched

on:
• MS-DOS 6.xx starts (ANT-20 with Windows 3.11 only).
• All necessary DOS drivers are loaded (ANT-20 with Windows 3.11 only).
• Windows starts.
• All necessary windows drivers are loaded.
• The ANT-20 software is loaded and started.
3.3 Switching on with function key “F3” APPL pressed
If you want to start the ANT-20 with the default settings and ignore the last application that was
saved
– or –
if problems occur with a previously-saved application during boot-up of the ANT-20 software:
1. Press function key F3 “APPL” when the welcome screen is displayed.
A dialog window opens after a few seconds.
2. Click on the “Yes” button in the dialog window.
When switched on for the first time, the ANT-20 screen will look like this:
ANT20
Application Title
Signal Structure
Fig. O-6 ANT-20 screen display when first switched on
The display initially comprises two windows or virtual instruments, namely:

• ANT20 - <Application Title>
• Signal Structure

3.4 Further operating procedure
In the following sections of part 3, the basic elements of the “ANT20 - <Application Title>”
window are described first. This will teach you the operating concept of the ANT-20 and tell you
how to call up the virtual instruments (VI) required for a particular application, and how to use
them for future tasks.
In part 4 of this manual you will find detailed information about the windows and dialogs of the
individual virtual instruments. This information is also found in the on-line help for the particular
VI to provide instant assistance for measurement tasks.
In part 5 you will find some selected measurement examples which will help you to understand
the basic operating sequences for the ANT-20 and how you can approach each measurement
effectively.
3.5 Starting programs with the “Instant Access Buttons”
Note: When you switch on the ANT-20, Windows starts by default and the ANT-20 software
will be loaded (see Fig. O-6).
Other programs are installed on the ANT-20. These programs can be started with the “Instant
Access Buttons” or using icons (shortcuts). Proceed as follows:
1. Click on “Exit” in the “Application” menu of the “ANT-20 - <Application Title>” (Application
Manager) window.
The ANT-20 program terminates.
Note: Programs that do not utilize the ANT-20E hardware, such as “Notepad”, “Acrobat
Reader” or other Windows applications, can be run at the same time as the ANT-20
program.
2. Double click on the icon on the desktop.
The “Instant Access Buttons” application will be activated.

The desktop will now look like this:
“Instant Access Buttons”
Activate “Instant Access

Buttons”
Start “ANT-20”
programs
Other program icons

and folders
Fig. O-7 ANT-20 desktop after activating the “Instant Access Buttons”

3. Click on the “Instant Access Button” or on the icon for the program that you want to start.
The program will start.
The following programs can be started in this way:
Instant
Access
Button Program / File Explanation
ANT-20 Starts the ANT-20 program with a pre-defined application.
ANT-20 NEXT Starts the demo version1 of the “ANT-20 NEXT” (ANT-20
BN 3035/95.40 Network Expert Test) software.
ANT-20 CATS Starts the demo version1 of the “ANT-20 CATS” software with
BN 3035/95.90 a pre-defined application.
NOTEPAD.EXE Starts the Window Notepad program (text editor).
NOTEPAD.EXE Opens the readme file about the “Instant Access Buttons”.
1 The full version of the program starts once software access has been released.
Table O-3 Programs / Files that may be started with the “Instant Access Buttons”
Icon Program / File Explanation
ANT-20 Starts the ANT-20 program with the last application that was
loaded.
Shortcut Activates the “Instant Access Buttons”.
MTIE/TDEV Analysis Starts the demo version1 of the “MTIE/TDEV Analysis”

BN 3035/95.21 software.
CATS Test Sequencer Starts the demo version1 of the “CATS Test Sequencer”
BN 3035/95.90 software.
Acrobat Reader Opens the “Quick Guide SDH” pdf file.
Table O-4 Programs / Files that may be started with icons (links)

Icon Program / File Explanation
Acrobat Reader Opens the “Quick Guide SONET” pdf file.
Shortcut Opens a folder with pdf files that can be read using the
Acrobat Reader.
Shortcut Opens a folder with pdf files that can be read using the
Acrobat Reader.
Shortcut For service purposes only.
Table O-4 Programs / Files that may be started with icons (links) (continued)
Notes on the use of the “Instant Access Buttons”

If you often use the “Instant Access Buttons” or you work with other applications, remove the
shortcut for starting the ANT-20 program from the “Startup” group.
The “ANT-20”, “CATS” or “ANT-20 NEXT” programs cannot be run simultaneously. If one of
these programs has been started, you cannot start another of these applications using the
“Instant Access Buttons”.
If you remove the ANT-20 program shortcut from the “Startup” group, long-term measurements
will not be resumed if they are interrupted by an AC power failure. Copy the “ANT-20” icon back
into the “Startup” group or use an uninterruptible power supply if you want to make long term
measurements.
Removing the “Instant Access Buttons” application

1. Press the “Shift” key.
2. Click on one of the “Instant Access Buttons” at the same time.
A context menu opens.
3. Click on “Exit”.
The “Instant Access Buttons” are removed.
– or –
⇒ Press the “Alt” + “F4” keys simultaneously when the “Instant Access Buttons” are activated.
The “Instant Access Buttons” are removed.
Editing the “Instant Access Buttons”

Each of the “Instant Access Buttons” can be customized to your requirements. You can change
the labelling or link a button to a different application. More information about how to do this is
found in the README file for the “Instant Access Buttons” (open by double clicking on the
README icon).

4 ANT-20 windows
4.1 Overview
4.1.1 The “ANT20 - <Application Title>” (Application Manager) window
The “ANT20 - <Application Title>” window is the control panel for the ANT-20. It performs the
following important tasks:
Management of:
• Measurement applications
• Virtual instruments (VI) associated with the measurements
• Results recorded by the measurements
Other functions:
• Starting a measurement
• Stopping a measurement
• Entering the duration of a measurement
• etc.
Overview of the “ANT20 - <Application Title>” window
• Loading an application see Sec. 5.4, Page O-25

• Creating an application see Sec. 5.1, Page O-21
• Saving an application see Sec. 5.3, Page O-25
• Measuring with the ANT-20/ANT-20E see Sec. 6, Page O-27
• Calling up on-line help see Sec. 7, Page O-33
Information on using the windows is found in Sec. 8, Page O-34.

The remaining sections cover the following topics:
• Printing out and exporting results see Sec. 9, Page O-37

• ANT-20/ANT-20E reaction to a.c. power failure see Sec. 10, Page O-44

4.1.2 Virtual instruments
Various virtual instruments are combined to form a measurement application.

Note: Up to eight virtual instruments can be loaded simultaneously. A warning message is
displayed when no further virtual instruments can be loaded.
Each virtual instrument is displayed in a separate window. The virtual instruments for the
measurement application that is currently loaded are also shown as icons on the left-hand side
of the Application Manager.
Virtual instruments are used to control or display certain related functions or measurement
results. Detailed information about the individual virtual instruments is found in Part 4 of this
manual. This information is also found in the on-line help for the particular VI to provide instant
assistance for measurement tasks.
The virtual instruments fall into four main groups:
• Signal Structure see: Part 4, Section 2
The “Signal Structure” VI is a universal instrument that is required for practically every
application. It is normally loaded at the same time as the Application Manager when the
program is booted up.
• Physical Layer
These VIs are used for measurements in the physical layer:
– Anomaly/Defect Insertion see: Part 4, Section 3

– Anomaly/Defect Analyzer see: Part 4, Section 4
– Overhead Generator see: Part 4, Section 5
– Overhead Analyzer see: Part 4, Section 6
– Pointer Generator see: Part 4, Section 7
– Pointer Analyzer see: Part 4, Section 8
– PDH Generator/Analyzer see: Part 4, Section 9
– Performance Analysis see: Part 4, Section 10
– O.172 Jitter Generator/Analyzer see see Operating Manual BN 3035/96.21, Part 7
• ATM Standard
These VIs are used for measurements in the ATM layer if the “ATM Module/ATM Mappings”
option is fitted.
– ATM Signal Structure see Operating Manual BN 3035/96.21, Part 8

– ATM Background Generator see Operating Manual BN 3035/96.21, Part 8
– ATM Traffic Analyzer see Operating Manual BN 3035/96.21, Part 8
• ATM Advanced
These instruments are used for measurements in the ATM and higher service layers if the
“Broadband Analyzer/Generator” option is fitted.
– ATM Test Control see Operating Manual BN 3035/96.21, Part 9

– ATM Test Result see Operating Manual BN 3035/96.21, Part 9
– ATM Channel Explorer see Operating Manual BN 3035/96.21, Part 9

4.2 Elements of the “ANT20 - <Application Title>” window
The “ANT20 - <Application Title>” window is made up from the following elements:
• Toolbar
• Menu bar with pull-down menus
• Title bar
Some functions can be accessed from the menus and from the icons in the toolbar. The
individual elements are described in the sections that follow.
To allow you to make the best use of the screen area while you are working, the “ANT20 -
<Application Title>” window can be switched from its normal size (see Fig. O-8) to a space-
saving reduced size (see Sec. 4.2.1).
Toolbar
Menu bar
Title bar
“Normal” - “Reduced” (Minibar) toggle
Fig. O-8 The “ANT20 <Application Title>” window, normal size
4.2.1 Minibar (Application Manager reduced form)
The Toolbar includes the main functions of the Application Manager and corresponds to the
reduced form of the Application Manager window, also called “Minibar”. You still have instant
access to the central control and management functions of the ANT-20 from this Minibar. You
can configure it so that it is always on top (never hidden by other windows).
4.2.1.1 Displaying virtual instruments
Next to the toggle button there is an arrow button which is used to select the virtual instruments
for an application (Add & Remove). The example shows an application with three virtual
instruments. To enter parameters or read the results in a particular VI, simply click on the
corresponding icon button in the Minibar. The corresponding window will then be placed on top.
This gives you instant access to every window in an application even if some windows are
concealed by others or have been reduced to icons (see Fig. O-33).
4.2.1.2 Starting and stopping a measurement
Measurements are started and stopped using the “traffic signal” icon button. The progress of the
measurement can be monitored in the adjacent display fields.
These show the status of the measurement and the elapsed measurement time as well as the
set measurement time.

4.2.1.3 Disabling entries
You can disable entries from the keyboard, touchscreen or trackball to prevent unintentional
operation.
⇒ Click on the “Keyboard Lock ...” command in the “Configure” menu.
– or –
⇒ Click on the icon in the “ANT20 - <Application Title>” (“Minibar”) window.

Entry will be disabled.
4.2.1.4 Enabling entries
1. Press the “Alt” + “Tab” keys repeatedly until the “Minibar” is activated.
2. Press the “ESC” key.
4.2.1.5 Other important functions
The Minibar still provides access to all major instrument functions. If you click on an area where
there are no icon buttons, a pop-up menu appears. This contains a selection of functions from
the menu bar, including functions for application management and closing the program.
Tip: If you want the reduced Application Manager to be always visible, select the “Always on
Top” option in the “Configure” menu (see Sec. 4.2.2.4).
Three virtual instruments (example setting) Measurement control Instrument status
“Add & Remove” dialog Start, Elapsed Set measure- Keyboard

stop time ment time lock
Toggle button Measurement
status
Pop-up menu
Fig. O-9 Elements of the Minibar or reduced “ANT20 - <Application Title>” window

4.2.2 Menu bar and pull-down menus
Pull-down
menu
Fig. O-10 Menu bar with “Application” pull-down menu opened
The menu bar shows the names of the various pull-down menus.
Menu commands followed by an ellipsis (…) open further windows or dialogs. Some commands
are followed by a hotkey combination. Press the keys shown to execute the command directly.
4.2.2.1 The “Application” menu
The “Application” menu (see Fig. O-10) handles the following functions for ANT-20 applications:
• Create
• Load
• Save
• Delete
• Import
• Export
The “Exit” command closes the “ANT20 - <Application Title>” window and any other ANT-20
windows that are open. The program stops and all settings are saved.

4.2.2.2 The “Instruments” menu
Fig. O-11 The “Instruments” menu of the “ANT20 - <Application Title>” window (example)
The menu has two parts:

• Add & Remove
This command opens the “Add & Remove Instruments” dialog window which is used to add
VIs to an application or remove VIs from an application (see Sec. 5.1, Page O-21).
• List of VIs in the current application.
Selecting one of the items in this part of the menu places the corresponding VI window on
top.
4.2.2.3 The “Measurement” menu
Fig. O-12 The “Measurement” menu of the “ANT20 - <Application Title>” window
The “Measurement” menu is used to start and stop the measurement.

It is also used to configure the measurement sequence with the “Settings …” dialog. The menu
items “Load, Save, Delete Result” are used to handle the measurement results. Each set of
measurement results consists of the instrument settings and all the measurement results for the
last measurement interval that has elapsed.

4.2.2.4 The “Configure” menu
Fig. O-13 The “Configure” menu of the “ANT20 - <Application Title>” window
The “Configure” menu sets whether the Minibar (Application Manager) is to be always visible or
not. It is also used to set the menu language and lock the keyboard to prevent inadvertent
operation, if required.
The “LED Display ...” command extends the functions of the LED display on the front panel. The
“AU-LOP/LOP-P” LED can be used to indicate the message “AU-NDF” in addition to the “AU-
LOP/LOP-P” messages. The “TU-LOP/LOP-V” LED can be used in the same way to indicate
the message “TU-NDF” in addition to the “TU-LOP/LOP-V” messages.
The “Keyboard Lock ...” command disables entries using the keyboard, touchscreen or trackball
to prevent unintentional operation. Entry is enabled again when you press the “ESC” key. The
“ANT20 - <Application Title>” (“Minibar”) window must be active for this (also see
Sec. 4.2.1.4, Page O-16).
The “Delete result warning” item is used to activate a warning message that will appear if you
perform an operating step that will result in deletion of results.
4.2.2.5 The “Print” menu
Fig. O-14 The “Print” menu of the “ANT20 - <Application Title>” window
The “Print” menu of the Application Manager allows you to collectively print out the available
measurement results from the opened virtual instruments.
4.2.2.6 The “Help” menu
Fig. O-15 The “Help” menu of the “ANT20 - <Application Title>” window
This menu opens the on-line help for the Application Manager window and also opens the error
window. The “About...” option displays a window showing the instrument version, software
version and a list of the options fitted to the mainframe.

4.2.3 Title bar
Close ANT-20 program!

Control menu box “Maximize”
Title “Minimize”
Fig. O-16 Title bar
Control menu box

The control menu box is located in the upper left corner of a window. The control menu itself
varies from one application to another, and contains commands for handling the application
windows.
Tip: The main VI windows of the ANT-20 cannot be closed by double clicking on the control
menu box. A double click on the control menu box reduces the window to an icon
(exception: “ANT20 - <Application Title>” window).
Title
The title shows the name of the application that is loaded, e.g. “STM-1 Error Test”. If you create
a new application the title will initially show “Untitled”.
Minimize button
Click on the “Minimize” button to reduce the Application Manager to its reduced size. The
“Minimize” button reduces all other virtual instruments to icons.
Maximize button
The “Maximize” button has no function in the main VI windows. It is grayed out in Windows 95.
It does not exist in Windows 3.11.
Close ANT-20 program button

Click on the “Close” button to close the window and exit from the application.
The button corresponds to the menu command “Application / Exit”.

5 Creating, saving and loading applications

An application is created in three steps:
• Select the virtual instruments for the application.
• Set the signal structure.
• Save the application.
5.1 Selecting the virtual instruments for an application
The virtual instruments to be used for an application are selected in the “Add & Remove
Instruments” dialog of the Application Manager (see Fig. O-17). There are two basic ways to set
up an application:
⇒ You can create a new application by modifying an existing selection. To do this, call up the
“Add & Remove Instruments” dialog directly by clicking on the icon button shown above.
– or –
⇒ You can create a new application without reference to a previous selection. To do this, call
up the “Add & Remove Instruments” dialog using the “Application / New” command.
This removes all the currently loaded VIs and loads the default settings.
“Add & Remove” dialog when no ATM options are fitted
“Add” and “Remove”

buttons
List box (VIs available) List box (VIs in the application)
Fig. O-17 The “Add & Remove Instruments” dialog window of the Application Manager
The dialog is split into the following parts:

• “Instruments available” list box: This shows all the VIs that are available, depending on the
selection already made. All the VIs except “Signal Structure” are listed if the “Application/
New” command was used to open the dialog.
• “Instruments used” list box: This shows the VIs used for the application. The “Signal
Structure” VI is shown if the “Application/New” command was used to open the dialog.
• Action buttons for adding and removing VIs to / from an application.

To select VIs for an application

1. Click on the first VI that you want to load from the “Instruments available” list box, e.g.
“Anomaly/Defect Analyzer”.
The name is highlighted.
2. Click on the “Add >>” button.
– or –
Double click on the VI that you want to load, e.g. “Anomaly/Defect Analyzer”
The item in the list will be transferred from the “Instruments available” list box to the
“Instruments used” list box.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add further VIs to your application.
The “Add & Remove Instruments” dialog window will then look something like the figure
below.
4. Click on the “OK” button when you have added all the VIs that you require.
In the example, the “Anomaly/Defect Insertion”, “Anomaly/Defect Analyzer” and “Signal
Structure” VI windows will now open. The icons for these VIs are also now displayed in the
“ANT20 - <Application Title>” window (normal or reduced size) and the names of these VIs
are also listed in the “Instruments” menu.
Fig. O-18 “Add & Remove Instruments” dialog window after adding the VIs required
(“Physical Layer” group pre-selected)
The “Add & Remove” dialog when ATM options are fitted
If your ANT-20 is equipped with one or more ATM options (ATM Module, Broadband Analyzer/
Generator), you can display the virtual instruments in groups for selection from the “Instruments
available” list box.
Fig. O-19 Check boxes for selecting / deselecting instrument groups

This reduces the scope of the list for a given application to make it easier to locate the VIs you
want to select. When all options are fitted, the following instrument groups are available:
• Group 1: “Physical Layer”: VIs for the physical layer (standard)
• Group 2: “ATM Standard”: VIs for the “ATM Module” option (BN 3035/90.70)
• Group 3: “ATM Advanced”: VIs for the “Broadband Analyzer/Generator” option
(BN 3035/90.80)
For applications that only involve the physical layer, the Group 2 and 3 instruments can be
removed.
5.2 Entering the signal structure
The Signal Structure“ virtual instrument has a special position among the ANT-20 VIs. Before
you start to make the settings for your application in the various VIs, the structure of the signal
to which the ANT-20 is to be connected must be entered (sets the interface conditions for the
physical layer).
1. In the Application Manager, click on the icon button shown above to activate the instrument.
The “Signal Structure” window opens. The display area of the window depicts the signal
structure setting that is currently valid.
Fig. O-20 The “Signal Structure” window
2. Click on the above icon in the toolbar.

– or –
Click on the “Signal Structure” command in the “Edit” menu.
The “Edit Signal Structure - TX” dialog window opens.
Fig. O-21 The “Edit Signal Structure - TX” dialog window

Example
The following example shows how to set up a “STS-1/VT1.5/DS1 framed” multiplex structure for
the generator (TX) and receiver (RX).
3. Click on the “TX” button in the “Edit” field of the “Edit Signal Structure - TX“ dialog window.
4. Click on the “Clear” button.
The TX signal structure is cleared.
5. Click on the “ANSI” button.
6. Click on the following buttons in the “Edit Signal Structure - TX” dialog window in the order
given:
– “TX”
– “STS1”
– “VT1.5 SPE”
– “DS1”
– “Framed”
– “TX => RX”
The “Signal Structure” dialog window will then look like this:
Fig. O-22 “Signal Structure” dialog window after entering the signal structure
7. Confirm the settings you made by clicking on “OK”.

You can also enter the signal structures for the TX and RX sides separately if you want to use
different signal structures for the generator and the receiver.
Using the menus or the toolbar of the “Signal Structure” dialog window, you can make other
settings such as:
• Offset
• Clock Source
• Line code
• etc.
The “Mapping” and “Channel” boxes in the signal structure are “context-sensitive”. If you click
on one of the elements, a specific dialog window (channel settings dialog) opens.
The signal structure is saved along with the application.
Tip: More information on the “Signal Structure” VI is found in Part 4, Section 2 or in the on-line
help for the window.

5.3 Saving an application
Once you have created an application, it is saved using the “Save Application As” dialog.
Depending on the Application Manager setting (reduced or normal size) the dialog is opened in
various ways.
⇒ Open the dialog using the “Application Save As...” command in the pop-up menu (reduced
size Application Manager).
– or –
⇒ Open the dialog using the command sequence “Application / Save As...” (normal size
Application Manager).
The “Save Application As” dialog window opens.
Comment for
the application
Fig. O-23 The “Save Application As” window
To save an application
1. Click on the “Comment” box.
2. Use the keyboard to enter a comment for the application, e.g. “Error Measurement”.
3. Click on “OK”.
The application is saved. The window title shown in the title bar of the Application Manager
will change from “Untitled” to the title you entered in the “Comment” box, e.g. “Error
Measurement”.
• The “Application Save” (reduced size) and “Application / Save” (normal size) Application
Manager menu commands modify the current application in the database.
• The “Application Save As...” (reduced size) and “Application / Save As...” (normal size)
Application Manager menu commands create a new application.
5.4 Loading an application
The ANT-20 allows you to load pre-defined applications using the “Open Application” dialog.
⇒ Open the dialog using the “Application Open...” command in the pop-up menu (reduced size
– or –
⇒ Open the dialog using the command sequence “Application / Open...” (normal size
– or –
⇒ Press function key “F3” APPL.
The “Open Application...” dialog window opens.

The “Open Application” dialog

The “Open Application” dialog contains a list of available applications for a particular drive
(Source). The scrollbars are used to move through the list horizontally and vertically.
To load an application
1. Click on the item in the list corresponding to the application that you want to load.
The item is highlighted in gray.
2. Click on the “OK” button.
The selected application is loaded and the ANT-20 is immediately ready to measure.
Drive selection
List of applications
Scrollbars
Comment for application

(for searching using the
Application Filter)
Filter criterion selection
Fig. O-24 The “Open Application” dialog window
Press function key “F5” MEASUREMENT START to start a measurement using the pre-
selected measurement parameters.
Tip: Handling of applications is simplified by selecting filter criteria.
Saved applications are differentiated by the following features:
• Date/time saved
• TX signal structure
• RX signal structure
• Comment
Using the buttons in the “Application Filter:” field, you can select a signal structure, separate for
the generator and receiver.
Only those applications having this signal structure will then be displayed.
Enter a comment in the “Comment:” field to search for applications with corresponding
comments. The “W&G” button lists only those pre-defined applications with names beginning
with “W&G …”.

6 Measuring
This section basically describes how to
• set the measurement duration
– for a manually-started measurement
– for an automatically-started measurement
• set the measurement parameters, e.g. insert an anomaly
• start the measurement
• stop the measurement
• display the results e.g. using the “Anomaly/Defect Analyzer” VI
• Other TX parameters are normally set using the Generator VIs or windows.
• Results are normally displayed using the Analyzer VIs or windows.
Further information is found in Part 4.
6.1 Setting the parameters
Setting the measurement duration (Application Manager)
The measurement duration (e.g. 60 seconds) is set using the “Measurement Settings” dialog in
the Application Manager.
1. Open the dialog using the “Measurement Settings...” command in the pop-up menu
(reduced size Application Manager).
– or –
Open the dialog using the command sequence “Measurement / Settings...” (normal size
The “Measurement Settings” dialog window opens.
2. Activate the “Seconds” option button in the “Gate Time” field (“Seconds” button is marked
with a dot).
3. Enter the value 60 into the “Gate Time” input field unless this value is not already displayed.
4. Click on “OK”.
Start mode
manual
automatic
Start time
Set to current date (system clock)
Intermediate time (for results output)

Total measurement time
Units
Fig. O-25 The “Measurement Settings” dialog window

Inserting an anomaly (“Anomaly/Defect Insertion” VI)
Anomalies or defects are inserted from the “Anomaly/Defect Insertion” window. The following
example describes how to insert a “TSE” (Test Sequence Error) with an error rate of 10-6.
To insert e.g. an anomaly

1. Activate the “Anomaly/Defect Insertion” window.
2. Select “Anomalies” from the “View” menu.
– or –
Click on the corresponding button in the toolbar.
3. Activate the “TSE” (Test Sequence Error, Bit Error) option button in the “Anomaly” field.
4. Activate the “continuous” option button in the “Insertion” field.
5. Select an anomaly rate of “1E-6” from the “Rate” list box.
6. Click the “ON” button in the toolbar.
– or –
Press function key “F7” INSERTION/ANOMALY.
– “TX ANOMALY” appears in the status box in the Application Manager toolbar.
– The results of the measurement in progress are displayed in the windows of the
appropriate VIs, in this case in the “Anomaly/Defect Analyzer” window.
Toolbar
Anomaly rate
Fig. O-26 The “Anomaly/Defect Insertion” window
Tip: More information about the “Anomaly/Defect Insertion” VI is found in Part 4, Section 3 or
in the on-line help for the window.

6.2 Starting and stopping the measurement
The measurement is controlled from the Application Manager as follows:

• Start and stop measurement manually (see Sec. 6.2.1)
• Start measurement manually and stop measurement automatically (see Sec. 6.2.2)
• Start and stop measurement automatically (see Sec. 6.2.3)
6.2.1 Starting and stopping a measurement manually
Measurements can be controlled manually by clicking on the “Traffic signal” icon in the
Application Manager (start / stop toggle function).
✓ “Manual” start mode must be activated, see “Measurement Settings” dialog.
✓ Before starting the measurement, the traffic signal icon is set to “green”.
Starting a measurement manually
Fig. O-27 Icon and menu command for starting a measurement
⇒ Click on the “Traffic signal” icon button.

– or –
⇒ Select the “Start” command in the “Measurement” menu.
– or –
⇒ Press function key “F5” MEASUREMENT START.
– The traffic signal button changes to a “red light” and the “Stop” command in the
“Measurement” menu is activated.
– The Application Manager status display changes from <Stopped> to <Running>.
Stopping a measurement manually
Fig. O-28 Icon and menu command for stopping a measurement
⇒ Click on the “Traffic signal” icon button again.

– or –
⇒ Select the “Stop” command in the “Measurement” menu.
– or –
⇒ Press function key “F6” MEASUREMENT STOP.
– The measurement stops and the traffic signal button changes to a “green light”.
– The Application Manager status display changes from <Running> to <Stopped>.

6.2.2 Starting a measurement manually and stopping automatically
Measurements can be controlled semi-automatically. Starting is manual, the measurement is

stopped automatically as soon as the measurement time interval has elapsed.
Controlling the measurement

1. Open the “Measurement Settings” dialog (see Fig. O-25).
2. Enter the desired timing for the measurement in the “Gate Time” box, e.g. 60 seconds.
3. Click the “OK” button to confirm the settings.
Fig. O-29 Setting the start mode (Timer)
4. Click on the “green light” to start the measurement.

– The measurement starts and the traffic signal icon changes to a “red light”.
– The measurement stops automatically when the set gate time has elapsed.
6.2.3 Starting and stopping a measurement automatically (timer)
Measurements can also take place fully automatically by programming the start time and stop
time. The start time is specified as an absolute time (date and time). The stop time is a relative
time, determined by the measurement time or “Gate Time”.
Controlling the measurement

1. Open the “Measurement Settings” dialog (see Fig. O-25).
2. Select “Timer” start mode.
3. Enter the desired start date in the “MM-DD-YY” boxes.
– or –
Click on the “Current Date” button if you want the measurement to start today.
4. Enter the desired start time in the “hh-mm-ss” boxes.
5. Enter the measurement time in the “Gate Time” box. The measurement stops after this time.
6. Click the “OK” button to confirm your entries.
– The measurement will start at the pre-selected time.
– The measurement will stop as soon as the pre-set gate time has elapsed.
Fig. O-30 Settings: Start mode (Timer), Start Time and Gate Time

6.3 Displaying results e.g. anomalies
The results are displayed by various virtual instruments (see Analyzer VIs in Part 4).
The “Anomaly/Defect Analyzer” VI is used here as an example. This instrument displays the
intermediate and final results of measurements of anomalies or defects.
⇒ Click on the above icon for this VI in the Application Manager.
The “Anomaly/Defect Analyzer” VI is placed on top.
Select display mode
Histogram
(Graph) Table Summary
Count
(Num)
Fig. O-31 Example result display in “Anomaly/Defect Analyzer” window (View “Graph”)
Setting the filter

The “User Filter …” command in the “Filter” menu opens the “User Filter” window. You can
make filter settings in this window so that only certain anomalies or defects are displayed. The
filter operates when the “User” option button in the current display mode is activated. Filter
settings can only be changed when the instrument status is “STOPPED”.
Positioning the cursor (View “Graph”/“Table”)

The “Goto …” command in the “Cursor” menu moves the cursor to a specified time section of
the results list. The “Cursor” menu also contains other commands that are used to position the
cursor.
Printing out the results (View “Table”/“Num”)

The “Print …” command in the “Print” menu is used to print out the results when a printer is
connected to socket [05] or [06] (see Sec. 9.3.1, Page O-40).

Exporting results (View “Table”/“Num”)

The “Export …” command in the “Print” menu is used to export results in a CSV formatted file.
This file can be processed with any word processor or spreadsheet program (also see
Sec. 9.3.2, Page O-41).
Setting the display resolution (View “Graph”)

The commands in the “Zoom” menu are used to set the display resolution. The selected time
segment is automatically transferred to the “Table” display when you select this View mode.
Other results are shown in the windows of other VIs.
Tip: More information on the “Anomaly/Defect Analyzer” VI is found in Part 4, Section 4 or in
the on-line help for the window.

7 On-line help
On-line help is available for each VI window.
The on-line help function provides information about a particular task, function, command or
parameter.
7.1 Calling up on-line help
To call up the on-line help function

⇒ Press function key “F1”.
– or –
⇒ Select the “Contents” command from the “Help” menu.
– or –
⇒ Click on “?” in the toolbar.
F1
Fig. O-32 Commands and keys for calling up on-line help
7.2 Calling up a help topic
⇒ Click on the terms underlined in green in the text on which you require more information.
– or –
⇒ Click on the context-sensitive areas of the figures when this feature is indicated.
7.3 Setting the size of the help window
When on-line help is called up, the help window fills the entire display area. You can reduce the
size of the window and move its position on the display as required.
If you make the help window very small, part of the text may be obscured. If this is so, scrollbars
appear down the right-hand side and along the bottom of the window. These are used to scroll
through the text.
Tip: If you reduce the size of the help window so as to display the measurement program at
the same time, select the “Small” font (“Options” menu). This makes best use of the
available area of the help window.

8 How to use the windows
8.1 Arranging the application windows
The number of virtual instruments in your ANT-20 depends on the hardware and software fitted.
The VIs are included into applications that are created and managed using the Application
Manager. When an application is loaded, all the windows for the VIs included in the application
will be opened. The parameters for the VIs are set using these windows and other dialog
windows. The dialog windows open when you click on various buttons or certain menu
commands in the VI windows.
Tip: As the display area of the screen is limited, all VI windows that are not needed should be
reduced to icon buttons (use the “Minimize” button).
An iconized VI window can be restored to its original size at any time
- by clicking on the corresponding icon in the Application Manager, or
- by clicking on the corresponding icon button in the task bar at the bottom of the screen.
VI: Application Manager

(normal size)
VI: Anomaly/Defect Insertion
Task bar
VI: Anomaly/Defect Analyzer
VI: Signal Structure
reduced to icon buttons
Fig. O-33 Screen display of virtual instruments

8.2 Commonly-used controls
When you select a menu command or an icon, a dialog window may appear in the foreground
for you to make further settings. If required, a dialog window can be open at the same time as
a display window, for example if you want to display results during a measurement and change
the parameters on-line.
The commonly-used dialog window controls are described below using the “User Filter” (VI
“Anomaly/Defect Analyzer”) dialog as an example.
Option buttons
Dialog specific
action buttons
Standard action buttons:

Confirm entry
Cancel entry
Check box Entry box List box
Fig. O-34 Dialog window showing commonly-used controls
Option buttons
Option buttons are arranged in groups. Only one button can be activated in each group. The
selected or activated option is indicated by a black dot. Inactive option buttons are empty.
Action buttons
Clicking on an action button executes an action directly.
Action buttons with toggle functions appear pressed when clicked on once and the label on the
button changes (e.g. from “OFF” to “ON”). Clicking the button again causes it to “pop up” and
the label reverts to its original function (e.g. “OFF”).
Check boxes
Check boxes are used to activate / deactivate other options. The option that you selected is
indicated by a check (✔).
List boxes
List boxes generally contain one or more items arranged in a certain order. A current item in the
list is activated by clicking on it. A scrollbar appears next to the list if it contains more items than
can be displayed in the box at one time.

Entry boxes
These are boxes where you enter alphanumeric characters (parameter values, names). Where
numerical values are to be entered, the range of values allowed for the parameter will be
checked. Invalid parameter values are ignored.
Important: Entries are accepted only when the cursor in the entry box stops blinking. This
happens when you move to another entry box by clicking on it or by pressing the “TAB” key.
You can enter characters from the normal keyboard or by means of the “Keyboard” window if
you have activated the “Keyboard On” option.
“OK” button
The “OK” button confirms the parameter entries or changes you made and closes the dialog.
“Cancel” button
The “Cancel” button cancels the parameter entries or changes you made and closes the dialog
window.
“CLOSE” button (not shown)

If a dialog window includes a “CLOSE” button instead of the two buttons “OK” and “Cancel”, this
means that parameters are set as soon as they are entered or altered (see input boxes). The
“CLOSE” button simply closes the dialog window.
Keyboard
If the keyboard is activated, you can enter numerical values “on-screen”. The “Keyboard”
window appears whenever a dialog window containing entry boxes is opened.
The alpha keys are also activated if the parameter to be entered is in hexadecimal code.
The “OK” button transfers the value in the “Keyboard” entry box to the entry box in the dialog
window that was previously selected.
The “Keyboard” window closes as soon as you close the dialog window.
Entry box
Clear all
Clear last digit
Increment
Decrement
Exponent
Confirm entry
for negative values
Fig. O-35 The “Keyboard” window for entering numerical parameter values

9 Printing and exporting results

You can connect a printer to the parallel interface (socket [05]) or to the serial interface (socket
[06]).
The results can only be printed out or exported when all measurements in progress have ended.
Printing out all final results from the Application Manager

The available measurement results from the opened virtual instruments can be printed out
collectively from the Application Manager.
The following virtual instruments can supply results:
Virtual instrument Results
Signal Structure Optical level (range)

Offset (range)
Anomaly/Defect Results that are available from the "Num" display
Analysis
Performance Analysis Performance results for the currently selected evaluation and the
corresponding setting values.
Jitter O.172 Jitter measurement:
(Jitter O.171) Jitter peak - peak max
Jitter + peak max
Jitter - peak max
Phase Hits pos. count
Phase Hits neg. count
Wander measurement:
MTIE final result
plus the corresponding setting values for the results
Table O-5 Possible results included in the printout for the “Print all ...” command
All other virtual instruments provide no results for the printout.

Unavailable results are indicated by * on the printout.
Virtual instrument print and export functions

The following virtual instruments allow printout of results:
• Anomaly/Defect Analyzer
• Pointer Analyzer
• Performance Analysis
• ATM Traffic Analyzer (options BN 3035/90.70 through 90.77)
• Jitter Generator/Analyzer (options BN 3035/90.60 through 90.69)
• ATM Test Results (option BN 3035/90.80)
• ATM Test Control (option BN 3035/90.80)

9.1 Installing a printer
If the driver for the printer that you want to use is not yet installed on the ANT-20/ANT-20E, you
must install the driver first.
You can install the driver from Windows 3.11/Windows95 if it is included in these programs.
The printer drivers are located in directory C:\WFW311 (Windows 3.11) or C:\WIN95.SUP
(Windows95).
We recommend that you install the driver supplied with your printer, or a newer version if this is
available. The latest version of the driver can usually be downloaded from the printer
manufacturer’s Internet home page.
Installing printer drivers on the ANT-20 (Windows 3.11)

1. Open the “Control Panel” window from the “Main” program group in the Windows Program
Manager.
2. Click on the “Printers” icon in this window.
3. Install the printer driver using the “Add >>” button.
Installing printer drivers on the ANT-20/ANT-20E (Windows95)

1. Double-click on the “My Computer” icon on the Desktop.
The “My Computer” window opens.
2. Double-click on the “Printer” directory.
The “Printer” window opens.
3. Double-click on the “New Printer” icon.
4. Install the printer driver.

9.2 The “Print” menu – Application Manager
The “Print” menu of the Application Manager allows you to collectively print out the available
measurement results from the opened virtual instruments.
Fig. O-36 “Print” menu in the “ANT20 - <Application Title>” window
9.2.1 Printing results
1. Select the “Print all ...” command in the “Print” menu.

The printer dialog for the default printer opens.
2. Make any settings that are necessary.
3. Start the printout.
9.2.1.1 The “Print Headers” dialog
The “Print Headers” dialog is used to select information that is to be printed out together with the
results. The dialog window contains entry fields for:
• Company logo stored as a bitmap (*.BMP- or *.DIB file) in a directory
• Signal structure
– as a graph if the “Signal Structure” VI is loaded
– as text if the “Signal Structure” VI is not loaded
• Printout header with data identifying the measurement:
Test instrument inventory number, Customer name, Test object description, Tester’s name,
Date
• Comment text (information about the measurement)
The company logo is printed out at a fixed size with its original aspect ratio preserved on all
pages of the printout. The other items are printed out on the first page only.
Bitmap file name Select directory for bitmap
Header1
Inventory no of instrument
Customer name1
Test object description1
Tester’s names1
Date, signature
Comment text
1) Selection from the last

The checked items are printed out ten list box items maxim.
Fig. O-37 The “Print Headers” dialog

9.3 The “Print” menu – Virtual instruments
The “Print” menu is used to print out the results or to export them for further processing with
other programs.
Fig. O-38 The “Print” menu
9.3.1 Printing out results
The results are output to the default printer.

1. Select the “Print...” command in the “Print” menu.
The “Print” dialog opens (see Sec. 9.3.1.1).
2. Click on action button “Headers...”.
The “Print Headers” dialog opens (see Sec. 9.3.1.2):
3. Check off the elements that are to be printed.
4. Select the additional information you require from the list boxes.
5. Enter a comment in the “Comment” entry box.
6. Click on “OK” to confirm your entries and to come back to the “Print” dialog.
7. Enter the print quality and the number of copies if required.
8. Click on “OK” to start the print process.
The result record will be output to the default printer. The contents of the active results
window are printed out along with the additional information. The printout may take up
several pages, depending on the number of results that have been obtained.
9.3.1.1 The “Print” dialog
The “Print” dialog is used to trigger the printout. The following options can be pre-selected:
• Selection and input of additional informations via sub-dialogs
• Selection of printer, paper format via sub-dialog
• Setting the print quality
• Setting number of copies
Start printout!
selected Opening sub-dialogs:

additional Additional informations
information Selection of alternative printers
Fig. O-39 The “Print” dialog

9.3.1.2 The “Print Headers” dialog
See also Fig. O-37, Page O-39.

The “Print Headers” dialog is used to select information that is to be printed out together with the
results. The dialog window contains entry fields for:
• Company logo stored as a bitmap (*.BMP- or *.DIB file) in a directory
– as a graph if the “Signal Structure” VI is loaded
– as text if the “Signal Structure” VI is not loaded
• Printout header with data identifying the measurement:
Test instrument inventory number, Customer name, Test object description, Tester’s name,
Date
• Comment text (information about the measurement)
The company logo is printed out at a fixed size with its original aspect ratio preserved on all
pages of the printout. The other items are printed out on the first page only.
9.3.1.3 The “Printer Setup” dialog
The standard Windows “Printer Setup” dialog is used to select the following settings:
• Actual printer
• Paper size / format
• Other options in the “Options” sub-dialog.
The “Options” sub-dialog

The “options” sub-dialog of the “Printer Setup” dialog is used to select the following basic
settings:
• Print normally or redirect to Postscript file
• Margins
• Preface on / off
9.3.2 Exporting results
The results can be stored in a specified destination directory or on floppy disk for archiving or
for further processing.
1. Select the “Export...” command in the “Print” menu.
The “Save as” dialog opens (see Sec. 9.3.2.1).
2. Select the destination directory where you want the result file to be stored
(if you want to save to a floppy disk, insert one in the drive first).
3. Select the type of file for the saved results.
4. Click on the “OK” button to start exporting the results.
The file type can be altered using the “Export Setup” dialog (see Sec. 9.3.2.2).
The file type selection does not affect the contents of the file.

9.3.2.1 The “Save as” dialog
This dialog is used to define the file in which the results are to be exported. Exported data can
be processed with other programs, e.g. spreadsheet programs.
Data are output in CSV format (comma separated values). Each item of data is separated from
the next by a list separator. The list separator can be selected in the “Export Format” dialog.
File name Destination directory
Start exporting!
File type
Fig. O-40 Standard Windows “Save As” dialog for exporting results
9.3.2.2 The “Export Format” dialog
This dialog is used to select a list separator character to be used when exporting data. You can
also select the character to be used to indicate a decimal point. This allows you to match the
exported results to the requirements of any spreadsheet program you may be using.
If the results include time information, the time format can also be selected, e.g. “hh:mm:ss,ms”.
The “Defaults” button sets the current Windows system settings. These settings are useful if, for
example, you have installed MS Excel on your ANT-20/ANT-20E. Data exported using the
“Defaults” setting can be directly imported into MS Excel. When importing to another Windows
PC, the default configuration can be viewed and edited by opening the window “Control Panel”/
“International” (Windows 3.11) or the window “Control Panel”/“Regional Settings” (Windows95).
List separator Decimal separator
Time format
Fig. O-41 The “Export Format” dialog

9.4 The “Screen Dump” print function
You can print out a copy of the screen display if a printer is connected to the ANT-20/ANT-20E.
To print out the current screen display

⇒ Press the “Prt Sc” key on the front of the ANT-20/ANT-20E
(see Fig. O-1, Page O-1; keyboard area IV).

10 ANT-20/ANT-20E behavior in the event of an AC power failure
10.1 Backup data set
Once a measurement has started, the ANT-20/ANT-20E generates a set of backup data once
every minute. This data set contains all the measurement parameters and all measurement
results up to that point collected from the VIs. The ANT-20/ANT-20E can use the backup data
set to continue with the measurement after an AC power failure. The first backup data set is
available approximately 10 to 15 seconds after the start of the measurement. If a backup data
set has not yet been saved before a power failure occurs, the measurement cannot be
continued when power is restored.
The AC power failure time is saved as a “No-Power” alarm and is displayed when a backup data
set is generated.
Exceptions
No backup data are generated for automatic measurement sequences (Autoconfiguration, MTJ,
JTF, etc.).
A wander measurement is not an automatic measurement sequence. Wander measurements
will be resumed after an AC power failure.
The “intermediate” evaluation starts afresh on restoration of AC power. The “intermediate”
intervals are then no longer synchronous with the absolute time.

10.2 Examples
10.2.1 Manually triggered measurements
Manual First backup data set

start (available approx. 15 seconds after start) Stop
Time
No restore start
1.
No restore start
2.
Restore start
3.
4.
Duration of AC power failure
Fig. O-42 Examples of ANT-20/ANT-20E behavior in the event of an AC power failure (manually trig-
gered measurements)
1. AC power fails before the first set of backup data is generated:

On restoration of AC power, the measurement is not resumed.
A power failure within the first 15 seconds of a measurement means that no backup data has
been generated. The measurement must be restarted manually.
A “No-Power” alarm will not be displayed.
2. AC power fails before the first set of backup data is generated. The power failure lasts much
longer than in the previous case:
On restoration of AC power, the measurement is not resumed.
A power failure within the first 15 seconds of a measurement means that no backup data has
been generated. A “restore start” is therefore not possible; the measurement must be
restarted manually. The duration of the power failure in this case is almost until the normal
end of the measurement. A “No-Power” alarm will not be displayed.

3. AC power fails after the first set of backup data has been generated:
On restoration of AC power, the last set of backup data is loaded. The data is restored and
the measurement resumed.
The time from the generation of the last set of backup data until the “restore start” of the
measurement is indicated as a “No-Power” alarm and is taken into account in the restored
measurement values. The original stop time is retrieved from the last backup data and the
measurement restarted so that it ends at the stop time originally programmed (“Restore
Start”).
The “No-Power” alarm time is included in the “Elapsed Time”. At the end of the
measurement, the “Elapsed Time” is equal to the “Gate Time”.
4. AC power fails after the first set of backup data has been generated:
AC power is restored after the normal end of the measurement time.
As backup data was generated before the power failure, this backup data will be loaded
when power is restored. The data is restored and the end results generated (measurement
has ended). The time from the start of the AC power failure until the programmed end of the
measurement is indicated as a “No-Power” alarm. The “No-Power” alarm time up to the
programmed end of the measurement is included in the “Elapsed Time”. Hence the “Elapsed
Time” is equal to the “Gate Time”.
10.2.2 Timer-controlled measurements
If the measurement start time that you enter has already passed, the ANT-20/ANT-20E will start
measuring immediately when you press “F5” MEASUREMENT START. The measurement will
run for the set gate time. This behavior is independent of the AC power failure behavior.
Timer-controlled measurements are handled as follows:
The ANT-20/ANT-20E calculates the remaining time to the originally-programmed end of the
measurement from the configuration parameters. The measurement resumes and runs for this
calculated remaining time.

Timer activated Timer start Stop
Time
Normal measurement
1.
Actual start
2.
Actual start
3.
4.
Restore start
5.
6.
Duration of AC power failure
Fig. O-43 Examples of ANT-20/ANT-20E behavior in the event of an AC power failure (timer-controlled
measurements)
1. The AC power failure occurs between activation of the timer and the time when the timer
triggers the start of the measurement:
The AC power failure has no effect.
As no backup data could be generated and the actual start of the measurement is still in the
future, the measurement will be set normally with timer activated as soon as the AC power
is restored. A “No-Power” alarm will not be recorded or displayed.
2. The AC power failure lasts beyond the time when the timer should trigger the measurement
start:
The measurement starts asynchronously as soon as AC power is restored and runs for the
remaining time to the programmed stop time. The stop time is given by the timer start time
setting plus the gate time setting. A “No-Power” alarm will be detected and recorded. The
duration of the “No-Power” alarm is the time difference between the timer start and the actual
start. As the “No-Power” alarm is counted from the timer start time setting, the “Elapsed
Time” = “Gate Time” at the end of the measurement.
3. As for case 2, but the AC power failure lasts much longer:

The duration of the power failure in this case is almost until the normal end of the
measurement.
Although the “Elapsed Time” = “Gate Time” at the end of the measurement, the effective
measurement time may be very short.

4. The AC power failure lasts for the entire programmed measurement time:
On restoration of AC power, the ANT-20/ANT-20E establishes that no backup data was
generated and that the stop time has already been reached. The measurement will therefore
not be started.
The ANT-20/ANT-20E stores the calculated stop time when the timer is activated and
compares this with the actual date and time when power is restored. The start time, “No-
Power” alarm duration and stop time may therefore be recorded.
5. AC power fails during a timer-controlled measurement. AC power is restored before the

normal end of the measurement time:
when power is restored. The data is restored and the measurement resumed. The time from
the generation of the last set of backup data until the “restore start” of the measurement is
indicated as a “No-Power” alarm and is taken into account in the restored measurement
values. The “No-Power” alarm time is included in the “Elapsed Time”. At the end of the
measurement, the “Elapsed Time” is equal to the “Gate Time”.
6. AC power fails during a timer-controlled measurement. AC power is restored after the

normal end of the measurement time:
when power is restored. The data is restored and the end results generated (measurement
has ended). The time from the start of the AC power failure until the programmed end of the
measurement is indicated as a “No-Power” alarm. The “No-Power” alarm time up to the
programmed end of the measurement is included in the “Elapsed Time”. Hence the “Elapsed
Time” is equal to the “Gate Time”.

Virtual Instruments
4
Contents
Virtual instruments
1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-1
1.1 Application Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-2
2 Signal Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-3

2.1 Main window: Signal Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-3
2.2 Dialog: Edit Signal Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-4
2.3 Dialog: Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-7
2.4 Dialog: Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-7
2.5 Dialog: Autoconfiguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-8
2.6 Dialog: Delay Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-9
2.7 Dialog: APS Time Measurement (Option 3035/90.15) . . . VI-10
2.8 Scan functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-11
3 Anomaly/Defect Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-12

3.1 Main window: Anomaly/Defect Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-12
3.2 Inserting defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-13
3.3 Inserting anomalies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-13
4 Anomaly/Defect Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-14

4.1 Display mode: View - Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-14
4.2 Display mode: View - Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-15
4.3 Display mode: View - Num . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-17
4.3.1 Enlarged display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-18
4.4 Display mode: View - Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-19
4.5 Dialog: User Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-21
4.6 Dialog: Go to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-22
4.7 Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-22
5 Overhead Generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-23

5.1 Main window: Overhead Generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-23
5.2 Basic procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-24
5.3 Icon button: Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-24
5.4 Dialog: Descriptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-25
i
5.5 Dialog: Background POH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-25

5.6 Dialog: TCM Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-26
6 Overhead Analyzer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-27

6.1 Main window: Overhead Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-27
6.2 Menu: Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-28
6.3 Window: Interpreter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-28
6.4 Dialog: Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-29
6.5 Dialog: Byte Capture (Option BN 3035/90.15) . . . . . . . . . .VI-30
7 Pointer Generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-32

7.1 Main window: Pointer Generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-32
7.2 Generating pointer actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-33
8 Pointer Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-35

8.1 Main window: Pointer Analyzer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-35
8.2 Main window: Pointer Analyzer for Virtual Concatenation .VI-35
8.3 Window: Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-36
8.4 Window: Cursor for Virtual Concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-37
8.5 Menu: Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-37
9 PDH Generator/Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-38

9.1 Main window: PDH Generator/Analyzer
(ITU-T and ANSI interfaces) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-38
9.2 TX parameters (ITU-T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-38
9.3 RX parameters (ITU-T, ANSI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-39
9.4 Dialog: Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-39
9.5 Main window: PDH Generator/Analyzer
(ANSI interfaces). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-40
10 Performance Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-41

10.1 Main window: Performance Analysis (general). . . . . . . . . .VI-41
10.2 Performance Analysis: ANSI/BELL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-42
10.3 Performance Analysis: ITU-T G.821 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-44
10.7 Performance Analysis: ITU-T M.2100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-50
10.8 Performance Analysis: ITU-T M.2101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-52
ii
Virtual instruments
1 Overview
To allow the instrument to be operated simply and logically despite the large number of
functions, a user interface was developed for the ANT-20 family of instruments that makes use
of virtual instruments, VIs. These VIs are designed so that each VI is assigned to a clearly
defined task. By selecting specific VIs, customized applications (or tools) can be generated
which are tailor-made for each particular measurement task.
The following is an overview of all VIs that are available.
Mainframe virtual instruments
Virtual instrument Function More information
Icon Name
Application Manager Control and management of measurement Sec. 1.1, Page VI-2
applications
Signal Structure Configures the physical layer. Sec. 2, Page VI-3
Anomaly/Defect Generates anomalies and defects for the Sec. 3, Page VI-12
Insertion physical layer including the “Transmission
Convergence Sublayer”.
Anomaly/Defect Analyzes anomalies and defects for the Sec. 4, Page VI-14
Analyzer physical layer including the “Transmission
Convergence Sublayer”.
Overhead Generator Edit physical frame overhead information. Sec. 5, Page VI-23
Used with SDH, SONET and PDH/ATM
frames to G.832 (34 Mbit/s and 140 Mbit/s).
Overhead Analyzer Analyzes physical frame overhead Sec. 6, Page VI-27

information. Used with SDH, SONET and
PDH/ATM frames to G.832 (34 Mbit/s and
140 Mbit/s).
Pointer Generator Generates SDH/SONET pointers. Sec. 7, Page VI-32
Pointer Analyzer Analyzes SDH/SONET pointers. Sec. 8, Page VI-35
PDH Generator/ Set and display physical frame overhead. Sec. 9, Page VI-38
Analyzer Used with PDH frames.
Performance Performance analysis to G.821, G.826, Sec. 10, Page VI-41

Analysis M.2100, M.2101 and Bellcore/ANSI.
Table VI-1 Overview of ANT-20 virtual instruments
Virtual instruments: Overview VI-1

1.1 Application Manager
The “ANT20 - <Application Title>” VI, also known as the Application Manager is the central
control panel for the ANT-20.
This VI has overall control of
• Measurement applications
• Measurement results generated using the applications
• Measurement sequence.
Detailed information is found in part 3 “Operating Fundamentals”.
VI-2 Virtual instruments: Overview

2 Signal Structure
2.1 Main window: Signal Structure
The “Signal Structure” VI is used to match your ANT-20 to the measurement interface of the
device under test and to generate appropriate signal structures for the generator and receiver.
The VI has the following functions:
• Entering the signal structure
• Selecting the Tx/Rx interfaces
• Automatic functions: Auto Config, Search, Trouble Scan, Delay, APS-measurement.
After the VI has booted up, the main window, “Signal Structure”, is displayed.
Menu bar and toolbar Optical level value
Tx signal offset Rx signal offset

set value measured value
Display area
showing the
signal structure
Fig. VI-1 Elements in the “Signal Structure” main window
Menu Icon button Function More information
Auto Automatic functions, e.g. receiver configuration Sec. 2.5, Page VI-8
Time Delay / APS measurements Sec. 2.6, Page VI-9/

Sec. 2.7, Page VI-10
Edit Edit signal structur Sec. 2.2, Page VI-4
Interface Enter interface parameters Sec. 2.3, Page VI-7
Laser Switch laser on / off -
Channel Select tributary channels Sec. 2.4, Page VI-7
Idle Set fill pattern for idle channals -
Trigger Set trigger signals -
Aux Select interface for Drop&Insert function Sec. 2.3, Page VI-7
Offset Set Tx signal (clock frequency) offset -
Help On-line help -
Virtual instruments: Signal Structure VI-3

2.2 Dialog: Edit Signal Structure
This dialog is used to set the structures of the asynchronous (DSn, En), SONET and SDH
signals using corresponding buttons arranged in columns. Additional instrument modes are also
provided.
Fig. VI-2 Displaying and setting the signal structure using ANSI (Tx side) as an example
The dialog includes the following buttons:
Edit “TX”/“RX” Select Tx or Rx signal structure to be edited.
“ANSI” Select signal structure to ANSI (SONET).

“ITU-T” Select signal structure to ITU-T (SDH).
“TX => RX” Copy Tx signal structure settings to Rx.

“RX => TX” Copy Rx signal structure settings to Tx.
“Clear” Clear Tx or Rx signal structure settings.
Mode “Normal” Normal mode: Tx and Rx signal structures are independent.

Example:
“Through” Through mode: The Rx signal is looped through to the generator

and transmitted. Tx and Rx clocks are identical. Example:
Basic procedure:
1. Set Rx signal structure.
2. Click the “Tx” button.
3. Click the “Through” button.
VI-4 Virtual instruments: Signal Structure

“Replace” Block&Replace: (only possible with STS3c SPE and STS1 SPE
mapping) Generator and receiver are coupled. The received signal
is looped through from the receiver to the generator. The ANT-20 is
used on the receive side as a measurement channel monitor. The
AU of the measurement channel is re-formed on the transmit side.
Example:
Basic procedure:
2. Click the “TX” button.
3. Click the “Replace” button.
“ADM Test” Add/drop multiplexer test: ADMs require a valid optical signal, even
for measurements on tributaries. The instrument provides an optical
signal in addition to the electrical signal.
Example:
Basic procedure:
2. Click the “Tx” button.
3. Click the “ADM Test” button.
4. Select the optical signal in the “SONET” column.
When the signal is ready, the “PDH” column is enabled.
5. Set the Tx signal structure in the “PDH” column.
Interface “Electric.” Electrical interfaces Tx: [13] or [15] Rx: [12] or [14]
“Optical” Optical interfaces Tx: [18] Rx: [17]
for OC-48/STM-16 Tx: [47] Rx: [44]
Mapping “CONCAT.” Operating mode selection: Contiguous Concatenation or Virtual

Concatenation
Selection between Contiguous and Virtual modes is made under
“Settings”/”Concat. Mode”.
“Bulk” Fills the entire synchronous signal container with a pseudo random
test pattern.
“ATM” Generates an ATM cell stream in the selected mapping (ATM

mapping in SONET and SDH signals). For further signal definitions,
see “ATM Signal Structure” VI.

PDH Mode “External” Tx: An externally-applied DSn or En signal is multiplexed into

the selected signal from socket “Aux” [10].
Rx: A tributary is demultiplexed from the receive signal and
output to socket “Aux” [11].
“ATM” Generates an ATM cell stream in the selected PDH signal (ATM
mapping in PDH signals). For further signal definitions, see “ATM
Signal Structure” VI.
“Info” button
Press this button to display SONET or SDH signal structures conforming to the corresponding
standard, “ANSI” or “ITU-T”, that you have selected previously.

2.3 Dialog: Interface
The “Interface” dialog is used to configure the parameters for the Tx and Rx interfaces.
Tip: The interfaces for “Drop & Insert” mode are configured in the “Aux” menu.
Selectable clock sources
Input signal equalizer

Reference level equalizer
Switch wavelength
Fig. VI-3 “Interface” dialog with “Clock Source” list box
2.4 Dialog: Channel
The “Channel” dialog is used to set the measurement channel in all hierarchy levels of the
tributary structure for the generator and receiver.
Copy Tx side settings to Rx side

Copy Rx side settings to Tx side
Execute settings. The window stays open
Open the “n x DS0 Timeslots” window
Display of range value (for active entry box)

Fig. VI-4 “Channel” dialog

2.5 Dialog: Autoconfiguration
The “Autoconfiguration” dialog automatically sets the receiver of the ANT-20. A search is made
at the electrical inputs (input voltage ranges “ITU-T”/“High” or “PMP”/“Low”) or at the optical
inputs for standard SONET, SDH, PDH or ATM signals. The instrument version and options
fitted determine the scope of the search. The main objective is to determine the signal structure.
Detailed matching to the signal contents can be made manually if required.
Type of input level

Level from protected monitor points (PMP)
Standard input level
Search protocol (search criteria)
Signal structure detected

- RX side interface parameters
- Payload
Autoconfiguration status message

- successful: Signal structure clearly recognized
- uncertain: Signal structure not clearly recognized
- failed: No meaningful signal structure recognized
Fig. VI-5 “Autoconfiguration” dialog
Basic procedure
1. Select the type of input level (ITU-T or PMP).
2. Click the “Start” button to start the search.
The Rx signal is checked for its system bit rate, line code, pattern and signal level. If the
search is successful, the “Result” will display the signal structure that was detected.
3. To configure the receiver to the detected signal structure, click the “OK” button.
Only one channel is considered in the signal structure hierarchy in each case.
Status message “Autoconfiguration uncertain”
1. Click the “Start” button.
The search is triggered again.
2. If the search is successful, click the “OK” button.
– or –
If the search result is again uncertain, click the “Cancel” button.
If The previous signal structure settings will be reinstated, which was selected before
beginning Autoconfiguration.
Search criteria
The signal structure is determined according to the following search criteria:
Check Interface Matching to the physical parameters (bit rate / line code)
Defects taken into account: LOS

Further criterion Input bit rate frequency offset < 150 ppm

Check Mapping Searches for the mapping structure using the signal label and pointer bytes (distinction between
AU-4 / AU-3). The search is always made in channel #1. If the signal is STM-16 / OC-48, the
search is made for an AU-4 structure only in “ITU-T” mode or for an AU-3 structure only in
“ANSI” mode.
SDH defect SONET defect
LOF/OOF LOF/OOF
AU-AIS AIS-P
MS-AIS AIS-L
TU-AIS AIS-V
AU-LOP LOP-P
TU-LOP LOP-V
LOM LOM
Table VI-2 Defects taken into account in autoconfiguration
If an UNEQuipped signal is detected, the previously selected mapping setting will be reinstated
or a default mapping will be set.Autoconfiguration recognizes “C-11 via TU-12” mapping as
“C-12” mapping.
Check Payload The search only takes account of the test patterns recommended in the standards.
PDH signals: Search for unframed or framed payload signals on all hierarchy levels
.
Defects taken into account: LOF/(OOF), AIS

ATM signals: Search for ATM signals
Defects taken into account: LOF/(OOF), AIS, LCD, LOF PLCP, AIC, IDLE DS3
If no pattern synchronization is reached (Defect LSS), the test pattern evaluation will be swit-
ched off (Pattern = Real Traffic).
2.6 Dialog: Delay Measurement
The “Delay Measurement” is used to measure the signal delay times between the Tx and Rx
sides using characteristic patterns included in the pseudo-random sequences. The delay
measurement is an automatic measurement made by repeating single measurements
continuously. It can be made using practically all the available ANT-20 signal structures.
Exceptions:
• ATM signal structures
• Measurements in the overhead
• Through mode
• ADM test
• Contiguous concatenation
• Virtual concatenation

The measurement range and measurement time depend on the pattern bit rate and the pattern
selected. The maximum possible measured value is determined by the length of the pseudo-
random sequence. This maximum is calculated and displayed; it can be influenced by selecting
a shorter or a longer test pattern.
Fig. VI-6 “Delay Measurement” dialog
2.7 Dialog: APS Time Measurement (Option 3035/90.15)
The “APS Time Measurement” dialog is used for measuring the switching times of automatic
protection switching (APS) to demonstrate that the permitted maximum drop-out times for a
connection are not exceeded. The dialog is only available if the “Extended Overhead Analysis”
option is fitted.
Using a selected criterion such as AIS or bit error burst, the drop-out times of tributary
connections are measured and compared with a pre-set check value. The selectable criteria
are:
• AIS-L, AIS-P, AIS-V, TSE (ANSI)
• MS-AIS, AU-AIS, TU-AIS and TSE (ITU-T)
The result is a simple “Passed” or “Failed” message.
Setting criterion, e.g. Multiplexer Section AIS

Check value (permitted switching time)
Time remaining to end of overall measurement
Result display:
qualitative: PASSED / FAILED
quantitative: measured switching time
Fig. VI-7 “APS Time Measurement” dialog
Sensor: Selecting the setting criterion

“Sensor” specifies which event is to be evaluated and measured as the switching event:
• e.g. MS-AIS measures the duration of a Multiplexer Section Alarm
• e.g. TSE measures the time for which the test pattern (PRBS) dropped out.

Tip: If the sensor criterion is already present in the signal at the start of the measurement, the
time cannot be measured. To correctly detect test pattern drop-out (sensor = TSE) the
basic bit error rate of the path must not exceed 2E-4.
Switch time limit (t1): Setting the check value

The measured switching time is compared with the ‘Switch Time Limit’ value at the end of the
measurement time. If the measured value is less than or equal to this value, the result is a
PASSED message, otherwise a FAILED message is displayed.
Gate time (t2): Setting the measurement time

The measurement begins as soon as the sensor event first occurs. It ends after the set
measurement time has elapsed. This ensures that multiple switching is also detected.
Result and status display

After the measurement the following are displayed:
• The switching time required
• A status message
Display Meaning
PASSED Measured value ≤ Switch Time Limit
FAILED (Time) Measured value > Switch Time Limit
FAILED (Signal) An impermissible defect occurred during the measurement that blocked the
sensor (e.g. LOS or LOF if sensor = AIS-L)
Table VI-3 Display of test result after measurement
2.8 Scan functions
Further information on the automatic scan functions such as “Trouble Scan” and “Search” are
found in part 5: “Application Guide” of this operating manual.

3 Anomaly/Defect Insertion
3.1 Main window: Anomaly/Defect Insertion
The “Anomaly/Defect Insertion” VI is used to insert anomalies (errors) and defects (alarms) into
signals of synchronous (SDH/SONET), asynchronous (PDH) and ATM communications
systems.
After the VI has booted up, the “Anomaly/Defect Insertion” window appears.
Menu bar and toolbar Anomaly entry Menu bar and toolbar Defect entry
Dynamic defects
Fig. VI-8 Elements of the “Anomaly/Defect Insertion” window
Menu - Command Icon button Function
Insertion - ON Inserts anomalies or defects (A/D)
View - Defects Display and entry of defects
View - Anomalies Display and entry of anomalies
View - SONET Anomalies or defects for SONET technology
View - PAYLOAD Anomalies or defects for asynchronous technology (DSn, En)
View - ATM Anomalies or defects for ATM technology
View - RDI Select Remote Defect Indication options
View - Pointer Options Select AISx/LOPx for Concatenation
Help On-line help
VI-12 Virtual instruments: Anomaly/Defect Insertion

3.2 Inserting defects
Basic procedure for inserting defects continuously and repetitively.
Continuous insertion of defects

✓ The “D” (Defect) button has already been clicked.
✓ The “continuous” option has been selected.
1. Select the technology type (SONET or PAYL or ATM).
2. Select the defect required using the “Defect” entry box.
The corresponding check box will be marked.
3. Click the “ON” button.
The defect will be inserted continuously.
Repetitive insertion of defects

The same procedure is used as for continuous insertion, with the following additional step
between steps 2 and 3:
⇒ Select the “repetitive” option.
The “Duration” and “Period” list boxes can now be accessed.
⇒ Enter the duration of defect insertion (in frames or seconds) in the “Duration” box
⇒ Enter the repetition period (in frames or seconds) in the “Period” box.
⇒ Continue with step 3 above.
Defects can be inserted or removed and the type of defect changed even while a measurement
is running.
3.3 Inserting anomalies
Basic procedure for inserting anomalies continuously and singly.
Continuous insertion of anomalies

✓ The “continuous” option has been selected.
1. Click the “A” (Anomaly) button.
The anomaly insertion entry box is activated.
2. Select the technology type (SONET or PAYL or ATM)
3. Select the anomaly required in the “Anomaly” entry box.
The corresponding check box will be marked.
4. Enter the anomaly rate in the “Rate” list box
5. Click the “ON” button.
The anomaly will be inserted continuously.
Inserting single anomalies

As for continuous insertion above but with step 4 as follows:
⇒ Select the “single” option in the “Insertion” field.
⇒ Continue with step 5.
The anomaly is inserted each time the (ON) button is clicked.
When inserting anomalies in bursty ATM traffic, HUNC and HCOR anomalies can also be
inserted repetitively. The repetition period and the burst duration (in cells) can be entered for
this.
Virtual instruments: Anomaly/Defect Insertion VI-13

4 Anomaly/Defect Analyzer
The “Anomaly/Defect Analyzer” VI is used to display the results obtained using the “Anomaly/
Defect Insertion” VI in four different ways.
4.1 Display mode: View - Graph
After the VI has booted up, the results window for displaying the anomalies and defects as a
histogram (View - Graph) appears. The alternative display modes are described in subsequent
sections.
Menu bar and toolbar
Anomaly and defect results overview

Display filter
Individual anomaly results
Individual defect results
Cursor
BIT/BLOCK evaluation indication

Event buttons
Fig. VI-9 Elements of the main window showing results as a histogram (default setting)
Menu - command Icon button Function
View - Graph/Table/Num/ Switch display modes

Summary
Settings Select various detection and measurement modes
Cursor - Go to Moves cursor position to date and time entered
Cursor - First/Last Sets cursor to start / end of the measuring interval
Cursor - Prev/Next Moves cursor page by page to the left / right
VI-14 Virtual instruments: Anomaly/Defect Analyzer

Cursor Moves cursor in intervals (single step) to the left / right
Filter Display selected results only (user filter)
Zoom - In/Out Increase / decrease resolution of time axis
The option buttons of the display filter (see Fig. VI-9) are used to select the results registered
within the measurement interval and enable their access in the appropriate results windows.
The results for anomalies and defects can be shown separately or in a combined display. Other
selection criteria are provided in the “User Filter” dialog.
The scrollbar lets you display all the registered results within the display window. Clicking on an
event button causes the rate per time for that event to be displayed.
4.2 Display mode: View - Table
In “View - Table” display mode, a table is displayed of anomalies as count values and defects
as duration values.
Display filter
Anomalies (count/second)
Defect (duration 3.4 seconds)
Anomalies (count/second)
Fig. VI-10 Elements of the “View - Table” window

Summary
Cursor - Go to Moves cursor position in table to date and time entered
Virtual instruments: Anomaly/Defect Analyzer VI-15

Cursor - First/Last Moves cursor position to start / end of table
Cursor - Prev/Next Moves cursor position up / down half a page
Cursor Moves cursor position up / down by one line
Print Print and export results
Display filter
If a large number of events that cannot all be displayed at once occur during the measurement
interval (long-term measurement), the scrollbar can be used to move the results that are not
visible into the display window.
The option buttons (display filter) are used to select the results list. The results for anomalies
and defects can be shown separately or in a combined list in order of occurrence. The “Current”
option displays all current defects. “Current” can only be selected during a running
measurement.
Other selection criteria are provided in the “User Filter” dialog.
Print/Export
The “Print” menu is used to print out the measurement results or to export them for further
processing using other programs.
Print ... Print out results.

Print Headers Definition of additional information to the measurement results, e. g. descrip-
tion of DUT, comments, etc.
Printer Setup ... Select printer, paper format, etc.
Export ... Save the current results in a file for export (on floppy or hard disk).
Export Setup ... Set the list and decimal separators and the time format for the export file;
Default settings: Semicolon, period (dot) and hh:mm:ss, respectively.

4.3 Display mode: View - Num
In “View - Num” display mode, all anomalies are listed in a table of “Total Results” (Count and
Ratio) and “Intermediate Results” (Count and Ratio).
“Total Results” is the number of events that occurred during the entire measurement interval.
“Intermediate Results” is the number of events occurring within a defined time period (“Interm.
Time”). Both these time periods are set in the Application manager (“Measurement Settings ...”).
Switch to “enlarged” display

Display filter
Results
Fig. VI-11 Elements of the “View - Num” window

Summary
Help On-line help

4.3.1 Enlarged display
The “Anomalies: One” option button provides an enlarged display of a single result.
The single result to be displayed (Total or Intermediate Result) is selected from the list box. The
“Anomalies: All” option button switches the display back to “View - Num” mode. All other icons
and menus in the enlarged display correspond to the “View - Num” display.
Fig. VI-12 Single result in enlarged display

4.4 Display mode: View - Summary
In “View - Summary” display mode, anomalies and defects are shown as a summary during the
course of the measurement.
Display filter
Overall evaluation of "Anomalies and defects"
LEDs indicating events:

Anomalies / Defects
selected performance analysis
Verdict of the performance-Analyse
Fig. VI-13 Elements of the “View - Summary” window

Summary
Help On-line help
Overall evaluation of “Anomalies and defects”

The result of the overall evaluation is either “OK” or “FAIL”.
Note: The result of the overall evaluation is independent of the result of performance analysis.
LEDs indicating events: Anomalies / Defects
Left-hand LED column (History)

The display changes from gray to yellow when an event occurs during the measurement. The
display remains yellow when the event ends.

Right-hand LED column

Indicate current status when measurement is running:
The display changes from green to red for the duration of the event. The display reverts to green
when the event ends.
The LEDs are grayed out when no measurement is running.
Verdict of the performance analysis

Display of the verdict of the performance analysis. The following results are possible:
Result Condition, explanation
Accepted Depending on the setting selected in the “Hierarchy” menu, only “NEAR END”
results (e.g. TSE) or “NEAR END” and “FAR END” results will be taken into
account.
Uncertain Only possible for M.2100 and M.2101.

Depending on the setting selected in the “Hierarchy” menu, only “NEAR END”
account.
Rejected Depending on the setting selected in the “Hierarchy” menu, only “NEAR END”
account.
No Verdict No verdict is provided for G.829 and ANSI evaluations.
No display Performance analysis “Off”.
Tabelle VI-4 Results of the Verdict of the performance analysis
G.821 evaluation provides "NEAR END" results only.

4.5 Dialog: User Filter
The “User Filter” dialog is used to select specific results to be displayed in the result windows of
the VI. To do this, the “User” option must be selected in the corresponding result window.
Individual results lists
Select complete
result groups
Count threshold Time threshold

Event value ranges
Fig. VI-14 Elements of the “User Filter” dialog
Individual results can be evaluated and displayed by clicking on the event required in the
“Anomalies” or “Defects” list boxes. One or more events can be marked in each list box. You
can also select complete groups of anomalies and defects using the buttons in the “Preselect”
field.
The selected anomalies and defects are used for all four display modes of the VI.
The result display takes all registered result values for the events into account. If only a certain
range of values is of interest, count thresholds can be set for anomalies and time thresholds for
defects. When these thresholds are activated, only those values above the threshold value will
be displayed.
The “User Filter” can only be activated when there is no measurement running.

4.6 Dialog: Go to
The “Go to” dialog provides support in analyzing long-term measurements where a large
number of results are displayed. The date and exact time for the display are entered in the “Go
to” dialog. When you exit from the dialog (by clicking the “OK” button),
• the cursor jumps to the corresponding position in the histogram (View - Graph)
– or –
• the corresponding event is displayed in the first line of the table (View - Table).
Fig. VI-15 “Go to” dialog for entering the time for the analysis
4.7 Settings menu
The “Settings” menu is used to set various detection parameters and to select measurement
modes.
The menu contains the following commands:
Bit Record bit errors.

Block/Word Record block errors / word errors.
T1X1 Detection of anomalies and defects to T1X1 (ANSI).

BELL Detection of anomalies and defects to GR-253 (Bellcore).
RDI enhanced “On / Off” switch for “RDI enhanced”. If detection of anomalies and
defects to GR-253 (Bellcore) is active, the switch activates “RDI
enhanced” evaluation. This selection is not required for T1X1
(ANSI) evaluation as detection is automatic.
Select measurements ... The “Select measurement” dialog window opens. Various
measurements can be selected for DS3 and DS3 PLCP
mappings.
Beep on Anomalies/ On / off toggle for “Beep on Anomalies/Defects”.
Defects1 If the toggle is on, any anomalies and / or defects occurring during
a measurement will be signaled by a beep.
1 in preparation

5 Overhead Generator
5.1 Main window: Overhead Generator
The “Overhead Generator” VI is used to edit the bytes in the TOH (SONET) / SOH (SDH) and
POH of the selected channel. The dynamic bytes (B1, B2, B3) and the pointer line cannot be
edited.
OC-N/STM-N STS-1 # display and selection

Increment/decrement STS-1 #
Editor window
Number of the displayed POH
(Contiguous or virtual concatenation only)
Binary value of selected byte
Overhead matrix
Location of selected byte in TOH (row/column/STS-1 #)
Fig. VI-16 Elements of the “Overhead Generator” main window
Virtual instruments: Overhead Generator VI-23

Menu Icon button Function
Edit Default: Set overhead bytes to default values
Type Byte: Enter static value
Trace Identifier: Enter J0, J1, J2 bytes (ASCII string)
Sequence: Select standard H4 sequence (4, 48, off)
Test Pattern: Fill byte with test pattern
Test Pattern Group: Fill byte group with test pattern
External Byte: Insert externally-generated signal from socket [21] in

selected byte
External Byte Group: Insert externally-generated signal from socket

[21] in selected byte group
Descriptor Bytes for APS (ring and linear), synchronization and path label
Edit Selection of the background POH
Type Opens the “TCM Sequence” dialog for editing the TCM sequence
5.2 Basic procedure
1. Click on the TOH/SOH byte in the main window, which has to be edited.
2. Select desired function in the toolbar.
3. Press “Edit” button.
Depending on the byte type selected, one of the following windows will open:
– “Edit Overhead Byte”
– “Trace Identifier Editor” (when J0, J1, J2 or TR selected)
– “H4 sequence editor” (for VT1.5/VT2/VT6 mapping or C-11/C-12/C2 mapping)
The selected byte is edited in this window. The button has no function for E1, E2, F1, F2 and D1
to D12 and K1 to K2 if the selected byte is set to TP (test pattern) or EX (external).
Note: If you want to edit the TCM sequence, first click on the N1 or Z6 byte in the main window
and then click on the “TCM” icon button.
5.3 Icon button: Default
Clicking this icon button sets all elements of the TOH/SOH and POH matrix to their default
values.
VI-24 Virtual instruments: Overhead Generator

5.4 Dialog: Descriptor
The “Descriptor” dialog is used to fill certain bytes in the overhead matrix with plain text
information:
• K1 to K4: APS commands
• S1: Clock source
• C2/V5: Path label
The information is identical to the commands in the corresponding standard. You can also
select whether the commands for Ring APS (G. 841) or Linear APS (G. 783) are to be applied.
K1 byte
S1 byte
C2/V5 byte
Fig. VI-17 “Descriptor” dialog with SOH/POH bytes for plain text input
5.5 Dialog: Background POH
This button opens the “Background POH” dialog. The button is only active if
option BN 3035/90.92 is fitted and “Virtual Concatenation” signal structure is selected.
Fig. VI-18 “Background POH” dialog
Same as Channel #1 POH #2 through #4 are filled with the same content as POH #1.
Fixed Bytes POH #2 through #4 are filled with a fixed value.
Virtual instruments: Overhead Generator VI-25

5.6 Dialog: TCM Sequence
The “TCM” button is only active if one of the bytes N1 or Z6 is marked in the overhead matrix
(POH).
The “TCM Sequence” dialog and the “Keyboard” dialog open when you click on the “TCM”
button. “TCM” stands for “Tandem Connection Monitoring”. You can edit the 76-byte TCM
sequence for the TCM bytes N1 and Z6 using the “Keyboard” dialog.
Fig. VI-19 “TCM Sequence” dialog with “Keyboard” dialog for editing the TCM sequence
If you click the “ON” button in the “TCM Sequence” dialog, the TCM sequence shown in the list
box will be transmitted. If the content of the list box is changed while a sequence is being
transmitted, the changes will not take effect until you click the “Update” button.
If you click the “Edit” button in the “TCM Sequence” dialog, the “Edit TCM Sequence” dialog
opens. This dialog allows you to insert TCM anomalies and TCM defects into the TCM
sequence very easily.
If you want to transfer the current content of the list box to the transmitter when the “Edit TCM
Sequence” dialog is open, you must click on the “Update” button in the “Edit TCM Sequence”
dialog.
Fig. VI-20 “TCM Sequence” dialog with “Edit TCM Sequence” dialog for editing the TCM sequence
VI-26 Virtual instruments: Overhead Generator

6 Overhead Analyzer
6.1 Main window: Overhead Analyzer
The “Overhead Analyzer” VI is used to display the contents of the “TOH (SONET) / SOH (SDH)”
and “POH” overhead bytes of the received channel.
OC-N/STM-N STS-1 # display and selection

Increment/decrement STS-1 #
Number of the displayed POH
(Contiguous and virtual concatenation only)
Binary value of selected byte
Location of selected byte in TOH (row/column/STS-1 #)
Fig. VI-21 Elements of the “Overhead Analyzer” main window
Menu Icon button Function
Type Byte: Select individual byte analysis
Trace Identifier: Display of bytes J0, J1, J2
Capture function for recording selected bytes
Test Pattern Byte: Display test pattern in individual bytes
Test Pattern Group: Display test pattern in byte groups (e.g.. D1 to D4)
External Byte: Outputs a byte to socket [21]
External Group: Outputs a byte group to socket [21]
Switch on TCM evaluation (Tandem Connection Monitoring).

Only possible, if one of the bytes N1 or N2 (Z6) is marked.
Interpreter On-line interpretation of APS, sync. and path label
Settings Select expected values for trace identifier, path label and H1 byte
Virtual instruments: Overhead Analyzer VI-27

6.2 Menu: Type
The “Type” menu is used to set the various evaluation modes for the individual bytes.
J0, J1, J2: Byte and Sequence evaluation

D1 to D4: Byte, Test Pattern Byte and Test Pattern Group
D5 to D12: Ext. Byte and Ext. Group
E1, E2, F1, F2: Test Pattern Byte and Ext. Byte
K1, K2: Ext. Group
K3, K4: Ext. Byte
N1, N2 (Z6) TCM evaluation
Basic procedure
1. Select the byte of interest in the overhead matrix.
The field color changes from gray to white.
2. Select the evaluation mode from the “Type” menu or using the corresponding icon buttons.
6.3 Window: Interpreter
The “Interpreter” window is used to display the actual content of the various bytes in plain text.
You can also select whether the evaluation is to be performed according to “Ring APS (G. 841)”
or “Linear APS (G. 783)”.
APS command bytes
Clock source byte
Path label bytes
Fig. VI-22 “Interpreter” window for plain text display of TOH/POH bytes
VI-28 Virtual instruments: Overhead Analyzer

6.4 Dialog: Settings
The “Settings” dialog is used to activate the receiver for checking the Trace Identifier or the Path
Label. To do this, specify expected values for the Trace Identifier (J0, J1, J2) or Path Label
(PLM-P, PLM-V). The device under test is operating correctly if the receive signal meets the
expected values. If the receive signal does not match the expected values, the “Trace Identifier
Mismatch” or “Path Label Mismatch” alarm messages can be generated. These defects are
indicated in the “Anomaly/Defect Analyzer” VI.
You can also set the expected values for the SS bits in the H1 byte in the “Settings” dialog. The
“LOP-P” alarm is generated if the SS bits received do not correspond to the expected SS bits.
SS bits will not be evaluated if you set the expected value of the SS bits to “Don’t care” (xx).
Trace identifier bytes (TC-TIM bytes in preparation)
Expected “Trace Identifier” values

Length
Content (plain text)
Expected “SS bits” values

STS-1 signal SS = 10 (SONET)
Defect definition
Fig. VI-23 “Settings” dialog
Checking the expected values and generating defects

Basic procedure:
1. Select the desired Trace Identifier byte (check box).
2. Enter the corresponding expected values (hexadecimal value or plain text messages).
3. Select the desired defect for a “Path Label Mismatch” (check box).
4. Select the corresponding expected values (“Expected Value” list box; Path Label Mismatch).
5. Select the expected values for the SS-Bits ( “Expected Value” list box; H1-Byte).
6. Click the “OK” button.
The expected values will be checked and a message output if there is a mismatch.

6.5 Dialog: Byte Capture (Option BN 3035/90.15)
The “Byte Capture” dialog is part of the “Extended Overhead Analysis” option, BN 3035/90.15
and is opened by clicking on the above icon button.
The capture function allows you to record a single byte, or two bytes simultaneously in the case
of K1 and K2. Recording is prepared by clicking the “START” button and begins when a pre-set
trigger condition occurs. After this, a change into this byte is recorded on a frame-by-frame
basis with timestamp until the buffer is full or you click the “STOP” button. When recording 2
bytes (K1 and K2), the buffer capacity is 200 entries. For single bytes, 265 entries can be saved.
Capture in the presence of defects

Capture is interrupted if LOF, LOS and OOF or LOP-P, AIS-P, LOP-V and AIS-V (POH capture)
occur.
Capture is resumed when the defect clears. The duration of an LOS failure is not measured
accurately to the nearest frame (LOS and LOF).
Selected byte
Structure setting (“Interpreter” dialog)
Trigger source (see table)
Trigger condition for “Compare”
Results list (byte, APS code)
Fig. VI-24 “Capture” dialog
Setting the trigger condition

The “Source” list box is used to set the event that will start byte capture:
Setting Start condition
Manual Immediately after clicking START
Compare The content of the recorded byte must be the same as the compare
value. Enter ‘X’ for ‘don’t care’ bit values
Compare not Inverse compare condition. Recording starts when the value no longer
corresponds to the compare value.
AU-AIS AIS-P Occurrence of AU-AIS or AIS-P
AU-LOP LOP-P Occurrence of AU-LOP or LOP-P
Table VI-5 “Source” list box
VI-30 Virtual instruments: Overhead Analyzer

Setting Start condition
MS-RDI RDI-L Occurrence of MS-RDI or RDI-L
MS-AIS AIS-L Occurrence of MS-AIS or AIS-L
N1/N2-TCM N1/Z6-TCM Starts recording TCM frames when the TCM FAS word has occurred
(Tandem Connection Monitoring).
Requirement: The N1/N2 or N1/Z6 byte is activated for Tandem
Connection Monitoring.
Table VI-5 “Source” list box

7 Pointer Generator
7.1 Main window: Pointer Generator
The “Pointer Generator” VI is used to generate individual pointer actions and pointer sequences
according to the ANSI, Bellcore and ITU-T standards.
Direct setting of pointer value Menu bar and toolbar
Spacing of pointers/bursts generated
Blank out pointers
Insert double pointers
Setting H1 byte (bit 5 and bit 6 only)
Number of increments/decrements and spacing T1, T2

Standard pointer sequences
Pointer continuously or single increment/decrement
Fig. VI-25 Elements of the “Pointer Generator” main window
Action Trigger STS or VT pointer action
View Select STS or VT pointer layer
Concat. Delta Pointer Offset
NDF Set pointer value with NDF on / off
Unit - Frame Units for the time parameters (T1 to T5) in frames
Unit - Millisecond Units for the time parameters (T1 to T5) in milliseconds
Unit - Second Units for the time parameters (T1 to T5) in seconds
Help On-line help
VI-32 Virtual instruments: Pointer Generator

7.2 Generating pointer actions
The Pointer Generator allows simultaneous generation of AU and TU pointers using

independent parameters.
Periodic pointers and pointer bursts

• Periodic (single / multiple) pointers of identical polarity
(“INC” or “DEC” pointer actions)
• Periodic (single / multiple) pointers of different polarity
(“INC/DEC” pointer action)
• Periodic pointers with one double pointer
(“INC” or “DEC” pointer actions with “Add” function, T4 = n x T2)
• Periodic pointers with one missing pointer
(“INC” or “DEC” pointer actions with “Cancel” function, T4 = n x T2)
• Pointer burst with missing pointers
(“INC” or “DEC” pointer actions with “Cancel” function, T4 >> n x T2)
Standard sequences
All the standard sequences to ITU-T G.783/ANSI T1.105.03 can be used directly or can be
edited for special applications.
• “87-3” sequence
• “43-44” sequence with double pointer
• “86-4” sequence with double pointer
More information on generating special pointer actions / sequences is found in part 7 “Technical
Background”.
Setting pointers (see Fig. VI-25)

1. Select the “NEW VALUE” option.
2. Enter pointer value in entry field (right).
3. Press “STS ON” button, if pointer actions have to be executed in the “Administrative Unit”.
– or –
Press “VT ON” button, if pointer actions have to be executed in the “Tributary Unit”.
4. Press “NFD ON” button to run pointer action.
Pointer range:
STS Pointer: 0 to 782

VT6 Pointer: 0 to 427
VT2 Pointer: 0 to 139
VT1.5 Pointer: 0 to 103
Selecting parameters
T1, T4: 0.25 ms to 600 s or 2 to 4800000 frames / multiframes

T2, T3: 0.25 ms to 10 s or 2 to 80000 frames / multiframes
T5: 0 ms to 600 s or 0 to 4 800000 frames / multiframes
n: 1 to 2000
Virtual instruments: Pointer Generator VI-33

Delta Pointer Offset

Only with option BN 3035/90.92 and “Virtual Concatenation” signal structure.
Pointer actions are possible for all channels for the TX settings “STM4” or “OC12” and
“CONCAT.” mapping in the “Signal Structure” VI.
Clicking on this icon or selecting the “Delta Pointer Offset” command in the “Concatenation”
menu opens the “Delta Pointer Offset” dialog. This dialog remains open until you select the
“Delta Pointer Offset” command again.
Fig. VI-26 “Delta Pointer Offset” dialog
An offset carried by the pointer for channel #1 can be set in this dialog for the pointers for
channels #2 through #4. The pointer actions for channel #1 are set in the display / entry box of
the main window.
The pointer actions for all channels are activated from the “Action” menu.
A change of more than 1 in the value of the pointer offset will be realized by consecutive
changes of 1 at intervals of 32 frames. During this time, the Pointer Generator cannot be
operated.
In the extreme case: 160 changes x 32 frames x 125 microseconds = 640 milliseconds.
VI-34 Virtual instruments: Pointer Generator

8 Pointer Analyzer
8.1 Main window: Pointer Analyzer
The “Pointer Analyzer” VI is used to display the pointer values (addresses) and to show the
number of pointer actions graphically:
Result display:
Current STS and VT pointer values
Overview of pointer actions
Pointer increments / decrements
Cursor
Fig. VI-27 Elements of the “Pointer Analyzer” main window
8.2 Main window: Pointer Analyzer for Virtual Concatenation
Only with option BN 3035/90.92
Select diagram display
Pointer increments/decrements
Fig. VI-28 “Pointer Analyzer” main window for Virtual Concatenation
The option buttons and the “Diagram” menu for selecting the diagram display and the “Print
Delta Pointer” command are only active for virtual concatenation.
Virtual instruments: Pointer Analyzer VI-35

Pointer Selects the pointer layer
Zoom - In/Out Increase / decrease time axis resolution
Diagram Select the diagram display

(for Virtual Concatenation only)
Cursor - First/Last Set the cursor to the start / end of the record
Cursor - Prev/Next Page Move back / forwards by half a display width
Cursor - Prev/Next Value Move back / forwards by one pointer address
Cursor - Position Numerical display of pointer value at cursor position
Help On-line help
8.3 Window: Cursor
The results for the actual position of the cursor are displayed in the “Cursor” window. It also
shows the pointer increments and decrements and the equivalent clock deviation in ppm.
Size of selected time interval

Pointer value at cursor position
Number of pointer increments in time interval

Number of pointer decrements in time interval
Pointer sum in time interval
Pointer difference in time interval
Mean deviation in ppm
Fig. VI-29 “Cursor” window
VI-36 Virtual instruments: Pointer Analyzer

8.4 Window: Cursor for Virtual Concatenation
Only with option BN 3035/90.92
Display mode selection

- “Delta Pointer” values
- Time in microseconds
Maximum / minimum deviation of
VC-4 pointers #2 through #4 relative to VC-4 pointer #1
Fig. VI-30 “Cursor” window for Virtual Concatenation
8.5 Menu: Print
The “Print” menu is used to print out the results or to export them for processing using other
programs.
Print ... Print out results (Windows printer).

Printer Setup ... Set parameters for the default printer, e.g. paper format, etc.
Export ... Save the current results in a file for export (on floppy or hard disk).
Print Delta Pointer Activates or deactivates print out of “Delta Pointer” measurement values.
Export Setup ... Set the list and decimal separators and the time format for the export file;
CSV settings selected: Semicolon, period (dot) and hh:mm:ss,
respectively.
Virtual instruments: Pointer Analyzer VI-37

9 PDH Generator/Analyzer
9.1 Main window: PDH Generator/Analyzer (ITU-T and ANSI interfaces)
The “PDH Generator/Analyzer” VI is used to set and analyze selected parameters of framed
PDH signals.
Menu bar
Input:
Display: “RX” parameters
“TX” parameters:
Frame bits
Frame bits
Bits Sa4 to Sa8

Sa bits
Timeslots Tributary offsets

“ITU-T”
Offset of the
“ANSI”
tributary
Fig. VI-31 Elements of the “PDH Generator/Analyzer” main window

TX side: ITU-T signal structure, RX side: ITU-T or ANSI signal structure
Menu Function
Default Sets the TX parameters to their default values
Idle Enter selected frame bits in the idle channel
Feac Loopcode Loops for system components can be activated and deactivated
(active only for “DS3/Framed/C-Parity”)
Help On-line help
9.2 TX parameters (ITU-T)
Frame and Sa bits

• 8/34/140 Mbit/s: Static entry of D and N frame bits
• 2 Mbit/s:
– NFAS A bit: Static entry of the A bits.
– NFAS Pattern: Fills bits Sa4 to Sa8 with one independent 8-bit sequence each.
VI-38 Virtual instruments: PDH Generator/Analyzer

Timeslot contents
• TS 16 Frame 0: For timeslot 16 in frame 0 (user-defined 8-bit word).
• TS 16 Frame 1: For timeslot 16 in frame 1 (user-defined 8-bit word for signals with special
multiframe structure).
• TS 16 Frame 2 to 15: For timeslot 16 in frames 2 through 15 together (user-defined 8-bit
word for signals with special multiframe structure).
9.3 RX parameters (ITU-T, ANSI)
Frame and Sa bits

• 8/34/140 Mbit/s: Display of D and N frame bits
• 2 Mbit/s:
– NFAS A-Bit: Display of the A bit.
– NFAS Pattern: Display of bits Sa4 to Sa8.
Tip: Select the Sa bit position for which the pattern is to be displayed from the “NFAS Sa-Bit
Position” list box.
Offset (TX)
Static offset for the PDH tributary bit rate during insertion into the SDH container
(±100 ppm for all bit rates, relative to container; Step width: 1 ppm)
The offset is an average value. The actual offset at any given time may be above or below this
value.
Offsets (RX)
Display of tributary channel offset. The deviation from the nominal bit rate is shown for each
tributary in ppm.
Asterisks (*) are displayed in the boxes if display or measurement is not possible, e.g. because
of an alarm being present or because of the signal structure setting.
9.4 Dialog: Idle
The “Idle” dialog is used to set the D and NFAS bits for the idle channels.
Input of D and N bits (bits 11 and 12)
Input of D and N bits (bits 11 and 12)
Input of NFAS bits
Fig. VI-32 “Idle Channels” dialog
Virtual instruments: PDH Generator/Analyzer VI-39

9.5 Main window: PDH Generator/Analyzer (ANSI interfaces)
If signal structures according to ANSI are selected, the “PDH Generator/Analyzer” VI serves to
display offsets of DS1 and DS3 tributaries.
Menu bar
TX offset RX offsets
Bild VI-33 Elements of the “PDH Generator/Analyzer” main window (ANSI)
VI-40 Virtual instruments: PDH Generator/Analyzer

10 Performance Analysis
10.1 Main window: Performance Analysis (general)
Result display
Fig. VI-34 “Performance Analysis” window
Menu - Command Icon button Function More information
Analysis - OFF Switch off analysis -
Analysis - ANSI ANSI analysis Sec. 10.2, Page VI-42
Analysis - G.821 G.821 analysis Sec. 10.3, Page VI-44
Analysis - G.826 ISM G.826 In-service measurement Sec. 10.4, Page VI-45
Analysis - G.826 OOS G.826 Out of service analysis
Analysis - M.2100 M.2100 analysis Sec. 10.7, Page VI-50
Analysis - M.2101 M.2101 analysis Sec. 10.8, Page VI-52
Settings Set parameters depending on the -

selected analysis:
G.821: Allocation, SES Threshold, DM
Threshold, MUX Factor
G.826: Allocation, SES Threshold,
UAS-Limit (on/off),
UAS-Mode (individual/global)
G.828: Allocation, SES-Threshold,
UAS-Limit (on/off),
UAS-Mode (individual/global),
SEP used in Verdict (on/off)
G.829: SES-Threshold
M.2100: Allocation, BISO Multiplier,
UAS-Limit (on/off),
UAS-Mode (individual/global)
Virtual instruments: Performance Analysis VI-41

Menu - Command Icon button Function More information
Settings M.2101: Allocation, BISO Multiplier,

(continued) SES-Threshold,
UAS-Limit (on/off),
UAS-Mode (individual/global),
M.2101-Version (4/1997 oder 6/2000),
SEP used in Verdict (on/off)
View Switch toolbar and status line on/off -
Print Print out and export results -
Help On-line help -
10.2 Performance Analysis: ANSI/BELL
For performance analysis to ANSI/BELL standards, definitions from GR-253 and T1.231 are
used. The parameters ES, SES, EFS, SEFS and UAS measured for various hierarchy levels.
Analysis is performed on the following levels:
• SONET: Section (B1), line (B2SUM, REI-L), STS path (B3, REI-P), VT path (BIP-V,
REI-V)
• DS3: Line (BPV), path (FE, Parity, FEBE)
• DS2 Line (BPV)
• DS1: Line (BPV), path (FE, CRC6)
• Bit: TSE
Note: Analysis is only possible on the selected hierarchy level.

The ANT-20/ANT-20E analyzes the “near end” and “far end” where these are present.
The “far end” analysis will be interrupted if near end defects occur which make far end analysis
impossible.
Fig. VI-35 “Performance Analysis” window showing ANSI/BELL analysis
VI-42 Virtual instruments: Performance Analysis

Dependence of defects on different levels

Some lower level defects depend on higher order defects. The GR-253, T1.105 standard
specifies which defects at a lower level are triggered by higher level alarms.
For example, “AIS-L” generates “AIS-P”, etc.
This is taken into account for the analysis; e.g. an “AIS-L” alarm generates “Path SES” as well
as “Path SES” etc.
Note: As the ANSI/BELL analysis uses bit error evaluation, you cannot switch to block error
evaluation.
Further information see part 7 “Technical Background”.

10.3 Performance Analysis: ITU-T G.821
Clicking on the above icon button allows you to perform a G.821 analysis in the “Performance
Analysis” window. The ITU-T G.821 analysis corresponds to Recommendation G.821 (Issue
date 07/95).
Degraded minutes are also evaluated.
A multiplex factor can be taken into account during the analysis, corresponding to older versions
of Recommendation G.821 (Annex D).
G.821 analysis can be performed on the following events:
• Bit errors (TSE, Test Sequence Error)
• FAS bit errors (FAS 2, FAS 8, FAS 34, FAS 140)
• CRC errors
• EBIT errors
The following signals can be measured when G.821 analysis is performed for test sequence
errors (TSE):
• Unframed pattern without bit rate limitations
• N x 64 kbit/s
• Framed patterns and bulk signals
• Overhead bytes E1, E2, F1, F2, F2L, D1 to D3 and D4 to D12 in the SOH / POH of
SDH signals
Note: As the G.821 analysis uses bit error evaluation, you cannot switch to block error
evaluation.
Fig. VI-36 “Performance Analysis” window showing ITU-T G.821 analysis

Clicking on the appropriate icon button shown above allows you to perform G.826 “In Service”
(ISM) and “Out of Service” (OOS) analysis in the “Performance Analysis” window.
The following results are determined for the various hierarchy levels:
EB, BBE, ES, EFS, SES, UAS, PATH UAS and VERDICT.
In the case of G.826 ISM, the ANT-20 analyses both forward and backward channel (“Near
End” and “Far End”), if this is possible at the measuring point selected.
Measurement is performed at framed signals of the primary system level or higher in the case
of G.826 ISM. The following anomalies can be evaluated:
B1, B2SUM/MS-REI, HP-B3/HP-REI, LP-BIP8/LP-REI, LP-BIP2/LP-REI,
FAS140, FAS34, FAS8, FAS2, CRC4/EBIT,
G832-FAS140, G832-EM140/REI, G832-FAS34 and G832-EM34/REI.
For ANSI mappings, the following anomalies can also be measured: DS3 P-Parity, DS3 C-
Parity, FAS45, FAS1.5 and DS1-CRC6.
The measuring point the G.826 ISM evaluation is performed at is set in the “Hierarchy” menu.
In the case of G.826 OOS, measurement is performed at unframed test signals. TSE block
errors are always evaluated.
Note: As the G.826 analysis uses block error evaluation, you cannot switch to bit error
evaluation.
Fig. VI-37 “Performance Analysis” window showing ITU-T G.826 ISM (in-service measurement)

Analysis” window.
G.828 evaluation conforms to ITU-T Recommendation dated 3/2000. The G.828 standard is a
further development of Recommendation G.826 for synchronous digital paths.
Recommendation G.828 specifies additional measurement values and measurement points:
• SEP (Severely Errored Period, declared as optional)
• Performance measurement on TCM bytes (in preparation for ANT-20)
G.828 evaluation can be performed on the following events:
• B1
• B2SUM
• MS-REI
• B3
• HP-REI
• LP-BIP 2/8
• LP-REI
• Bit errors (TSE)
Selecting the meas. point

If you change the signal structure, a new meas. point is normally sought automatically. Either
B3 or TSE will be set.
The meas. point is retained if the mapping is not altered.
G.828 evaluation will be disabled if measurements cannot be made at any of the meas. points
listed (e.g. for ATM or G.832).
Fig. VI-38 “Performance Analysis” window showing an ITU-T G.828 analysis
Parallel evaluation at the near end and far end

Where permitted by the signal structure, simultaneous evaluation takes place on the near end
and far end. This applies to the following meas. points:
• B2SUM and MS-REI
• B3 and HP-REI
• LP-BIP 2/8 and LP-REI

All G.828 results are determined separately for the near end and far end.
The far end evaluation will be interrupted by certain alarms, such as LOS, LOF or AIS. These
alarm times are excluded from the reference value for the rate computation at the far end.
G.828 evaluation on bit errors (TSE)

G.828 evaluation on bit errors (TSE) can be performed on the following signals:
• Unframed patterns without bit rate limitation
• Overhead bytes E1, E2, F1, F2, F2L, D1 through D3 and D4 through D12 in the SOH/POH
of SDH signals
Since G.828 evaluation is a block error evaluation, it is not possible to switch to bit error
evaluation.

Analysis” window. G.829 evaluation can be performed on the following events:
• B1
• B2SUM
• MS-REI

B2SUM or TSE will be set.
G.829 evaluation will be disabled if measurements cannot be made at any of the meas. points
Parallel evaluation at the near end and far end

and far end. This applies to the following meas. point:
The G.829 results are determined separately for the near end and far end.
G.829 evaluation on bit errors (TSE)

G.829 evaluation on bit errors (TSE) can be performed on the following signals:
of SDH signals.
Fig. VI-39 “Performance Analysis” window showing an ITU-T G.829 analysis

Note: The special block error evaluation using BIP-1 blocks means that the instrument is run
in bit error evaluation mode. It is therefore not possible to switch to block error
evaluation. This does not apply to the TSE meas. point, for which real block errors are
evaluated. You cannot therefore switch to bit error evaluation when making a
G.829 evaluation on TSEs.

10.7 Performance Analysis: ITU-T M.2100
Clicking on the above icon button allows you to perform a M.2100 analysis in the “Performance
Analysis” window. M.2100 analysis can be performed on the following events:
• FAS bit errors (FAS1.5, FAS2, FAS8, FAS34, FAS45 and FAS140)
• CRC errors (CRC-4 and CRC-6)
• EBIT errors
• PBIT errors
Selecting the test point

The measuring point evaluation shall be performed at is set in the “Hierarchy” menu.
If you change the signal structure, a new test point will be selected automatically.
The new test point is selected in the following order of priority:
FAS 140, DS3 P-Bit, FAS 34, FAS 8, 2Mbit/s CRC 4, FAS 2, DS1 CRC 6, DS1 FAS, TSE.
The first possible test point in the new signal structure will be selected. Analysis is disabled if
measurement is not possible at any of the test points listed.
Parallel M.2100 analysis at the “near end” and the “far end”
Analysis of PCM30CRC signals is performed simultaneously at the “near end” and the “far end”.
All the M.2100 results for the near end and for the far end are determined separately.
Far end analysis will be interrupted by certain alarms, e.g. LOS, LOF or AIS. The times of these
alarms will be subtracted from the reference value for determining the far end ratio results.
Fig. VI-40 “Performance Analysis” window showing an ITU-T M.2100 analysis

M.2100 analysis of bit errors (TSE)

M.2100 analysis of test sequence errors can be performed on the following signals:
• Unframed pattern without bit rate limitations
• N x 64 kbit/s
• Overhead bytes E1, E2, F1, F2, F2L, D1 to D3 and D4 to D12 in the SOH / POH of
SDH signals
Note: As the M.2100 analysis uses bit error evaluation, you cannot switch to block error
evaluation.

10.8 Performance Analysis: ITU-T M.2101
M.2101 evaluation takes the issue of Recommendation M.2101 dated 6/2000 as well as the
version M.2101.1 of April 1997 into account. You can switch between the two versions via a list
box in the "Settings" menu. The main differences between the Recommendation M.2101 (4/
1997) and the Recommendation M.2101 (6/2000) concern additional measurement values as
well as differences in the error performance objectives:
• BBE (Background Block Error)
• SEP (Severely Errored Period)
SEP evaluation is optional in the new Recommendation M.2101 (6/2000). The "Settings" menu
therefore includes a separate switch for including or excluding SEP from the assessment
verdict.
M.2101 evaluation can be performed on the following events:
• B1
• B2SUM
• MS-REI
• B3
• HP-REI
• LP-BIP 2/8
• LP-REI

B3 or TSE will be set.
M.2101 evaluation will be disabled if measurements cannot be made at any of the meas. points
Fig. VI-41 “Performance Analysis” window showing an ITU-T M.2101 analysis

Parallel M.2101 evaluation at the near end and far end

and far end. This applies to the following meas. points:
• B3 and HP-REI
• LP-BIP 2/8 and LP-REI
All M.2101 results are determined separately for the near end and far end.
M.2101 evaluation on bit errors (TSE)

M.2101 evaluation on bit errors (TSE) can be performed on the following signals:
of SDH signals
Note: Since M.2101 evaluation is a block error evaluation, it is not possible to switch to bit error
evaluation, with the exception of B2SUM. BIP-1 blocks are used for this evaluation,
which are only accessible via the bit error measurement function. For this reason, you
cannot switch to block error evaluation when performing M.2101 evaluation on B2SUM.

Notes:

Application Guide
5
Contents
Application Guide
1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
1.1 The Application Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
1.2 Signal Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
2 In-Service Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
3 Automatic Trouble Scan function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7

3.1 Test setup and description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
3.1.1 In-service monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
3.1.2 Out of service measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
3.2 Application settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
3.3 Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
4 Automatic Scan function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10

4.1 Test setup and description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
4.2 Application settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
4.3 Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
5 Automatic Search function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12

5.3 Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
6 APS switching time measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14

6.3 Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
7 Bit error rate test (BERT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17

7.3 Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
i
8 Performance analysis to G.821, G.826, G.828, G.829,

M.2100, M.2101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
8.3 Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
9 Pointer stress test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25

9.3 Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
10 Editing and analyzing the Transport/Path overhead . . . . . . . . . . A-29

10.3 Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
11 DCC/ECC bit error test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34

11.3 Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
12 Maximum Tolerable Jitter (MTJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38

12.3 Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
13 Fast Maximum Tolerable Jitter (F-MTJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41

13.2 Application setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41
13.3 Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-42
14 Jitter Transfer Function (JTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-44

14.2 Application setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-45
14.3 Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-45
ii
15 Phase Hit Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-48

15.2 Application setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-48
15.3 Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-49
16 Wander Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-51

16.3 Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-52
17 Wander Analysis to 2.5 Gbit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-54

17.3 Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-55
18 Maximum Tolerable Wander (MTW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-59

18.3 Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-60

to G.783, Appendix X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-62
20 Setting the ATM signal structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-64

21 ATM bit error rate test (ATM-BERT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-67

21.2 Switch configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-67
21.3 Application selection on the ANT-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-67
21.4 Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-68
22 ATM latency test for ATM switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-72

22.3 Application selection on the ANT-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-72
22.4 Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-73
iii

(ATM Background Generator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-76
23.3 Application selection on the ANT-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-76
23.4 Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-77
24 Sensor test - loss of cell delineation (LCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-79

24.4 Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-80
25 Measuring the CLR with a variable cell rate (VBR traffic) . . . . . . A-82
25.4 Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-83
iv
Application Guide
1 Introduction
This manual is intended to simplify use of the ANT-20. Starting with the basic settings, the
procedure for a successful measurement is explained step by step for each of the various
measurement applications of the ANT-20. The basic settings are repeated for each subsequent
application described.
1.1 The Application Manager
Once you have switched the instrument on and the Windows environment is displayed, the
Application Manager appears in reduced format.
Fig. A-1 Application Manager in reduced format: “Minibar”
1. Click on the button.

The full Application Manager window opens.
Measurement dialog
virtual instruments (e.g. Signal Structure)

“Add & Remove” dialog
Toggle: “Minibar” - “Normal format”
Fig. A-2 Application Manager in normal format
Virtual instruments
The Application Manager is the starting point for each measurement. The various measurement
windows for a measurement are selected and the maximum measurement duration is set here.
The ANT-20 represents a collection of several specialized measuring instruments, each of
which fulfils a particular task. Each “instrument” is represented by a corresponding window. The
ANT-20 test windows are therefore called “Virtual Instruments” (VI). Depending on the
measurement, various VIs are combined to make an application.
Application Guide A-1

Setting the measurement duration

The maximum measurement duration is set in the “Measurement” menu using the “Settings...”
dialog. You can also program a timer that allows measurements to be started automatically.
Selecting the virtual instruments

⇒ Click on the “Add & Remove” button in the Application Manager.
– or –
⇒ Select the “Add & Remove...” dialog from the “Instruments” menu.
All the instruments needed for your application are selected here. The menu lists all of the
windows that are currently active.
Fig. A-3 “Add & Remove” dialog window
Select the instruments required from the left-hand list box and add them to the application using
the “Add>>” button. In the initial state, the list of VIs used (right-hand list box) contains the
“Signal Structure” window. The other VIs needed for a particular application are detailed in this
documentation. We will begin with the “Signal Structure” VI.
A-2 Application Guide

1.2 Signal Structure
The signal structure used for the measurement is set using the “Signal Structure” VI. Use the
Application Manager to activate the window:
.
Fig. A-4 Minibar (Application Manager) after selecting the VIs
⇒ Click on the “Signal Structure” button.

The display area of the window shows the signal structure that is currently set.
Fig. A-5 “Signal Structure” display window
⇒ To change the structure, select the “Signal Structure...” sub-menu from the “Edit” menu.
The following window will be displayed:
Fig. A-6 “Signal Structure” dialog window
Setting the signal structure manually

The setting is made column by column from left to right:
1. First select in the “Edit” column whether you want to edit the Tx or the Rx side.
Then select the standard that is to apply (ITU-T or ANSI).
2. If you click on “Clear”, the Tx or Rx side (depending on your previous choice) will be
cleared.
3. Now set the signal structure that you require (start with SDH or PDH).
The “TX =>RX” or “RX =>TX” buttons automatically set the receiver or generator to the
same settings as their counterpart.
The generator and receiver now have the same settings.
The configuration you selected will be set only after you have clicked on the “OK” button.

Setting the signal structure automatically using the autoconfiguration function

This function lets you configure the ANT-20 to standard input signals automatically. The
electrical and optical interfaces are checked for the presence of standard PDH and OC-N/
STS-N signals and the payload contents in each case in channel 1.
1. Connect the ANT-20 to the device under test (DUT).
2. Select the “Autoconfiguration...” sub-menu from the “Auto” menu.
3. Click on the “Start” button.
The input signal contents are checked.
The result is displayed.
4. Confirming the result sets the receiver to the corresponding signal structure.
Setting the channels

1. Select the “Set Channel...” dialog from the “Channel” menu.
You can now make settings in the active number windows:
2. Click on “TX=>RX” or “RX=>TX” to set the counterpart to the same settings.
3. Confirm by clicking “OK”.
Setting the interface

⇒ Select the “Settings...” dialog from the “Interface” menu.
The window displayed is split into Tx and Rx sides.
This window allows you to configure the interface.

2 In-Service Monitoring
This section describes how you can use your ANT-20 to monitor systems that are in service.
This type of monitoring is required for various measurements that are described later on.
1. Monitoring from a protected monitoring point (PMP) of the DUT or a special test cable
Fig. A-7 Monitoring from a protected monitoring point (PMP)
Interfaces
• electrical unbalanced Rx : [14]

• electrical balanced Rx : [12]
2. Monitoring by looping the signal through the ANT-20 (“Through” mode)

The signal is looped through the ANT-20 and simultaneously analyzed by the receiver.
Fig. A-8 Monitoring using the ANT-20 in “Through” mode
Interfaces
• electrical unbalanced Rx : [14] Tx : [15]

• optical 52, 155, 622 Mbit/s Rx : [17] Tx : [18]
• optical 2,5 Gbit/s Rx : [44] Tx : [47] (1550 nm)
Tx : [48] (1310 nm)

3. Monitoring using an optical power splitter

The ANT-20 is equipped with a built-in optical power splitter.
Fig. A-9 Monitoring using an optical power splitter
Interfaces
• Optical Power Splitter Rx : [90]

• optical 52, 155, 622 Mbit/s Rx : [17]
• optical 2.5 Gbit/s Rx : [44]

3 Automatic Trouble Scan function
3.1 Test setup and description
3.1.1 In-service monitoring
Fig. A-10 In-service monitoring setup
Interfaces
see Sec. 2, Page A-5
3.1.2 Out of service measurement
This function allows sequential testing of all VT6, VT2 and VT1.5 channels in a STS-1/OC-1
signal. The ANT-20 receiver checks whether alarms have occurred in the input signal, in the
SONET structure and in the channels. The channels are then indicated in a table as being OK
or not OK. After the measurement, the detailed alarm status for each channel can be displayed.
Fig. A-11 Out of service measurement setup
Interfaces

Schematic diagram
Fig. A-12 Alarm status recalled (Trouble Scan)
3.2 Application settings
VIs required
⇒ Add the VIs required to the list of VIs used in the Application Manager.
The Application Manager should include at least the following instruments (see Fig. A-13):
3.3 Measurement
1. Click on “Trouble Scan...” in the “Auto” menu in the “Signal Structure” window.
A window showing a matrix of all the channels opens.
The measurement starts. Each channel is tested and marked separately.
The measurement stops automatically.
Fig. A-14 “Trouble Scan” window

3. To analyze a channel in more detail, select the channel and then click on the “Details”
button.
The following window opens:
Fig. A-15 Display of alarms that occurred
The alarms that occurred in the channel during the measurement are indicated by red dots.

4 Automatic Scan function
Fig. A-16 Automatic Scan function setup
In contrast to the Trouble Scan function, in this function the generator and receiver channels are
switched and tested simultaneously. The synchronization of the selected pattern is tested in all
channels in addition to the presence of any alarms. The channels are then indicated in a table
as being OK or not OK.
Interfaces

Schematic diagram
Fig. A-17 Automatic Scan mode

VIs required
4.3 Measurement
1. Click on “Scan...” in the “Auto” menu in the “Signal Structure” window.

The measurement starts.
Each channel is tested and the measurement stops automatically.
Fig. A-19 “Scanning Tributaries” window
• Errored channels are marked with a red cross (see channel 04 in example).

5 Automatic Search function
Fig. A-20 Search function setup
Interfaces

This function provides a rapid and simple way of finding channel shifts in synchronous DCS and
ADMs. The ANT-20 receiver searches all channels for a pre-selected test signal. When the
signal is found, the channel is marked in the table with a green check. Depending on the
configuration of the DUT, the test pattern may be present in more than one channel. The
ANT-20 transmit channels are not switched simultaneously.
Schematic diagram
Fig. A-21 Automatic Search function

VIs required
5.3 Measurement
1. Set a test channel in the output signal.

Select the “Channel” menu in the “Signal Structure” VI to do this.
2. Click on “Search ...” in the “Auto” menu in the “Signal Structure” window.
The measurement starts.
Each channel is tested and the measurement stops automatically.
Fig. A-23 “Search Tributaries” window
The figure shows an example Search mode result. The channels to be located are channel 04
and 05.

6 APS switching time measurement
Fig. A-24 APS switching time setup
Interfaces
• electrical balanced Rx : [12] Tx : [13]

APS stands for Automatic Protection Switching. This is a function of SONET networks that
prevents connections from being interrupted for a long period if a working line fails.
If a problem occurs with the working line, the system automatically switches to a back-up line.
The time taken to switch circuits must conform to certain requirements.
To check that the network meets these requirements, the ANT-20 measures how long a
particular event (e.g. AIS or loss of test pattern) remains present after APS has been triggered.
The measured time is compared with a previously set threshold. This provides a simple
PASSED/FAILED assessment of the APS switching time.

VIs required
6.3 Measurement
Settings
1. Click on the APS icon button in the “Signal Structure” VI toolbar.
Fig. A-26 “APS Time Measurement” window
2. Select an event for triggering the switch process from the “Sensor” list box.
3. Set the maximum permitted switching time threshold value in the “Switch time limit (t1)” box.
4. Enter the required duration for the complete measurement in the “Gate time (t2)” box. This
time should be more than the threshold value in order to detect multiple switching.
5. Start the measurement by clicking the “START” button.
6. Trigger the switching process by e.g. interrupting the working line.
The measurement stops automatically when completed.

Analysis
Two results are displayed once the measurement is completed:
• The total duration of the event pre-set in the “Sensor” list box.
• An interpretation of the measured value.
Display Meaning
PASSED Measured value ≤ Switch time limit
FAILED (Time) Measured value > Switch time limit
FAILED (Signal) A non-permitted defect occurred during the measurement that blocked the sensor
(e.g. LOS or LOF if “Sensor” is set to MS-AIS)
Table A-1 Display of switching time measurement results

7 Bit error rate test (BERT)
Fig. A-27 Bit error rate test setup
Interfaces

• optical 2.5 Gbit/s Rx : [44] Tx : [47] (1550 nm)
Tx : [48] (1310 nm)
• optical 10 Gbit/s Rx : [113] Tx : [103]
This measurement is used to monitor a certain channel for defects and error messages that
occur or to test the reaction of the DUT to artificially-induced defects and error messages.
VIs required
• Anomaly/Defect Insertion
✓ The signal structure has been set and the ANT-20 is connected to the DUT.
Tip: Make sure that you select the corresponding interface when you set the signal structure.
1. Add the VIs required to the list of VIs used in the Application Manager.
The Application Manager should include at least the following instruments (see Fig. A-28).
2. Now click first on the “Anomaly and Defect Analyzer” button and then on the “Anomaly and
Defect Insertion” button in the Application Manager.
This activates both these applications. To monitor a signal, only the “Anomaly/Defect
Analyzer” is needed.

7.3 Measurement
Example
Measurement of the reaction of a DUT to the insertion of a B2 error at a rate of 1E-6.
Error insertion
Fig. A-29 “Anomaly/Defect Insertion” window
1. Select “Anomalies” and “SONET” in the “View” menu.

– or –
Click on the corresponding buttons in the toolbar.
2. Select the item “B2” from the “Anomaly” list box.
3. Click on “continuous” in the “Insertion” box and select the appropriate rate from the selection
box.
4. Click on the “ON” button in the toolbar.
– or –
Press function key F7.
Insertion of the anomaly is now activated.
Starting the measurement (“Application Manager” VI)

⇒ Start the measurement by pressing function key F5.
– or –
⇒ Click on the “green traffic signal” icon in the "Minibar" (Application Manager).

Error analysis
The signal and the reaction of the DUT are monitored using the “Anomaly and Defect Analyzer”.
You can choose between four different types of result display.
Histogram (Graph)
The error rate is shown in the “Anomalies” box by clicking on the “B2” button.
Fig. A-30 Histogram display
Table
This display window is particularly useful if you want to determine when and for how long a
particular event occurred. Errors are shown as a count per second and alarm durations are
shown with a resolution of 100 millisecond.
Fig. A-31 Table display

Count result (Num)

The “total” and “intermediate” results are displayed. The measurement parameters can be set
under “Measurement Settings...” in the Application Manager.
The number of alarms displayed can be reduced by selection using appropriate filters.
Fig. A-32 Numerical display
Summary
Summary display of anomalies and defects. The “Summary” view allows you to see at a glance
whether anomalies or defects occurred during the measurement. The filter function allows you
to exclude certain anomalies and defects from the Summary evaluation.
If the Performance Analyzer is loaded and an evaluation has been selected, the results of this
evaluation will also be displayed.
Bild A-33 Summary display

Stopping the measurement (“Application Manager” VI)

⇒ Stop the measurement by pressing function key F6.
– or –
⇒ Click on the “red traffic signal” icon in the Minibar (Application Manager).

8 Performance analysis to G.821, G.826, G.828, G.829, M.2100,

M.2101
1. In-service monitoring
Fig. A-34 In-service monitoring setup
Interfaces: see Sec. 2, Page A-5
2. Out of service measurement
Fig. A-35 Out of service measurement setup
Interfaces

Tx : [48] (1310 nm)

These measurements are performed in order to determine the quality of a transmission path.
The measurements are in accordance to ANSI (T1.231) and Bellcore (GR 253)
recommendations. The measurement is based on transmission path test in three different
layers: Section layer, line layer and STS/VT path layer. In this case the corresponding parity
bytes (B1, B2, B3, BIP-V, C-Parity, CRC-6) and the transmitted alarm messages (RDI, REI,
DS3-FEBE) of the reverse direction will be evaluated.
In OOS mode the test signals will be transmitted with PRBS in the payload and evaluated on far
end of the path.
VIs required
• Performance Analysis
2. Click on the “Performance Analysis” button to activate the VI.
8.3 Measurement
Example
ANSI performance analysis.
Settings
1. Select “ANSI” from the “Analysis” menu.
– or –
Click on the appropriate button in the toolbar.
2. Click on the “Hierarchy” menu (see Fig. A-37).
3. Set the desired hierarchy level for the measurement.
Selecting the TSE setting replaces the path payload by
a PRBS and performs an end-to-end measurement.
4. Start the measurement by pressing function key F5.
– or –
Click on the “green traffic signal” icon in the “Minibar” (Application Manager).

Fig. A-37 “Performance Analysis” window with open pull-down menü “Hierarchy”
Analysis
The analysis provides separate results for the “NEAR END” and the “FAR END”. Put simply, this
means that errors occurring directly in the path are analyzed as well as errors occurring in the
return path which are indicated by a REI message. This allows both directions to be monitored
without actually connecting to both.
For detailed descriptions of different evaluation modes see part 7 “Technical Background”.

9 Pointer stress test
Fig. A-38 Pointer stress test setup
Interfaces

Tx : [48] (1310 nm)
• reference clock Rx : [25]
This measurement is intended to demonstrate that a network does not produce errors even
when extreme pointer operations occur. Pointer sequences that are specified by the
Recommendation T.1.105.03 are used for this. User-defined sequences can also be used. The
following sequences are pre-defined:
• Single pointer with reversed polarity
• Pointer sequences with one double pointer
43/44 sequence: 43 pointers - 1 double pointer - 44 pointers
• Pointer sequences with missing pointers
87/3 sequence: 87 pointers - 3 missing pointers
• Double pointer with reversed polarity

VIs required
• Pointer Generator
• Pointer Analyzer
2. To open the “Pointer Generator” and “Pointer Analyzer” windows, click on the appropriate
buttons in the Application Manager.
.
9.3 Measurement
Example
Measurement of an 86/4 sequence for the STS pointer.
Settings
Synchronizing the ANT-20 to an external clock signal:
1. Click on “Settings...” in the “Interface” menu in the “Signal Structure” VI.
2. Select “Ext. Clock 2M/E1 [25]” from the “Clock Source” box and click “OK” to confirm.
Fig. A-40 The “Interface” window
Selecting the sequence

The “Pointer Generator” allows simultaneous generation of test sequences (to G.783) for the
STS and VT pointers. Both pointers can be tested simultaneously and independently of each
other.

Fig. A-41 The “Pointer Generator” window
1. Click the “STS” button in the toolbar.

2. Select “86/4 Inc.” from the “STS Pointer” box.
86 pointer jumps are generated, followed by 4 missing pointers.
3. Set the distance between two pointer actions in the “T2” entry box.
4. Set the desired sequence length in the “Mode” box.
Select between a single sequence or continuous repetition.
5. Click on the “STSON” button to activate the pointer sequence.
– or –
Click on the “green traffic signal” icon in the "Minibar" (Application Manager).
For detailed descriptions of the available pointer sequences, see part 7 “Technical Background”
Pointer analysis
The “Pointer Analyzer” has two windows for the two types of pointer, just like the “Pointer
Generator”. The measurement record starts once function key F5 has been pressed.
The results are shown as a display of pointer address versus time and as an absolute value of
increment/decrement (INC/DEC) versus time.
The graphic display makes it easy to see if the system is running synchronously or if wander is
present.

Fig. A-42 Pointer Analyzer
If you click on the “CSR” button, the “Cursor” window opens. This shows the actual pointer value
and the increment or decrement of the pointer per unit time. The corresponding clock deviation
is indicated under the heading “Deviation”.

10 Editing and analyzing the Transport/Path overhead
Fig. A-43 Setup for editing and analyzing the transport/path overhead
Interfaces

Tx : [48] (1310 nm)
Access for manipulation of the individual bits in the TOH and POH is very important for
conformance testing and fault clearance. The ANT-20 allows you to immediately see the
reaction to a manipulation, since the windows for OH generation and analysis are displayed
together on the screen. This allows you to check APS information in the K1 and K2 bytes, for
example. It is also possible to perform BERTs on the embedded communication channels
(ECCs).
VIs required
• Overhead Generator
• Overhead Analyzer
2. Click on the “Overhead Generator” and “Overhead Analyzer” buttons to activate both
windows.

10.3 Measurement
Editing an overhead byte
Fig. A-45 The “Overhead Generator” window
The TOH and POH bytes for the selected channel are displayed.
This tool can be used to change the overhead bytes to suit your requirements.
The following bytes are excluded: A1 and A2 (OC-48 only), B1 to B3 and H1 to H4.
The first row of the matrix shows the byte name. The hexadecimal value of the byte is shown in
the next row.
Other abbreviations:
xx Byte cannot be overwritten

SQ Shown in the H4 byte field if a sequence is present
TP Test pattern
EX External access to DCC/ECC via V.11
TI Trace identifier
RX Receiver
Some or all of these abbreviations are also found in the toolbar.
Editing the overhead bytes:

1. First select a byte by clicking on it.
– or –
Mark it, using the cursor buttons.
2. Click on the selected field a second time to open the “Edit Overhead Byte” window.
3. Select a new value for the byte.
4. Click on “OK” to confirm your choice.
The new value will now be shown in the corresponding byte field.

Editing the trace identifier (J0, J1, J2)

1. Select a J byte from the matrix and click on the “TI” button in the toolbar.
The “Trace Identifier Editor” opens and an ASCII keyboard is displayed.
The default value is shown in the “Trace” box.
2. Edit the TI and click on “OK” to confirm.
The same value should be found in the trace identifier for the “Overhead Analyzer”.
If this is not the case and you start a measurement, a TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch) alarm will
result.
You can return to the stored default value at any time by simply clicking on the “Default” button.
Editing bytes K1, K2, S1, C2 and V5

1. Select “Edit Descriptor” in the “Descriptor” menu.
– or –
Click on the “DCT” button in the “Overhead Generator” VI toolbar.
The following window opens.
Fig. A-46 The “Descriptor” window
Bytes K1/K2 and K3/K4 contain control commands for the APS system (automatic protection
switching).
The byte name is shown in the left-hand column. The byte is shown in binary code in the center
column. Plain text selection boxes are found on the right-hand side. You can set the various
commands from the ANSI standard here without having to edit individual bits.

Analyzing the overhead bytes
Fig. A-47 The “Overhead Analyzer” window
The “Overhead Analyzer” window is very similar to the “Overhead Generator” in its layout. The
same byte matrix is used. The byte fields also correspond to those of the “Overhead Generator”.
The toolbar contains two different buttons.
IPR
This button opens the “Interpreter” window. This provides an overview of the contents of the K
bytes, the S1 byte and bytes C2/V5.
The bit patterns for each are interpreted and are also displayed in plain text.
SET
Click on this button to open the “Settings” window. In this window you can edit the expected
values for the trace identifier, path label mismatch and the H1 byte.
Fig. A-48 The “Settings” window

What happens if the generator and receiver trace identifiers do not match?
If the generator and receiver trace identifiers do not match a TIM alarm (trace identifier
mismatch) will be detected. This will not be indicated by the LED display on the instrument front
panel.
The presence of the alarm can be demonstrated using the “Anomaly and Defect Analyzer” (see
figure below).
You can select whether an alarm is to be triggered or not in the “Settings” window of the
“Overhead Analyzer” VI. The condition is activated by placing an identifier in front of the trace
identifier (e.g. TIM-V).
Common
alarm display (defects)
TIM-P alarm
Fig. A-49 The Anomaly/Defect Analyzer window

11 DCC/ECC bit error test
Fig. A-50 DCC/ECC bit error test setup
Interfaces
Tx : [48] (1310 nm)
The data communication channels (DCC) are used to control network elements via the network
management system (TMN, Telecommunications Management Network). Bytes D1 to D4
(Section OH) and D5 to D12 (Line OH) make up the DCC. The embedded communication
channels (ECC) contain the DCCs and also bytes E1, E2 and F1. To ensure that these channels
operate correctly, the ANT-20 inserts a bit pattern and performs a bit error test on the receiver
side.
VIs required
• Overhead Generator
• Overhead Analyzer
• Anomaly and Defect Insertion
• Anomaly and Defect Analyzer

11.3 Measurement
Example
BERT measurement in the DCC
Settings
1. First activate the “Overhead Generator“ and “Overhead Analyzer“ windows so that both are
in the foreground.
2. Select one of the D bytes in the Section OH or Line OH of the “Overhead Generator” (field
has a white background).
3. Click on the “TPG” (test pattern generator) button in the toolbar of the window.
This fills one group (D1 to D4, D5 to D12) with a test pattern.
4. Set the desired test pattern in the “Test pattern” list box of the “Edit Signal Structure” window
in the “Signal Structure“ VI.
5. Repeat the last three steps for the “Overhead Analyzer“ instead of the “Overhead
Generator”.
The D byte fields on both sides will now show “TP“.
Fig. A-52 The “Overhead Generator” and “Overhead Analyzer” windows
6. Activate the “Anomaly and Defect Insertion“ VI and “Anomaly and Defect Analyzer“ VI
windows.

⇒ Start the measurement by pressing function key F5.
– or –
⇒ Click on the “green traffic signal” icon in the “Minibar” (Application Manager).
Analysis
You can see if errors occur by means of the “Anomaly and Defect Analyzer“. These are
displayed in the line labelled “TSE-OH“. You can insert TSEs using the “Anomaly and Defect
Insertion“ VI and then observe whether these errors are reflected in the “Anomaly and Defect
Analyzer“ (see Fig. A-53).

Fig. A-53 The “Anomaly/Defect Insertion” and “Anomaly/Defect Analyzer” windows
⇒ Stop the measurement by pressing function key F6.

12 Maximum Tolerable Jitter (MTJ)

To G.823, G.825, G.958, O.172
Fig. A-54 MTJ measurements setup
Interfaces

• optical 2.5 Gbit/s Rx : [44] Tx : [47]
The measurement is used to check the maximum tolerable jitter of the electrical and optical line
and tributary inputs.
When a sine-wave modulation signal is used with a pseudorandom sequence as the test
pattern, at a given frequency, the amplitude of the jitter signals is increased using a half-interval
progression until errors occur at the output of the device under test.
VIs required
• O.172 Jitter Generator/Analyzer
2. Click on the “JIT” button to open the window for the O.172 Jitter Generator/Analyzer.

12.3 Measurement
Settings
✓ The O.172 Jitter Generator/Analyzer window must already be open.
1. Select the “MTJ” command in the “Mode” menu.
– or –
2. Select the error source (e.g. TSE, Test Sequence Error) in the “Error Source” list field
(currently only bit errors are available).
3. Enter the error threshold in the “Error Threshold” field. The error threshold provides a
decision criterion for the search algorithm.
4. In the “Settling Time” field, enter a delay for each measurement that allows the DUT to settle
before the measurement is made.
5. Enter the gate time in the “Gate Time” box.
6. In the “Settings” menu select the “MTJ ...” item.
– or –
Click on the “SET” symbol.
The “Settings” dialog box is opened.
Fig. A-56 “MTJ Settings” dialog
In the box, you will find the measurement frequencies for the MTJ measurement and the
characteristic data for the tolerance mask.
7. If necessary select your own scan frequencies and modify the tolerance mask values.
8. Confirm the input with “OK”.
The “Settings” dialog box is closed.
9. Start the measurement with “Start”. The measurement stops automatically, but can be
halted at any time by clicking on “Stop”.

Analysis
When an MTJ measurement is made, the default values for the scan frequencies and the
tolerance mask are set in the “MTJ Settings” window according to the bit rate. The default
values are changed automatically when the bit rate is changed.
There are two windows for displaying results (see Fig. A-57).
Table format
• Measurement results are displayed in the table under “UI”.
• Measurement results where the tolerable jitter of the DUT is greater than the maximum
amplitude that can be set on the jitter generator, are indicated by a “>” (e.g. >64 UI).
• Measurement results which are below the tolerance mask are marked with an “!” in the table.
Graphics format
• Measurement results are marked with a “+” on the graphics.
• Measurement results where the tolerable jitter of the DUT is greater than the maximum
amplitude that can be set on the jitter generator are marked with “∆” on the graphics
(instead of the “+”).
Fig. A-57 MTJ measurements: Results displayed as a table (left) and graphics (right)

13 Fast Maximum Tolerable Jitter (F-MTJ)
Fig. A-58 Fast MTJ measurements setup
Interfaces

With a Fast MTJ measurement, given combinations of jitter frequencies and jitter amplitudes
which lie on the limit curves stipulated by ANSI are set on the jitter generator.
Each measurement point is classified as “OK” or “Failed”. This indicates whether the DUT meets
the limit curve or not.
13.2 Application setting
VIs required
1. Add the VIs required to the list of VIs used on the Application Manager.

13.3 Measurement
Settings
✓ The “O.172 Jitter Generator/Analyzer” window has already been opened.
1. Select the “Fast MTJ” command in the “Mode” menu.
– or –
Click on the corresponding button in the tool bar.
2. Select the error source (e.g. TSE, Test Sequence Error) from the “Error Source” list box.
3. In the “Error Threshold” box, enter the error threshold above which a device under test is to
be considered as having “Failed” the test.
An error threshold cannot be entered if an alarm is selected from the “Error Source” list box.
4. In the “Settling Time” box, enter a settling time for each measurement to allow the d.u.t to
settle.
5. Select “MTJ ...” in the “Settings” menu.
– or –
Click on the “SET” icon.
The “Settings” dialog opens.
Fig. A-60 “FMTJ Settings” dialog
6. If required, select individual frequency and amplitude combinations to be used for

performing the measurement.
7. Confirm your entries by clicking “OK”.
The “Settings” dialog closes.

8. Click “Start” to start the measurement. The measurement stops automatically on completion
or when you click on “Stop”.
Fig. A-61 Fast MTJ measurements window
Analysis
• The table (see Fig. A-61) contains combinations of jitter frequencies and jitter amplitudes or
default values specified by the user. Starting with the smallest frequency, they are set when
the measurement is started.
• After the delay set with “Settling Time”, a check is made to determine if there are any alarms
or errors in the input signal.
• According to the result, each setting is classified as “OK” or “Failed”.
• The measurement stops automatically when the last measurement point has been
completed or by clicking on “Stop”.

14 Jitter Transfer Function (JTF)

To G.958, G.823, O.172
TX
2.
1. Calibration
measurement
1. DUT
2. Measurement
with DUT
RX
Fig. A-62 Jitter transfer function measurements setup
Interfaces

Jitter transfer function measurements are of particular importance when dealing with
regenerative repeaters. Checks are carried out to demonstrate that the jitter gain of a
regenerative repeater is below a predefined value. If this is not the case, “jitter runaway” occurs
after several regenerative repeaters.
The jitter transfer function (JTF) is measured by applying a signal whose jitter is constant over
frequency to the DUT. The jitter amplitude is selected so that the DUT can handle it at high
frequencies.
The Jitter Analyzer measures the resulting jitter amplitude at the output of the DUT at various
TX jitter frequencies. The log of the ratio gives the jitter gain or attenuation.
Tip: For maximum measurement accuracy, it is a good idea to make a calibration
measurement before every JTF measurement (see Fig. A-62).

VIs required
14.3 Measurement
Settings
✓ The “O.172 Jitter Generator/Analyzer” window has been opened already.
1. In the “Mode” menu, select the “JTF” command.
– or –
2. Select the appropriate range (1.6 UI or 20 UI; the range is pre-set for STM-16/OC-48) in the
“RX: Range” box.
3. Enter an appropriate delay time for the various measurements in the “Settling Time” field, so
that the measurement starts after the DUT has settled.
Fig. A-64 “O.172 Jitter Generator/Analyzer” window for JTF measurements

Dialog “JTF Settings”
Fig. A-65 Dialog “JTF Settings”
The measurement frequencies for the JTF measurement and the specifications for the
tolerance mask are found here.
1. Select “JTF ...” in the “Settings” menu.
– or –
Click on the “SET” icon.
The “JTF Settings” dialog opens.
2. If required, select individual scan frequencies and amplitudes, as well as altered tolerance
mask values.
3. If you want the measurement to be performed using a constant amplitude for all scan
frequencies, check the “Fixed Amplitude” check box and enter the required amplitude in the
box below it.
4. If you want to use the results of a previous MTJ measurement for the scan frequencies and
amplitudes, click on the “MTJ Adaptation” button. The MTJ results are then automatically
matched to the permissible ranges (measurement and frequency) of the jitter meter. If there
are no MTJ results available, the button is grayed out.
5. Select whether you want to perform a calibration measurement before every JTF
measurement or to use a single calibration measurement (stored internally). For maximum
measurement accuracy, it is a good idea to make a calibration measurement before every
JTF measurement
6. Click “Start” to start the measurement. The measurement stops automatically when finished
or when you click “Stop”.

Analysis
The measurement results are displayed in three different windows. The default values for the
scan frequencies and the tolerance masks in the “JTF-Settings” window are set in the window
with the table display (see Fig. A-66).
Fig. A-66 JTF measurements: results displayed as tables
• The default values depend on the bit rate and change automatically when the bit rate is
changed.
• Measurement results are displayed in the table under “dB”.
• Measurement results in the table that are outside the tolerance mask(s) are marked with an
“!”.
There are two graphics windows. The right window has the higher y-axis resolution. On the
graph, the measurement values are marked with a “+”.
Fig. A-67 JTF measurements: result graphics with various resolutions

15 Phase Hit Measurement
Fig. A-68 Phase hit measurement setup
Interfaces
• electrical balanced Rx: [12]

• electrical unbalanced Rx: [14]
• optical 52, 155, 622 Mbit/s Rx: [17]
• optical 2.5 Gbit/s Rx: [44]
Phase hits occur when a specific jitter threshold is exceeded. Events of this kind are recorded
using a counter. The current counter reading indicates how often the phase hit threshold has
been exceeded since the measurement was started.
Positive counts and negative counts can be made mutually with the ANT-20 Jitter Analyzer.
VIs required
The Application Manager should at least include the following instruments (see Fig. A-69).
2. Click on the “JIT” button to open the “O.172 Jitter Generator/Analyzer” window.

15.3 Measurement
Settings
1. In the “Mode” menu select the “PP+PH” command.
– or –
The O.172 Jitter Generator/Analyzer” window opens.
Fig. A-70 “O.172 Jitter Generator/Analyzer” window when the auto function is turned off
2. In the “Settings” menu click on the “General ...” command.

– or –
The “Jitter-General Settings” window opens.
Fig. A-71 “Jitter - General Settings” dialog box
3. Enter the threshold values you want under “Hit Threshold” using the list fields.
4. Confirm with “OK”.
5. Start the measurement by
– pressing function key F5 or
– clicking on the “green traffic signal” icon in the Application Manager.
Input to the “Hit Threshold” can be made with the normal keyboard or with the “virtual” keyboard
window.

Analysis
Current display of counted

threshold transgressions
A phase hit measurement will be interrupted when

synchronization or the AC line supply fails. The
counters are stopped during the interruption.
Counting continues as soon as the instrument re-
synchronizes after the interruption.
The yellow warning label indicates that the
measurement was interrupted.
Fig. A-72 Phase hit measurement

16 Wander Generator
The Wander Generator is used to make manually tolerance to wander measurements
conforming to ITU-T G.823, G.824, G.825, O.172 and ETSI EN302084.
Fig. A-73 Test setup for tolerance to wander measurements
Interfaces

• Ref Clock in [25] Generator synchronization input;
clock or data signal (2 Mbit/s or 1.5 Mbit/s)
VIs required
2. Click on the “JIT” button to open the “O.172 Jitter Generator/Analyzer” window.
3. Click on the button to the right of the “JIT” button to open the “Anomaly/Defect Analyzer”
window.
Fig. A-74 Minibar (Application Manager) after VI selection

16.3 Measurement
Settings
✓ The “O.172 Jitter Generator/Analyzer” window is already open.
1. Select the “Settings ...” command from the “Interface” menu in the “Signal Structure”
window.
The “Interface” dialog opens.
Fig. A-75 “Interface” dialog
2. Select the clock source corresponding to the clock frequency at input [25] on the TX side
from the “Clock Source” list box.
3. Select the “Wander” command from the “TX” menu in the “O.172 Jitter Generator/Analyzer”
window.
4. Set the TX amplitude and frequency according to the tolerance masks of the appropriate
standard.
5. Select the “On” command from the “TX” menu.
Fig. A-76 “O.172 Jitter Generator/Analyzer” window with wander generator activated

6. In the Application Manager, select the “Settings ...” command from the “Measurement”
menu.
The “Measurement Settings” dialog opens.
Fig. A-77 “Measurement Settings” dialog
7. Enter the gate time required.

When setting the gate time, remember that the period time can be very long, depending on
the wander frequency that you selected. Select the gate time such that it corresponds to at
1
least one wander modulation period ( --------------
f
mod
).
8. Start the measurement
– by pressing function key F5, or
– by clicking the “green traffic signal” icon in the Application Manager.
Analysis
The “Anomaly/Defect Analyzer” window indicates the wander frequency or wander amplitude
above which errors or alarms occur.
Fig. A-78 “Anomaly/Defect Analyzer” window

17 Wander Analysis to 2.5 Gbit/s

To G.811, G.812, G.813, G.823, G.824, G.825, O.172
SSU
Clock
STM-N
SEC
Wander
Ref. Clock RX
DUT
Fig. A-79 Wander measurements setup
Interfaces
• electrical balanced Rx : [12]

• electrical unbalanced Rx : [14]
• optical 52, 155, 622 Mbit/s Rx : [17]
• optical 2.5 Gbit/s Rx : [44]
• wander ref clock in [35] (to 622 Mbit/s)
[54] (2.5 Gbit/s)
Every SDH network element can make use of an internal clock (SEC-SDH Equipment Clock).
This clock source is synchronized by means of an SSU (Synchronization Supply Unit) via a
2.048 MHz clock line. To check the quality of the internal clock source, the clock stability of the
reference source (SSU) is compared with that of the transmitted data signal. The difference is
referred to as wander.
The ANT-20 can be used to perform measurements on all interfaces of the instrument.

VIs required
2. Click on the “JIT” button to open the window for the “O.172 Jitter Generator/Analyzer”.
17.3 Measurement
Settings
1. In the “Mode” menu select “TIE”.
– or –
Click on the “Wander” button in the toolbar.
The wander display appears in the “O.172 Jitter Generator/Analyzer” window.
Fig. A-81 “O.172 Jitter Generator/Analyzer” window with wander display
2. In the “Settings” menu select “Wander ...”.

– or –
Click on the “SET” icon in the toolbar.
Set the reference clock frequency in this window.

Fig. A-82 “Wander Settings” dialog
3. In the “Wander Settings” dialog, set the frequency or bit rate (not for 2488 Mbit/s) of the
reference signal.
4. Select the reference signal input required (BAL [34] or UNBAL [35]) (not for 2488 Mbit/s).
5. Select the sample rate required. The low-pass filter is set automatically.
6. Click “OK” to confirm.
7. Start the measurement by
– pressing function key F5 or
– clicking on the “green traffic signal” icon in the Application Manager.
Wander analysis
Wander analysis involves measurements that take a particularly long time. Measurement
intervals up to 99 days can be set on the ANT-20.
The measured values are displayed in the “O.172 Jitter Generator/Analyzer” window as a graph
of the TIE values and numerically in the MTIE and TIE fields above.
⇒ Click on the “CSR” button in the toolbar.
The “Cursor Position” window then opens. This gives you an overview of the current values
on the curve which is being recorded.
Fig. A-83 “Cursor Position” window
Storing results
1. Select the “Export ...” command in the “Print” menu.
The “Save as” dialog box is opened.
2. Select the target directory, under the current file shall be stored and set the “CSV” format.
3. Click on “Ok” to start exporting.

Analysis for MTIE and TDEV (BN 3035/95.21)

The “MTIE/TDEV Analysis” software (option BN 3035/95.21) is available for precise time-
domain analysis of MTIE and TDEV. The program can be started from the “O.172 Jitter
Generator/Analyzer” or separately from the ANT-20 software. The program evaluates TIE
values that were measured using an ANT-20. The evaluations follow the recommendations set
out in ETSI ETS 300462, EN 302084, ITU-T G.811, G.812, G.813 and ANSI T1.101, and include
the masks for the various signal sources.
Starting the “MTIE/TDEV Analysis” program from the “O.172 Jitter Generator/Analyzer”
1. Click on the “TDEV” button in the “O.172 Jitter Generator/Analyzer” (wander side) window.
The program starts and the TIE data from the previous measurement (stored in the file
“WANDMSEC.BIN”) are loaded automatically.
The TIE data are displayed in the graphics box of the “TIE analysis” window.
2. Click on the “MTIE/TDEV ...” button.
The “MTIE analysis” window opens (see Fig. A-84).
3. Click on the “Analysis” button in this window.
The values are calculated and displayed.
Starting the “MTIE/TDEV Analysis” program from the Windows 95 Start menu
1. Click on the appropriate item in the Windows 95 “Start” menu.
The program starts.
2. Click on the “Load” button.
The “Load data file” dialog opens.
3. Select the “WANDMSEC.BIN” file from the “C:\ANT20\RESULTS” directory.
– or –
Select a previously exported CSV format file.
The TIE data are displayed in the graphics box of the “TIE analysis” window.
4. Click on the “MTIE/TDEV ...” button.
The “MTIE analysis” window opens (see Fig. A-84).
5. Click on the “Analysis” button in this window.
The values are calculated and displayed.
Possible evaluations
• The check boxes at the lower left of the “MTIE analysis” window are used to select the
values that you want to display.
• You can limit the number of measurement points to be displayed by entering a range in the
“Analysis range” text boxes.
• You can select different tolerance masks from the “Masks” list box. These can be used to
give you a quick impression of whether the measured values meet the tolerance
requirements or not.
• The displayed graph can be printed out (“Print” button) and exported (“Export” menu).

MTIE values
TDEV values
Passed/Failed
fulfilled or not fulfilled
Fig. A-84 MTIE and TDEV analysis

18 Maximum Tolerable Wander (MTW)

The Maximum Tolerable Wander (MTW) function is used to perform automatic measurements
of wander tolerance conforming to ITU-T G.823, G.824, G.825 and O.172 and ETSI EN302084.
Fig. A-85 Test setup for measuring maximum tolerable wander
Interfaces

• Ref Clock in [25] Generator synchronization input;
clock or data signal (2 Mbit/s or 1.5 Mbit/s)
VIs required

18.3 Measurement
Settings
✓ The “O.172 Jitter Generator/Analyzer” window must already be open.
Settings in the “Interface” dialog of the “Signal Structure” window

1. Select the “Settings ...” command from the “Interface” menu in the “Signal Structure”
window.
The “Interface” dialog opens.
Fig. A-87 “Interface” dialog
2. Select the clock source corresponding to the clock frequency at input [25] from the “Clock
Source” list box on the TX side of the box.
Settings in the “O.172 Jitter Generator/Analyzer” window

1. Select the “Wander” command from the “TX” menu in the “O.172 Jitter Generator/Analyzer”
window.
– or –
Click on the “TX WAN” icon in the toolbar.
2. Select the “MTW” command from the “Mode” menu.
– or –
Click on the “MTW” icon in the toolbar.
Note: The MTW function can only be activated if you first set the generator to wander
(TX WAN).
The generator must be set back to jitter (TX JIT) if you want to use other automatic jitter
measurement functions (MTJ, F-MTJ, JTF) after making a MTW measurement.
3. Select the error source (e.g. TSE, Test Sequence Error) in the “Error Source” list box.
4. In the “Error Threshold” box, enter the error threshold above which the result will be
assessed as “Failed”.
An error threshold cannot be entered if an alarm was selected in the “Error Source” box.
5. In the “Settling Time” box, enter the delay between individual measurement points.
6. Select the “MTW” command from the “Settings” menu.
– or –
Click on the “SET” icon in the toolbar.

Fig. A-88 “MTW Settings” dialog
7. If required, select your own combinations of frequency and amplitude to be used for the
measurement.
8. Click “OK” to confirm your entries.
The “MTW Settings” closes.
9. Click “Start” to start the measurement. The measurement stops automatically after all
measurement points have been tested. It can also be stopped at any time by clicking on
“Stop”.
Note: The measurement times may be very long due to the frequency settings.
Fig. A-89 “O.172 Jitter Generator/Analyzer” window for MTW measurements
Analysis
• The table (see Fig. A-89) contains combinations pre-selected by the user or the default
values for wander frequencies and wander amplitudes. These are set one after the other in
the order they are entered in the table when the measurement is started.
• After the “Settling Time” has elapsed, the output signal of the ANT-20 is modulated for one
period of the current frequency and the input signal is monitored for the presence of alarms
or errors.
• Depending on the result, each setting will be indicated as “OK” or “Failed”.
• The measurement stops automatically when the last measurement point has been tested.
It can also be stopped at any time by clicking on “Stop”.


to G.783, Appendix X
Fig. A-90 Test setup for consecutive identical digit tests
Interfaces

Tx : [48] (1310 nm)
• optical 10 Gbit/s Rx. [113] Tx : [103]
SDH network elements must operate without errors even when long sequences occur in which
the bit state remains the same (all zeros or all ones sequences). The Recommendations G.958
and G.783 stipulate that a network element must be able to cope with a bit sequence of zeros
or ones of a length of at least 72 bits (9 bytes) without errors. The tolerance of a network
element to all zeros or all ones sequences is known as consecutive identical digit (CID)
immunity.
A method for testing the CID immunity of network elements is suggested in Appendix X of the
1999 revision of ITU-T Recommendation G.783: The bytes in columns 7, 8 and 9 of the first row
of the SOH / TOH are filled with an all zeros or all ones signal. The J0 byte, i.e. byte S(1,7,1), is
not changed, since it contains the path trace information.
The maximum number of overhead bits that can contain the all ones or all zeros signal depends
on the signal structure:
Signal structure Maximum number of zero or one bits
STM-4/OC-12 88 (= 11 bytes)
STM-16/OC-48 376 (= 47 bytes)
STM-64/OC-192 1528 (= 191 bytes)
Table G-2 Maximum lengths of all zeros or all ones sequences
To assist you in setting these CID overhead patterns, a number of example applications are
supplied along with the ANT-20 Software. The applications are found on the ITU-T or ANSI
Application Disk.

There is an application for each of the above signal structures, which sets an all ones signal with
a length of 72 bits. There is also an application which sets the maximum number of ones
indicated in the above table for each of the signal structures.
The applications have the following names:
ANSI SONET
• W&G STM-4 VC4 16c 72 bit CID • W&G OC-12 1SPE 72 bit CID
• W&G STM-4 VC4 16c 88 bit CID • W&G OC-12 1SPE 88 bit CID
• W&G STM-16 VC4 16c 72 bit CID • W&G OC-48 3c 72 bit CID
• W&G STM-16 VC4 16c 376 bit CID • W&G OC-48 3c 376 bit CID
• W&G STM-64 VC4 16c 72 bit CID • W&G OC-192 3cSPE 72 bit CID
• W&G STM-64 VC4 16c 1528 bit CID • W&G OC-192 3cSPE 1528 bit CID
Table G-3 Applications for CID tests
When you invoke one of these applications, the bytes in columns 7 to 9 of SOH #1 through #N
are set to the value “FF” (all ones) instead of the default value (AA). The J0 byte remains
unchanged.
If you require CID sequences of other lengths (e.g. for other signal structures), you can gener-
ate these using the ANT-20 “Overhead Generator” VI.
To load one of the applications:

✓ The Application Manager is on top.
1. Click on the “Open” command in the “Application” menu.
The “Open Application” window opens.
2. Click on the application in the list box that you want to use.
The item will be highlighted in gray.
The selected application will be loaded and the ANT-20 is ready to make measurements.

20 Setting the ATM signal structure
Fig. A-91 ATM signal structure test setup
Interfaces

Tx : [48] (1310 nm)
To perform an ATM measurement with the ANT-20, you must first select the corresponding
signal structure. This section describes the step-by-step procedure for this with the aid of an
example.
VIs required
• ATM Signal Structure
2. For the following settings click on one of the buttons (minibar) to bring the desired window
on top.
Example
ATM signal structure with STS-3 / STS-3c SPE ATM mapping, electrical interface
Setting the physical layer (“Signal Structure” VI)

✓ The “Signal Structure” window is activated. The display area shows the current signal
structure.
1. Select “Signal Structure...” from the “Edit” menu.
– or –
Click on the corresponding icon in the Application Manager.

The “Signal Structure Editor” dialog opens (see Fig. A-93).
Fig. A-93 Displaying and setting the signal structure to ANSI standard
2. Select the interface by clicking the “Electric” button.

3. Set the required signal structure:
– the SONET signal, by clicking the “STS3” button
– the mapping structure, by clicking the “STS3c SPE” and “ATM” button.
4. Confirm your settings by clicking on the “OK” button.
The display area shows the new signal structure.
Fig. A-94 Physical layer signal structure (“Signal Structure” VI)
Setting the ATM / AAL layers (“ATM Signal Structure” VI)

✓ The “ATM Signal Structure” window is activated. The display area shows the current ATM
signal structure.
1. Select “ATM Signal Structure...” from the “Edit” menu.
– or –
Click on the corresponding icon in the toolbar.
The “ATM Structure” dialog opens (see Fig. A-95).
Fig. A-95 “ATM Structure” dialog (“ATM Signal Structure” VI)

2. Select the ATM SDU to be transmitted and received in the test channel:
– Testcell: Test cells to O.191
– AAL-0: PRBS or DW in cell payload
– AAL-1: PRBS or DW as AAL-1 PDU
3. Select the “Performance Measurement” to be used:
– Cell Transfer Delay Results shown in ATM Traffic Analyzer, and
– Error Related Performance Results shown in Anomaly and Defect Analyzer
4. Confirm your settings by clicking on the “OK” button.
The “ATM Structure” dialog will be closed.
Setting the VPI/VCI parameters

✓ The “ATM Signal Structure” window is activated.
1. Select “ATM Channel...” from the “Channel” menu.
– or –
Click on the corresponding icon in the toolbar.
The “ATM Channel“ dialog opens.
Fig. A-96 The “ATM Channel” dialog (“ATM Signal Structure” VI)
2. Enter the VPI/VCI parameters of the test connection for the generator and receiver.
3. Confirm your entries by clicking on the “OK” button.
4. The “ATM Channel” dialog will be closed.
The desired ATM signal structure appears in the diaplay area
of the “ATM Signal Structure” VI.
Fig. A-97 ATM layer signal structure (“ATM Signal Structure” VI)
• Click on the “ON” icon in the “ATM Signal Structure” VI to activate ATM traffic and the
selected test cells are transmitted. If this channel is not active, empty cells will be
transmitted.
• The default setting of the ATM Generator is:
– Traffic type: CBR (constant bit rate)
– 100% load

21 ATM bit error rate test (ATM-BERT)

BN 3035/90.70 only
Fig. A-98 Setup for the ATM bit error rate test
For ATM networks too the bit error test is a basic measurement method that makes it possible
to test network paths quickly and simply or to check configurations of network elements. With
the ANT-20, you measure the bit errors via a test cell channel. Apart from bit error measure-
ments on the cell payload, parallel measurements for correctable and non-correctable header
errors are also being performed. If this error measurement is performed on cells with an AAL-1
structure, the ANT-20 also simultaneously checks the cell sequence integrity so that cell losses
can also be found.
21.2 Switch configuration
⇒ Set up an unidirectional, permanent connection with a UBR (Unspecified Bit Rate) contract
through the switch.
21.3 Application selection on the ANT-20
VIs required
• ATM-Signal Structure
⇒ Add the VIs required to the list of VIs used in the Application Manager..

21.4 Measurement
Example 1
Determining the bit error rate in the ATM layer.
Settings
1. First of all, set the Signal Structure VI as described.
2. Open the ATM Signal Structure VI.
3. In the “Edit” menu select the item “ATM Structure...”.
– or –
This activates the “ATM Structure” window.
4. In the “ATM SDU” field press the button “AAL0” and confirm with “OK”.
– or –
Click the “green traffic signal” icon in the Application Manager.
Analysis
Using the Anomaly and Defect Analyzer VI, you can observe whether errors are occurring or
not. In the example below, HUNC (Header error UNCorrectable) errors occur.
Fig. A-100 “Anomaly and Defect Analyzer” window

Example 2
Insertion of a HCOR at a repetition rate of 1E-6 with analysis of the DUT reaction.
Settings
Do not change the settings of the VIs Signal Structure and ATM Signal Structure. The VI
Anomaly and Defect Insertion must be reset.
Fig. A-101 “Anomaly and Defect Analyzer” window
1. In the “View” menu select the items “Anomalies” and “ATM”.

– or –
Click the appropriate icons on the toolbar.
2. Mark the item “HCOR” in the “ATM” field.
3. Select the item “continuous” in the “Insertion” field.
4. Set a “Rate” of 1E-6 in the selection field.
5. In the insertion menu, select the item “ON”.
– or –
Confirm by clicking the “ON” button on the toolbar.
– or –
Click on the “green traffic signal” icon in the Application Manager.
Analysis
You can observe the effect of the inserted error in the window of the Anomaly and Defect
Analyzer VI. There is a choice of four different windows to display the result.

Fig. A-102 Table display
Fig. A-103 Histogram display
Fig. A-104 Single-value display

Fig. A-105 Summary display

22 ATM latency test for ATM switches

BN 3035/90.70 only
Fig. A-106 Setup for ATM latency test (ATM switch)
If the above configuration is used, the more port modules that are included the loop, the greater
the delay. Measurements are made on ATM switches to determine whether there is a constant
increase in delay as the number of looped-in port modules are increased.
1. Set up an unidirectional connection with a constant bit rate through the switch for the reason
that you can set up a physical loop at the second port.
2. Check that the switch accepts the PCR of 14.98 Mbit/s (35523 cells per second).
3. Set the CBR contract, say, to a PCR of 15 Mbit/s.
VIs required
• ATM Traffic Analyzer

22.4 Measurement
Settings
Signal Structure VI
⇒ First of all, set the Signal Structure VI as described.
ATM Signal Structure VI

1. Open the ATM Signal Structure VI.
2. In the “Edit” menu select the item “ATM Structure...”.
– or –
3. In the “ATM SDU” field select the “Testcell” test channel structure. (“Tx => Rx”).
4. Activate the “Cell Transfer Delay” button in the “Performance Measurement” field.
5. In the “Channel” menu select “ATM Channel...”.
– or –
The “ATM Channel” dialog box opens.
Fig. A-108 “ATM Channel” dialog box of the “ATM Signal Structure” VI
6. In the “Channel” dialog box, enter your VPI/VCI parameters for the transmitter and receiver
and confirm with “OK”.
7. Transfer the send-side (Tx) settings in the “ATM Signal Structure” window to the receive side
(Rx), by clicking the “Tx=>Rx” button.
8. Using the slider, set a load of 10% or 14.98 MBit/s in the displayed signal structure.
9. Confirm your entries with “OK”.
The selected ATM signal structure is now activated.
10.Click on the “ON” button on the toolbar.
– The test channel is now connected and test cells are being sent.
– In the off-state, the transmitter outputs empty cells only.
ATM Traffic Analyzer VI

1. Open the ATM Traffic Analyzer VI.
2. In the “View” menu select “Cell Transfer Delay”.
– or –
Click on the “CTD” icon button on the toolbar.
The display changes to “Cell Transfer Delay”.

3. Set the measurement interval in the “Cell Transfer Delay Setup” dialog box.
4. Activate “Cell Transfer Delay...” in the “Settings” menu.
– or –
Click on the “SET” icon button.
.
Fig. A-109 “Cell Transfer Delay Setup” dialog box
Application Manager VI
⇒ Start the measurement:
Press function key F5.
– or –
Click the “green traffic signal” button in the Application Manager.
Explanation of the parameters “measurement interval”, “class width” etc.

A measurement interval is always divided into 128 classes. This means that, say, a
measurement interval of 1310 µs gives a time per class of 10 µs (1310 µs / 128 = 10.23 µs). The
number of test cells whose delay lies within a class is summed and displayed as a bar. If you
increase the class width, you automatically increase the measurement interval. As a result, you
also automatically reduce the resolution of the histogram.
Use Offset to obtain the smallest possible classes when the delays are large. Offset allows you
to shift your measurement range. But you have to estimate the expected range of your results.
Offset selection is not automatic.
Analysis
The results are displayed in the form of a histogram on the “ATM Traffic Analyzer” VI. There is
a bar for each class that contains at least one cell.
Fig. A-110 Result display in the “ATM Traffic Analyzer” window

Cursor read-off
⇒ Click the “CSR” icon on the toolbar.
The window shown below opens and displays the numerical value indicated by the cursor.
Fig. A-111 “Cell Transfer Delay Cursor Position” display window on the ATM Traffic Analyzer
The cell delay variation (CDV) can be determined in the “Cell Transfer Delay” display mode. The
peak-to-peak CDV can be derived from the histogram. The peak-to-peak CDV corresponds to
the 2-point cell delay variation to ITU-T I.356. The following results are provided by the CDV
evaluation mode:
• the minimum cell delay
• the maximum cell delay
• the mean cell delay
• the 2-point cell delay variation (2-point CDV)
Peak-to-peak-CDV
Fig. A-112 “Cell Delay Results” display window on the ATM Traffic Analyzer and
definition of the peak-to-peak CDV


(ATM Background Generator)
BN 3035/90.70 only
Fig. A-113 Setup for the ATM latency test (ATM switch) with background load
This test is performed to determine the extent to which the cell transit time through an ATM
switch goes up when the switch loading is increased by connection requests. The result from
the “ATM Latency Test for ATM switch” measurement is used as the reference. To perform this
measurement, you must first set up the switch configuration as shown above.
1. As shown above, set up two bidirectional connections with a constant bit rate via four port
modules in the ATM switch.
2. Check that the switch accepts the PCR of 149.76 Mbit/s (353209 cells per second), e.g. CBR
contract: PCR = 15 Mbit/s.
VIs required
• ATM Background Generator

23.4 Measurement
Example
Load test on an ATM switch
Settings
“Signal Structure” and “ATM Signal Structure” VIs

Do not change the settings of these two VIs.
“ATM Background Generator” VI

The ATM Background Generator is an independent cell generator which you can use to define
your own background traffic. The ATM traffic comprises one or more cell sequences.
1. Activate the “Background Generator” VI on the Application Manager.
2. Click on the “New” icon button in the “Sequence Control” field.
The “Sequence Editor-´NONAME´” window opens:
At this stage, you can enter settings for a sequence. You can influence the contents of the
header field of the ATM cells by doing so. Note that there are reserved values for VCI/VPI.
3. Enter the following parameters in the “Sequence” field:
– Number of cell repetitions
– Number of subsequent empty cells per sequence
– Number of sequence repetitions
You will now be asked to assign a name to the sequence (e.g. “test1”).
The name is displayed in the “Cell Sequence” list in the main window.
.
Fig. A-115 “Sequence Editor” dialog box in the “ATM Background Generator” window

Generating further sequences

For this measurement, you require a total of 9 sequences with different VCI/VPI values. In this
way, you create 9 different virtual channels.
1. Click on the “New” button.
2. Repeat the sequence generation procedure 1 to 4 on the previous page (see “Sequence
Editor”).
Defining and activating background traffic

Define the background traffic by inserting the generated sequences in the “Cell Sequence” list
into the “Transmit List” (see Fig. A-116).
1. Mark the first sequence to be inserted (e.g. “sequ_1”).
2. Click on the “Add >>” button.
The sequence is added to the Transmit List.
3. Insert the other sequences by repeating 1 and 2.
4. Activate the background traffic by clicking the “ON” button on the toolbar.
You will then be asked to store the settings. In response enter a name (e.g. “traffic1”).
Start measurement (“Application Manager” VI)

⇒ Press function key F5.
– or –
Click on the “green traffic signal” icon.
Fig. A-116 “ATM Background Generator” window
Analysis
⇒ Activate the window of the “ATM Traffic Analyzer” VI.
The measurement results are analyzed in the same way as the results of the previous reference
measurement (ATM latency test for ATM switches).
Select the item “Export...” in the “Print” menu to store the measurement results in CSV format
for further processing with EXCEL.

24 Sensor test - loss of cell delineation (LCD)

BN 3035/90.70 only
Fig. A-117 Setup for loss of cell delineation sensor tests
The purpose of this test is to demonstrate that the alarm and error sensors in an ATM switch are
operating properly (to ITU-T or ATM Forum). If there is an LCD alarm, the system has lost cell
stream synchronization. The synchronization and the monitoring of the cell stream is performed
by a state automat which is specified in ITU-T Recommendation I.432.
When a simple LCD alarm is inserted, the ANT-20 sends 7 consecutive cells with header errors.
In this case, the ATM switch should output an LCD alarm for the port. The insertion time can be
limited to 6 cells with header errors. In this case, the switch should synchronize.
1. Set up a unidirectional, permanent connection with constant bit rate through the switch.
2. Check that the PCR (Peak Cell Rate) is 10% of the channel capacity (in cells per second).

VIs required
• Signal Stucture
24.4 Measurement
Settings
“ATM Signal Structure” VI

1. Open the “ATM Signal Structure” window.
2. In the “Edit” menu, select the item “ATM Structure...”.
– or –
3. In the “ATM SDU” field, click on the “Testcell” button.
4. In the “Performance Measurement” field, click on “Error-Related Performance”.
5. Transfer the send-side settings to the receive side by clicking the “Tx => Rx” button.
7. Set a load of 10% in the display window (“CBR” icon).
Fig. A-119 “ATM Structure” dialog box in the “ATM Signal Structure” window
“Anomaly and Defect Insertion” VI

1. Open the “Anomaly and Defect Insertion” window.
2. Click on the “ATM” icon on the toolbar.
3. Click on the “Defects” icon on the toolbar.
4. In the “ATM” field, select the item “LCD”.
5. In the “Insertion” field, select the item “single”.
6. Check that there is a “7” in the “Duration” field.

Start measurement (“Application Manager” VI)

⇒ Press function key F5.
– or –
Fig. A-120 “Anomaly and Defect Insertion” window
Analysis: “Anomaly/Defect Analyzer” VI

The ATM switch should output an LCD alarm, send a VP-RDI alarm and a VC-RD alarm in the
opposite direction and resynchronize.
1. Open the window of the “Anomaly and Defect Analyzer” VI.
The “VP-RDI” and the “VC-RDI” alarms are clearly visible in the histogram display mode
(see Fig. A-121).
2. Open the “Anomaly and Defect Insertion” window and change the number “7” in the
“Duration” field to a “6”.
3. Restart the measurement.
If the switch is functioning properly, there should be no LCD alarm this time. The ATM switch
remains synchronized.
Fig. A-121 “Anomaly/Defect” Analyzer window

25 Measuring the CLR with a variable cell rate (VBR traffic)

BN 3035/90.70 only
Fig. A-122 Setup for cell loss ratio measurements
The Cell Loss Ratio (CLR) is a quality of service parameter. The CLR is the ratio of the number
of lost cells to the total cells sent.
1. Set up a unidirectional, permanent connection with a variable bit rate through the switch.
2. Configure the VBR contract for the connection.
VIs required

25.4 Measurement
Settings
1. Open the “ATM Signal Structure” window.
2. In the “Edit” menu, select the item “ATM Structure...”.
– or –
3. In the “ATM SDU” field, click the “Testcell” button.
4. In the “Performance Measurement” field, click on “Error-Related Performance”.
5. Transfer the send-side settings to the receive side by clicking the “Tx => Rx” button.
7. In the “Traffic” menu, select the item “VBR”.
8. In the “Traffic” menu, select the item “Set VBR...”.
The “VBR” dialog box opens.
Contract parameters:
PCR Peak Cell Rate
SCR Sustainable Cell Rate
MBS Maximum Burst Size
Fig. A-124 “VBR” dialog box in the “ATM Signal Structure” window
9. Set the following parameters in the “Settings” field:

– the Peak Cell Rate (PCR),
– the Mean Cell Rate (MCR),
– the burst length and
– the burst period.
10.Confirm your entries with ”OK”.
The mean cell rate that has been set is reflected in the ATM Signal Structure display.

⇒ Press the function key F5.
– or –
Overview of the parameters: PCR, MCR, burst length, etc.

You can use the following parameters to define the variable load on the test channel:
• the Peak Cell Rate (PCR),
• the Mean Cell Rate (MCR),
• the burst length and
• the burst period.
The next Figure clarifies the significance of the various parameters: All parameters are related.

⇒ First of all, set the Peak Cell Rate.

This cell rate equals the burst load.
The Mean Cell Rate is, therefore, directly dependent on the ratio of the burst length to the burst
period. If you want a mean cell rate which is 50% of the peak cell rate, the burst period must be
two times the burst length.
Fig. A-125 Definition of the burst period, burst length etc.
Analysis
1. Open the “Anomaly and Defect Analyzer” window.
2. In the “View” menu, select the item “Table”.
– or –
Click the appropriate icon on the toolbar.
The measurement results are displayed as a table.
If there are cell losses, you will find the precise CLR in this table.

Notes:

6
Contents
1 Recommendations/Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SA-1
1.1 ITU-T recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SA-1
1.2 ANSI standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SA-4
1.3 Bellcore standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SA-4
1.4 ETSI standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SA-5
1.5 ATM Forum recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SA-6
2 Alarm messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SA-9

2.1 SDH/SONET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SA-9
2.2 ATM Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SA-11
2.3 Virtual Concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SA-11
3 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SA-12
i
Notes:
ii
1 Recommendations/Standards
1.1 ITU-T recommendations
Recommendations Title
E.164 Numbering plan for the ISDN era
E.191 B-ISDN numbering and addressing
G.702 Digital hierarchy bit rates
G.703 Physical/electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces
G.704 Synchronous frame structures used at primary and secondary hierarchical levels
G.706 Frame alignment and cyclic redundancy check (CRC) procedures relating to
basic frame structures defined in recommendation G.704
G.707 Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
(replaces G.707, G.708 and G.709 version of 03/93)
G.742 Second order digital multiplex equipment operating at 8448 kbit/s and using
positive justification
G.751 Digital multiplex equipments operating at third order bit rate of 34368 kbit/s and
fourth order bit rate of 139264 bit/s and using positive justification
G.755 Digital multiplex equipment operating at 139264 kbit/s and multiplexing three
tributaries at 44736 kbit/s
G.772 Protected monitoring points provided on digital transmission systems
G.773 Protocol suites for Q interfaces for management of transmission systems
G.774 SDH information model for the network element view
G.774.01 SDH performance monitoring for the network element view
G.774.02 SDH configuration of the payload structure for the network element view
G.774.03 SDH management of multiplex section protection for the network element view
G.774.04 SDH management of sub network connection protection from the network
element view
G.774.05 SDH management of the connection supervision functionality (HCS/LCS) for the
network element view
G.774.06 SDH unidirectional performance monitoring for the network element view
G.774.07 SDH G.774 implementors guide
G.774.08 SDH management of radio-relay systems network element view
G.775 Loss of signal (LOS) and alarm indication signal (AIS) detection and clearance
criteria
G.780 Vocabulary of terms for SDH networks and equipment
Table SA-1 Overview of important ITU-T recommendations
Standards/Abbreviations SA-1
G.783 Characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) equipment functional

blocks (G.783 (April 97) replaces G.781, G.782 and G.783 version of 01/94)
G.784 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management
G.803 Architectures of transport networks based on the synchronous digital hierarchy

(SDH)
G.804 ATM cell mapping into plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH)
G.810 Definitions and terminology for synchronisation networks
G.811 Timing requirements at the output of primary reference clocks suitable for
plesiochronous operation of international digital links
G.812 Timing requirements at the output of slave clocks suitable for plesiochronous
operation of international digital links
G.813 Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC)
G.821 Error performance of an international digital connection operating below the

primary rate and forming a part of an ISDN
G.823 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the
2048 kbit/s hierarchy
G.824 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the
1544 kbit/s hierarchy
G.825 The control of jitter and wander in digital networks based on the SDH
G.826 Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit rate
digital paths at or above the primary rate
G.828 Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit rate
synchronous digital paths
G.829 Error performance events for SDH multiplex and regenerator section
G.831 Management capabilities of transport network based on the SDH
G.832 Transport of SDH elements on PDH networks
G.841 Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures
G.842 Interworking of SDH network protection architectures
G.911 Parameters and calculation methodologies for reliability of fibre optic systems
G.957 Optical interfaces for equipments and systems relating to the synchronous digital
hierarchy
G.958 Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for use on optical
fibre cables
I.356 B-ISDN ATM layer cell transfer performance
I.363 B-ISDN ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL) Specification
I.371 B-ISDN Traffic control and congestion
I.432 B-ISDN User-Network Interface Physical Layer Specification
I.610 B-ISDN Operation and Maintenance Principles and Functions
M.60 Maintenance terminology and definitions
Table SA-1 Overview of important ITU-T recommendations (continued)
SA-2 Standards/Abbreviations
M.2100 Performance limit for bringing into service and maintenance of international PDH
paths, sections and transmission systems
M.2101 Performance limit for bringing into service and maintenance of international SDH
paths and multiplex sections
M.2110 Bringing into service international digital paths, sections and transmission
systems
M.2120 Digital path, section and transmission fault detection and localization
M.3010 Principles of telecommunications management networks
M.3020 TMN interface specification methodology
M.3100 Generic network information model
M.3200 TMN management services: overview
M.3300 TMN management capabilities presented in the F interface
M.3400 TMN management functions
O.150 General requirements for instrumentation for performance measurements on

digital transmission equipment
O.151 Error performance measuring equipment operating at the primary rate and above
O.171 Timing jitter and wander measuring equipment for digital systems which are
based on the PDH
O.172 Jitter and Wander measuring equipment for digital systems which are based on
the SDH
O.181 Equipment to assess error performance on STM-N SDH interfaces
O.191 Equipment to assess ATM layer cell transfer performance
Q.2010 B-ISDN Overview Signalling Capability Set 1, Release 1
Q.2100 B-ISDN Signalling ATM Adaption Layer (SAAL) Overview Description
Q.2110 B-ISDN ATM Adaptation Layer - Service Specific Connection Oriented Protocol
(SSCOP)
Q.2130 B-ISDN Signalling ATM Adaptation Layer - Service Specific Coordination

Function for Support of Signalling at the User Network Interface (SSCF at UNI)
Q.2931 B-ISDN - Digital Subscriber Signalling No. 2 (DSS 2) - User Network Interface
Layer 3 Specification for Basic Call / Connection Control
Q.2932.1 B-ISDN - Digital Subscriber Signalling System No. 2 (DSS 2) - Generic

Functional Protocol - Core Functions
Q.2961 B-ISDN - Digital Subscriber Signalling System No. 2 (DSS 2) - Additional Traffic
Parameters
V.11 Electrical characteristics for balanced double-current interchange circuits for

general use with integrated circuit equipment in the field of data communications
X.21 Interface between data terminal equipment (DTE) and data circuit-terminating
equipment (DCE) for synchronous operation on public networks
Table SA-1 Overview of important ITU-T recommendations (continued)
1.2 ANSI standards
Standard Title
T1.101-1994 Synchronization interface standards for the digital networks
T1.102-1993 Digital hierarchy - electrical interfaces
T1.102.01-1996 Digital hierarchy - VT 1.5 electrical interface
T1.105-1995 SONET - basic description including multiplex structure, rates and formats
T1.105.01-1995 SONET - automatic protection
T1.105.02-1995 SONET - payload mappings
T1.105.03-1994 SONET - jitter at network interfaces
T1.105.04-1995 SONET - data communication channel (DCC) protocol and architectures
T1.105.05-1994 SONET - tandem connection maintenance
T1.105.06-1996 SONET - physical layer specifications
T1.105.07-1996 SONET - sub STS-1 interface rates and formats specifications
T1.105.09-1996 SONET - network element timing and synchronisation
T1.106-1988 Digital hierarchy - optical interface specification (replaced by T1.105.06)
T1.107-1995 Digital hierarchy - formats specification (PDH)
T1.119-1994 SONET - operations administrations, maintenance and provisioning (OAM&P)

communications
T1.119.01-1995 SONET - OAM&P communications protection switching fragment
T1.204-1993 OAM&P - lower layer protocol for interfaces between operation systems and
network elements
T1.208-1993 OAM&P - upper layer protocol for interfaces between operation systems and
network elements
T1.210-1993 OAM&P - principles of functions, architectures and protocols for TMN interfaces
T1.231-1993 Digital hierarchy - Layer 1 in-service digital transmission performance monitoring
Table SA-2 Overview of important ANSI standards
1.3 Bellcore standards
Standard Title
GR-253-CORE SONET Transport System: Common Generic Criteria
GR-499-CORE Transport Systems Generic Requirements (TSGR): Common Requirements
Table SA-3 Overview of important Bellcore standards
1.4 ETSI standards
Standard Title
ETS 300 147 R3 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH); Multiplexing structure (based on ITU-T
Recommendation G.707)
ETS 300 166 Physical and electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces for
equipment using the 2048 kbit/s-based plesiochronous or synchronous digital
hierarchies (based on ITU-T Recommendation G.703)
ETS 300 167 Functional characteristics of 2 048 Mbit/s interfaces (based on ITU-T
Recommendations G.704 and G.706)
ETS 300 417-1-1 Generic requirements of transport functionality of equipment - Part 1-1: Generic
processes and performances
ETS 300 417-2-1 Generic requirements of transport functionality of equipment - Part 2-1: SDH and
PDH physical section layer functions
ETS 300 417-3-1 Generic requirements of transport functionality of equipment - Part 3-1: STM-N
regenerator and multiplex section layer functions
ETS 300 417-4-1 Generic requirements of transport functionality of equipment - Part 4-1: SDH path
layer functions
ETS 300 417-5-1 Generic requirements of transport functionality of equipment - Part 5-1: PDH path
layer functions
ETS 300 417-6-1 Generic requirements of transport functionality of equipment - Part 6-1:
Synchronization layer functions
ETS 300 462-1 Generic requirements for synchronization networks - Part 1: Definitions and
terminology for synchronization networks
ETS 300 462-2 Generic requirement for synchronization networks - Part 2: Synchronization
network architecture
ETS 300 462-3 Generic requirement for synchronization networks - Part 3: The control of jitter and
wander within synchronization networks
ETS 300 462-4 Generic requirements for synchronization networks; Part 4: Timing characteristics
of slave clocks suitable for synchronization supply to SDH and PDH equipment
of slave clocks suitable for operation in synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
equipment
of primary reference clocks
Table SA-4 Overview of important ETSI standards
1.5 ATM Forum recommendations
Approved Items as of May 1997

Below is a listing of all specifications completed and approved by the ATM Forum since its
inception in 1991.
These documents may be found on the ftp server in several different formats. The document
numbers listed here link to the .pdf version of the document where available.
Technical Working Approved Specifications Specification Approved

Group Date
B-ICI B-ICI 1.0 af-bici-0013.000 Sep, 1993
B-ICI 1.1 af-bici-0013.001 -
B-ICI 2.0 (delta spec to B-ICI 1.1) af-bici-0013.002 Dec, 1995
B-ICI 2.0 (integrated specification) af-bici-0013.003 Dec, 1995 B-
B-ICI 2.0 Addendum or 2.1 af-bici-0068.000 Nov, 1996
Data Exchange Data Exchange Interface version 1.0 af-dxi-0014.000 Aug, 1993
Interface
ILMI (Integrated ILMI 4.0 af-ilmi-0065.000 Sep, 1996

Layer Mgmt.
Interface)
LAN Emulation LAN Emulation over ATM 1.0 af-lane-0021.000 Jan, 1995
LAN Emulation Client Management af-lane-0038.000 Sep, 1995

Specification
LANE 1.0 Addendum af-lane-0050.000 Dec, 1995
LANE Servers Management Spec v1.0 af-lane-0057.000 Mar, 1996
Network Customer Network Management (CNM) for af-nm-0019.000 Oct, 1994

Management ATM Public Network Service
M4 Interface Requirements and Logical MIB af-nm-0020.000 Oct, 1994
CMIP Specification for the M4 Interface af-nm-0027.000 Sep, 1995
M4 Public Network view af-nm-0058.000 Mar, 1996
M4 "NE View" af-nm-0071.000 Jan, 1997
Circuit Emulation Service Interworking af-nm-0072.000 Jan, 1997

Requirements, Logical and CMIP MIB
M4 Network View CMIP MIB Spec v1.0 af-nm-0073.000 Jan, 1997
M4 Network View Requirements & Logical af-nm-0074.000 Jan, 1997

MIB Addendum
Physical Layer Issued as part of UNI 3.1: af-uni-0010.002 -

44.736 DS3 Mbps Physical Layer
100 Mbps Multimode Fiber Interface
Physical Layer
155.52 Mbps SONET STS-3c
Physical Layer 155.52 Mbps Physical Layer
Table SA-5 Overview of important ATM forum recommendations

Group Date
Physical Layer ATM Physical Medium Dependent Interface af-phy-0015.000 Sep, 1994
Specification for 155 Mb/s over Twisted Pair
Cable
Utopia af-phy-0017.000 Mar, 1994
Mid-range Physical Layer Specification for af-phy-0018.000 Sep, 1994

Category 3 UTP
6.312 Kbps UNI Specification af-phy-0029.000 June, 1995
Utopia Level 2 af-phy-0039.000 June, 1995
Physical Interface Specification for 25.6 Mb/ af-phy-0040.000 Nov, 1995

s over Twisted Pair
A Cell-based Transmission Convergence af-phy-0043.000 Jan, 1996

Sublayer for Clear Channel Interfaces
622.08 Mbps Physical Layer af-phy-0046.000 Jan, 1996
155.52 Mbps Physical Layer Specification af-phy-0047.000 -

for Category 3 UTP (See also UNI 3.1, af-
uni-0010.002)
120 Ohm Addendum to ATM PMD Interface af-phy-0053.000 Jan, 1996

Spec for 155 Mbps over TP
155 Mbps over MMF Short Wave Length af-phy-0062.000 July, 1996
Lasers, Addendum to UNI 3.1
WIRE (PMD to TC layers) af-phy-0063.000 July, 1996
P-NNI Interim Inter-Switch Signaling Protocol af-pnni-0026.000 Dec, 1994
P-NNI V1.0 af-pnni-0055.000 Mar, 1996
PNNI 1.0 Addendum (soft PVC MIB) af-pnni-0066.000 Sep, 1996
PNNI ABR Addendum af-pnni-0075.000 Jan, 1997
Service Aspects and Frame UNI af-saa-0031.000 Sep, 1995

Applications
Native ATM Services: Semantic Description af-saa-0048.000 Feb, 1996
Audio/Visual Multimedia Services: Video on af-saa-0049.000 Jan, 1996

Demand v1.0
Audio/Visual Multimedia Services: Video on af-saa-0049.001 Mar, 1997

Demand v1.1
ATM Names Service af-saa-0069.000 Nov, 1996
Signaling (See UNI 3.1, af-uni-0010.002)
UNI Signaling 4.0 af-sig-0061.000 July, 1996
Signaling ABR Addendum af-sig-0076.000 Jan, 1997
Testing Introduction to ATM Forum Test af-test-0022.000 Dec, 1994

Specifications
PICS Proforma for the DS3 Physical Layer af-test-0023.000 Sep, 1994
Interface
PICS Proforma for the SONET STS-3c af-test-0024.000 Sep, 1994

Physical Layer Interface
Table SA-5 Overview of important ATM forum recommendations (continued)

Group Date
Testing PICS Proforma for the 100 Mbps Multimode af-test-0025.000 Sep, 1994
Fibre Physical Layer Interface
PICS Proforma for the ATM Layer (UNI 3.0) af-test-0028.000 Apr, 1995
Conformance Abstract Test Suite for the af-test-0030.000 Sep, 1995

ATM Layer for Intermediate Systems
(UNI 3.0)
Interoperability Test Suite for the ATM Layer af-test-0035.000 Apr, 1995
(UNI 3.0)
Interoperability Test Suites for Physical af-test-0036.000 Apr, 1995

Layer: DS-3, STS-3c, 100 Mbps MMF (TAXI)
PICS Proforma for the DS1 Physical Layer af-test-0037.000 Apr, 1995
Conformance Abstract Test Suite for the af-test-0041.000 Jan, 1996

ATM Layer (End Systems) UNI 3.0
PICS for AAL5 (ITU spec) af-test-0042.000 Jan, 1996
PICS Proforma for the 51.84 Mbps Mid- af-test-0044.000 Jan, 1996
Range PHY Layer Interface
Conformance Abstract Test Suite for the af-test-0045.000 Jan, 1996

ATM Layer of Intermediate Systems (UNI
3.1)
PICS for the 25.6 Mbps over Twisted Pair af-test-0051.000 Mar, 1996
Cable (UTP-3) Physical Layer
PICS for ATM Layer (UNI 3.1) af-test-0059.000 July, 1996
Conformance Abstract Test Suite for the UNI af-test-0060.000 June, 1996
3.1 ATM Layer of End Systems
Conformance Abstract Test Suite for the af-test-0067.000 Sep, 1996

SSCOP Sub-layer (UNI 3.1)
PICS for the 155 Mbps over Twisted Pair af-test-0070.000 Nov, 1996
Cable (UTP-5/STP-5) Physical Layer
Traffic Management (See UNI 3.1, af-uni-0010.002)
Traffic Management 4.0 af-tm-0056.000 Apr, 1996
Traffic Management ABR Addendum af-tm-0077.000 Jan, 1997
User-Network ATM User-Network Interface Specification af-uni-0010.000 June, 1992

Interface (UNI) V2.0
ILMI MIB for UNI 3.0 af-uni-0011.000 -
ILMI MIB for UNI 3.1 af-uni-0011.001 -
Table SA-5 Overview of important ATM forum recommendations (continued)
Recommendation Title
UNI 3.1 ATM User-Network Interface Specification 3.1, 4.0
CES V2.0 Circuit Emulation Services V2.0 Baseline
Table SA-6 Overview of important ATM forum recommendations (obsolete)
2 Alarm messages
2.1 SDH/SONET
Abbreviation Old Meaning Abbreviation Old Meaning

SDH Expression SONET Expression
ITU-T G.707 (new), G.783 ANSI T1.105, BELLCORE GR-253
LOS NO-SIG Loss of Signal LOS - Loss of Signal
TSE BER Test Sequence TSE - Test Sequence

Error (Bit error) Error (Bit error)
LSS NO-PATT Loss of Sequence LSS - Loss of Sequence

Synchronization Synchronization
LTI NO-CLOCK Loss of incoming LTI - Loss of incoming

Timing Intervals Timing Intervals
Regenerator Section Section
OOF - Out Of Frame OOF - Out Of Frame
LOF - Loss Of Frame LOF - Loss Of Frame
B1 (8 bits) - Regenerator B1 (8 bits) - Section error

section error monitoring
monitoring
Multiplex Section Line (L)
B2 - Multiplex section B2 - Line error

(n x 24 bits) error monitoring (n x 8 bits) monitoring
MS-AIS S-AIS Multiplex Section AIS-L - Line AIS

AIS
MS-RDI MS-FERF Multiplex Section RDI-L LINE FERF Line Remote Defect
Remote Defect Indication
Indication
MS-REI - Multiplex Section REI-L LINE FEBE Line Remote Error
Remote Error Indication
Indication
Administrative Unit STS Path (SP)
AU-LOP - Loss Of AU Pointer LOP-P - SP Loss of Pointer
AU-NDF - AU Pointer NDF-P - SP New Data Flag

New Data Flag
AU-AIS P-AIS AU AIS AIS-P - SP AIS
AU-PJE - AU Pointer -
Justification Event
HO Path -
B3 (8 bits) - HO Path error B3 (8 bits) - SP error monitoring

monitoring (VC-3/4)
HP-UNEQ - HO Path UNEQ-P - SP UNEQuipped

UNEQuipped
Table SA-7 Alarm messages SDH/SONET

HP-RDI HP-FERF HO Path Remote RDI-P STS Path SP Remote Defect

Defect Indication YELLOW Indication
HPRDIEP - HO Path RDI RDIEPP - SP RDI Payload

Payload Defect Defect
HPRDIES - HO Path RDI RDIEPS - SP RDI Server

Server Defect Defect
HPRDIEC - HO Path RDI RDIEPC - SP RDI

Connectivity Defect Connectivity Defect
HP-REI HP-FEBE HO Path Remote REI-P STS Path SP Remote Error

Error Indication FEBE Indication
- PDI-P - SP Payload Defect

Indication
HP-TIM - HO Path Trace TIM-P - SP Trace Identifier

Identifier Mismatch Mismatch
HP-PLM HP-SLM HO Path Payload PLM-P - SP Path Label

Label Mismatch Mismatch
Tributary Unit VT Path (VP)
TU-LOP - Loss of TU Pointer LOP-V - VP Loss of Pointer
TU-NDF - TU pointer New NDF-V - VP New Data Flag

Data Flag
TU-AIS - TU AIS AIS-V - VP AIS
TU-LOM - Loss Of Multiframe LOM - Loss of Multiframe

(H4)
LO Path -
BIP-2 - LO Path error BIP-V - VP error monitoring

monitoring
(VC-11/12)
B3 ( 8 bits) - LO Path error -
monitoring (VC-3)
LP-UNEQ - LO Path UNEQ-V VT Uneq. VP UNEQuipped

UNEQuipped
LP-RDI LP-FERF LO Path Remote RDI-V VT Path VP Remote Defect

Defect Indication YELLOW Indication
LPRDIEP - LO Path RDI RDIEVP - VP RDI Payload

Payload Defect Defect
LPRDIES - LO Path RDI Server RDIEVS - VP RDI Server

Defect Defect
LPRDIEC - LO Path RDI RDIEVC - VP RDI

Connectivity Defect Connectivity Defect
LP-REI LP-FEBE LO Path Remote REI-V VT Path VP Remote Error

Error Indication FEBE Indication
Table SA-7 Alarm messages SDH/SONET (continued)

LP-RFI - LO Path Remote RFI-V - VP Remote Failure

Failure Indication Indication
- PDI-V - VP Payload Defect

Indication
LP-TIM - LO Path Trace TIM-V - VP Trace Identifier

Identifier Mismatch Mismatch
LP-PLM LP-SLM LO Path Payload PLM-V - VP Path Label

Mismatch Mismatch
Table SA-7 Alarm messages SDH/SONET (continued)
2.2 ATM Path
Abbreviation Meaning ITU-T Rec.
AAL-1 OOS AAL-1 Out Of Sync I.363
LCD Loss of Cell Delineation (Cell Synchronization) I.610
OCLR Overflow Cell Loss Ratio Measurement -
OCMR Overflow Cell Misinsertion -
OCR Overflow Cell Rate -
VP-AIS Virtual Path Alarm Indication Signal I.610
VP-RDI Virtual Path Remote Defect Indication I.610
VC-AIS Virtual Channel Alarm Indication Signal I.610
VC-RDI Virtual Channel Remote Defect Indication I.610
Vx-AIS Virtual Channel AIS and Virtual Path AIS simultaneously -
Vx-RDI Virtual Channel RDI and Virtual Path RDI simultaneously -
Table SA-8 Alarm messages ATM Path
2.3 Virtual Concatenation
Abbreviation Meaning ITU-T Rec.
DPOVC Delta Pointer Overflow Virtual Concatenation -
Table SA-9 Alarm message Virtual Concatenation
3 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Meaning
A1 SOH Framing Byte 11110110
TOH Framing Byte 11110110
Framing Byte 11110110 (PLCP)
A2 SOH Framing Byte 00101000
TOH Framing Byte 00101000
Framing Byte 00101000 (PLCP)
AAL ATM Adaptation Layer
AAL-1 CRC AAL1 CRC error
AAL-1 OOS AAL1 Out Of Sync
AAL-1 PE AAL1 Parity Error
ADEV Allan Deviation
ADM Add Drop Multiplexer
AFI Authority and Format Identifier
AGE Aging
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
AIS-L Alarm Indication Signal - Line
AIS-P Alarm Indication Signal - Path
AIS-V Alarm Indication Signal - VT
AMI Alternated Mark Inversion
APS Automatic Protection Switching (K1, K2)
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
AU Administrative Unit
AU-AIS AU Alarm Indication Signal
AU-LOP AU Loss of Pointer
AU-n Administrative Unit, Level n = 3; 4
AUG Administrative Unit Group
AvBW Average Bandwidth
Table SA-10 Standard abbreviations used in this manual
B1 Parity Word BIP-8 for Regenerator Section (RSOH)
Parity Word BIP-8 for Section
Path Error Monitoring (BIP-8) Byte (PLCP)
B2 Parity Word BIP-Nx8 for Line
Parity Word BIP-Nx24 for Multiplex Section (MSOH)
B3 Parity Word BIP-8 for VC-3, 4 Path (POH)
Parity Word BIP-8 for Path Overhead (POH)
B3ZS Bipolar with three-zero substitution
B8ZS Bipolar with eight-zero substitution
BBE Background Block Error
BBER Background Block Error Ratio
BER Bit Error Ratio
BIP-2 Parity Word BIP-8 for VC-1, 2 Path (POH)
BIP-n Bit Interleaved Parity n Bit
BIP-V Parity Word BIP-8 for Tributary POH
BIS[P]O Bringing into service [performance] objectives
BPV Bipolar Violation
BT Burst Tolerance
BW Bandwidth
C-n Container, n = 1 to 4 (STM-16 n = 1 to 16)
C1 STM-N Identifier
Cycle Stuff Counter (PCLP)
C2 Signal Label (VC-3, 4 POH)
Signal Label
CAS Channel Associated Signaling
CBR Constant Bit Rate
CDV Cell Delay Variation
CDVT Cell Delay Variation Tolerance
CER Cell Error Ratio
CI Concatenation Indication
Congestion Indicator
CI-BW Congestion Indicator Bandwidth
CK Clock
Table SA-10 Standard abbreviations used in this manual (continued)
CLP Cell Loss Priority
CLP1-BW Cell Loss Priority 1 Bandwidth
CLR Cell Loss Ratio
CMI Coded Mark Inversion (Signal code)
CMR Cell Misinsertion Rate
CPS Cells per Second
CRC-N Cyclic Redundancy Check, width N
CTD Cell Transfer Delay
CuBW Current Bandwidth
D Pointer: Decrement Bit
D1 to D3 (RSOH) 196 kbit/s DCC for Regenerator Section
D4 to D12 (MSOH) 576 kbit/s DCC for Multiplex Section
DBR Deterministic Bit Rate
DC Dropped Cells
DCC Data Communication Channel
Data Country code (ATM)
DCN Data Communication Network
DPOVC Delta Pointer Overflow Virtual Concatenation
DS1 Electrical Interface Signal 1544 kbit/s
DS3 Electrical Interface Signal 44736 kbit/s
DUT Device Under Test
DXC Digital Cross Connect System
E1 Electrical Interface Signal 2048 kbit/s
(RSOH) Orderwire Channel (voice) for Regenerator Section
(TOH) Orderwire Channel (voice)
(MSOH) Orderwire Channel (voice) for Multiplex Section
(TOH) Orderwire Channel (voice)
EBC Errored Block Count
ECC Embedded Communication Channel
EDC Error Detection Code
EEPO End to End Performance Objectives
EF Equipment Failure
EFS Error Free Second
EM Error Monitoring Byte (BIP-8) (G.832)
ES Errored Second (G.826)
ESF Extended Super Frame (DS1)
ESI End System Identifier
ESR Errored Second Ratio (G.826)
f Frequency
F1 (RSOH) User Channel e.g. for maintenance purposes
(TOH) User Channel e.g. for maintenance purposes
F2, F3 (POH) Path User Channels
F4 OAM flow ATM Path
F5 OAM flow ATM Channel
FA1 Framing byte 11110110 (G.832)
FA2 Framing byte 00101000 (G.832)
FAS Frame Alignment Signal
FE Frame Error
FEAC Far End Alarm and Control Signal
FEBE Far End Block Error
FMTJ Fast Maximum Tolerable Jitter
G1 (POH) Path Status
PLCP Path Status (PLCP)
GC General Purpose Communication Channel (G.832)
GCRA Generic Cell Rate Algorithm
GFC Generic Flow Control
H1 Pointer Byte 1: Bit No. 1 to 4: New Data Flag (01101001),

Bit No. 5 and 6: ss bits, Bit No. 7 and 8: Pointer value
(MSB bits)
H2 Pointer Byte 2: Pointer value (LSB bits)
H3 Pointer Byte 3: Negative Justification Opportunity
H4 (POH) Position Indicator e.g. for quadframe
HBER High Bit Error Ratio
HCOR Correctable Header Error
HDB3 High Density Bipolar of order 3
HEC Header Error Check (ATM)
HO-DSP High Order Domain Specific Part
HP Higher Order Path
High-pass Filter (Jitter VI)
HPRDIEC Higher Order Path RDI Connectivity Defect
HPRDIEP Higher Order Path RDI Payload Defect
HPRDIES Higher Order Path RDI Server Defect
HUNC Uncorrectable Header Error
I Pointer: Increment Bit
ICD International Code Designator
IDI Initial Domain Identifier
IEC Incoming Error Count
IDLE Idle Cells
INC Increment
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
ISM In Service Measurement
J0 Regenerator Section Trace (RSOH)
Section Trace (TOH)
J1 Path Trace (POH in VC-3, 4)
STS-Path Trace (POH)
J2 Path Trace (POH in VC-1, 2)
VT-Path Trace (POH)
JTF Jitter Transfer Function
K1, K2 Automatic Protection Switching (APS) signalling channel

(MSOH)
Automatic Protection Switching (APS) signalling channel

(TOH)
K3, K4 Automatic Protection Switching (APS) signalling channel

(POH)
LCD Loss of Cell Delineation
LOF Loss of Frame
LOM Loss Of Multiframe
LOP Loss Of Pointer
LOP-P Loss Of Pointer - Path
LOP-V Loss Of Pointer - VT
LOS Loss Of Signal
LP Lower Order Path
Low-pass Filter (Jitter VI)
LPAC Loss of Performance Access Capability
LPRDIEC Lower Order Path RDI Connectivity Defect
LPRDIEP Lower Order Path RDI Payload Defect
LPRDIES Lower Order Path RDI Server Defect
LSS Loss of Sequence Synchronisation (Pattern Loss)
LTC Loss of Test Channel
for Tandem Connection: Loss of Tandem Connection
LTI Loss of all Incoming Timing references
M1 MS-REI byte (MSOH)
MS-REI byte (TOH)
MA Maintenance Adaption byte (G.832)
MBS Maximum Burst Size
MDEV Modified Allan Deviation
MFE Multiframe Error
MS Multiplexer Section
MS-AIS Multiplexer Section AIS
MSB Most Significant Bit
MSOH Multiplexer Section Overhead
MTBF Mean Time Between Failures
MTIE Maximum Time Interval Error
MTJ Maximum Tolerable Jitter
MUX Multiplexer
N1, 2 Network operator bytes (POH) for Tandem Connection

Monitoring (TCM)
NCC Non-Conforming Cells
NCS Not Connected Seconds
NDF New Data Flag
NE Network Element
NNI Network Node Interface
NPI Null Pointer Indication
NR Network Operator Channel (G.832)
NRZ Non-Return to Zero
NSA Non-service Affecting Failure
NSAP Network Service Access Point
NU National Use
OAM Operation, Administration and Management
OC-N Optical Carrier, N = 1; 3; 12; 48
OCLR Overflow of Cell Loss Ratio
OCMR Overflow of Cell Misinsertion Rate
OCR Overflow Cell Rate
OH Overhead
OOF Out Of Frame
OOS Out of Service Measurement
P1, P2 Automatic Protection Switching (G.832)
PCR Peak Cell Rate
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PDI Payload Defect Indication
PJE Pointer Justification Event
PLCP Physical Layer Convergence Protocol
PLL Phase Locked Loop
PLM Payload Mismatch
PLM-P Payload Mismatch - Path
PLM-V Payload Mismatch - VT
PMP Protected Monitoring Point
POH Path Overhead
POI Path Overhead Identifier (PLCP)
PRBS Pseudo Random Binary Sequence
PT Payload Type
PTR Pointer
PVC Permanent Virtual Channel
QOS Quality Of Service
RAI Remote Alarm Indication
RDI Remote Defect Indication
RDIEPC STS Path RDI Connectivity Defect
RDIEPP STS Path RDI Server Defect
RDIEPS STS Path RDI Payload Defect
RDIEVC VT Path RDI Connectivity Defect
RDIEVP VT Path RDI Server Defect
RDIEVS VT Path RDI Payload Defect
RDI-L Remote Defect Indication - Line
RDI-P Remote Defect Indication - Path
RDI-V Remote Defect Indication - VT
REI Remote Error Indication
RFI Remote Failure Indication
RS Regenerator Section
RSOH Regenerator Section Overhead
RX Receiver
S1 Synchronization Status Byte (MSOH)
Synchronization Status Byte (TOH)
SA Service Affecting Failure
SAAL Signaling ATM Adaptation Layer
SBR Statistical Bit Rate
SBW Signaling Bandwidth
SCR Sustainable Cell Rate
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SECB Severely Errored Cell Block
SEL Selector
SEP Severely Errored Period
SES Severely Errored Second
SESR Severely Errored Second Ratio
SF Super Frame (DS1)
SIG Signaling
SLX Synchronous Line System
SOH Section Overhead
SONET Synchronous Optical Network
SPE Synchronous Payload Envelope
SSCOP Service Specific Convergence Protocol
STM Synchronous Transfer Module
STM-N Synchronous Transport Module, level N = 0, 1, 4, 16, 64
STS Synchronous Transport Signal
STS-N Synchronous Transport Signal, level N = 1, 3, 12, 48, 192
SVC Switched Virtual Channel
TC Tandem Connection
TC-APId TC Access Point Identifier (Trace Identifier)
TC-IEC TC Incoming Error Count
TCM Tandem Connection Monitoring
TC-ODI TC Outgoing Defect Indication
TC-OEI TC Outgoing Error Indication
TC-REI TC Remote Error Indication
TC-RDI TC Remote Defect Indication
TC-UNEQ TC unequipped
TDEV Time Deviation
TI Trace Identifier
TIE Time Interval Error
TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch
TMN Telecommunications Management Network
TOH Transport Overhead
TR Trail trace (G.832)
TS Timeslot
TSE Test Sequence Error (bit errors)
TU Tributary Unit
TU-m Tributary Unit, level m = 1 to 3
TUG-m Tributary Unit Group, level m = 1, 2
TX Transmitter
UAS Unavailable Second
UBR Unspecified Bit Rate
UBW User Traffic Bandwidth
UNAS Unassigned Cell
UNEQ Unequipped
UNEQ-P Unequipped - Path
UNEQ-V Unequipped - VT
UNI User Network Interface
UI Unit Interval
V5 POH byte (VC-1, 2)
VBR Variable Bit Rate
VBR-nRT Variable Bit Rate - non Real Time
VBR-RT Variable Bit Rage - Real Time
VC Virtual Container (SDH)
Virtual Channel (ATM)
VC-AIS Virtual Channel Alarm Indication
VC-n Virtual Container, level n = 1, 2, 3, 4
VC-n-Xc Concatenated Virtual Container, level n, X concatenated VCs
VC-RDI Virtual Channel Remote Defect Indication
VCI Virtual Channel Identifier
VI Virtual Instrument
VP Virtual Path
VP-AIS Virtual Path Alarm Indication
VP-RDI Virtual Path Remote Defect Indication
VPI Virtual Path Identifier
VT Virtual Tributary
WTR Wait to Restore
Z0 Spare byte (RSOH)
Z6 Network operator byte (POB) for Tandem Connection

Monitoring (TCM)
Notes:
7
Contents
1 Multiplexing structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TB-1

1.1 SONET Multiplexing Structure ANSI T1.105-1995 . . . . . . . TB-1
1.2 SDH Multiplexing Structure ITU-T G.707 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-1
2 Pointer action generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TB-2

2.1 Periodic pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-2
2.1.1 Identical polarity: “INC” or “DEC”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-2
2.1.2 Different polarity: “INC / DEC” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-2
2.1.3 Double pointer: “Add (INC, DEC)” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-2
2.1.4 Messing pointer: “Cancel (INC, DEC)” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-3
2.2 Pointer burst with missing pointers:
“INC” or “DEC” with “Cancel (INC, DEC)” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-3
2.3 Standard sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-3
2.3.1 ”87-3” sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-3
2.3.2 “43-44” sequence with double pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-4
2.4 ”86-4” sequence with missing pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-4
2.5 Setting a new pointer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-4
2.6 Pointer sequences parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-5
3 Performance Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TB-6

3.1 ANSI/BELL evaluation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-6
3.1.1 ANSI/BELL results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-6
3.1.2 ANSI/BELL parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-7
3.1.3 Measurement point
(SONET Performance Monitoring, PM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-7
3.1.3.1 Section (B1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-7
3.1.3.2 Line (B2SUM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-8
3.1.3.3 STS-Path (B3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-8
3.1.3.4 VT-Path (BIP-V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-9
3.1.3.5 BPV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-10
3.1.3.6 DS3 Frame, DS3 P-Parity or DS 3 C-Parity (yellow). . . . . TB-10
3.1.3.7 DS1 Frame or DS1 CRC-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-10
3.1.3.8 TSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-11
i
3.2 ITU-T G.821 evaluation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-12

3.2.1 G.821 results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-12
3.2.2 G.821 parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-13
3.3.1 G.826 results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-14
3.3.3 G.826 measurement points and anomalies evaluated . . . TB-16
3.3.4 G.826/G.828/M.2101 blocklengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-17
3.3.4.1 G.826 ISM/G.828/M.2101 (RSOH, MSOH, HP, LP) . . . . . TB-17
3.3.4.2 G.826 OOS/G.828 (TSE)/G.829 (TSE)/
M.2100 (TSE)/M.2101 (TSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-18
3.4.1 G.828 results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-19
3.5.1 G.829 results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-21
3.5.2 G.829 Multiplex section: blocks per second . . . . . . . . . . . TB-21
3.6 ITU-T M.2100 evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-23
3.6.1 M.2100 results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-23
3.6.2 M.2100 parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-24
3.6.2.1 End-to-end error reference performance objectives
(EERPO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-25
3.6.2.2 BIS[P]O, S1 and S2:
Threshold definition and computing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-25
3.7 ITU-T M.2101 evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-26
3.7.1 M.2101 results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-26
3.7.2 M.2101 parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-27
3.7.2.1 End-to-end performance objectives (EEPO) for
M.2101.1 (4/1997). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-29
3.7.2.2 End-to-end performance objectives (EEPO) for
M.2101 (6/2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-29
3.7.2.3 BIS[P]O, S1 und S2: Threshold definition and
computing for M.2101.1 (4/1997) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-30
3.7.2.4 BIS[P]O, S1 und S2: Threshold definition and
computing for M.2101 (6/2000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-31
3.7.2.5 SES thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB-34
ii
1 Multiplexing structures
1.1 SONET Multiplexing Structure ANSI T1.105-1995
Fig. TB-1 SONET Multiplexing Structure ANSI T1.105-1995
1.2 SDH Multiplexing Structure ITU-T G.707
Fig. TB-2 SDH Multiplexing Structure ITU-T G.707
Technical Background TB-1

2 Pointer action generation

VIs: “Pointer Generator” and “Pointer Analyzer” (Physical layer instruments)
2.1 Periodic pointers
2.1.1 Identical polarity: “INC” or “DEC”
T4
Fig. TB-3 Perodic pointers with identical polarity
2.1.2 Different polarity: “INC / DEC”
T4
T1 T1
n pointer
T2
Fig. TB-4 Perodic (single/multiple) pointers with different polarity
2.1.3 Double pointer: “Add (INC, DEC)”
✓ Condition: T4 = n x T2
T4
T3 T2
Fig. TB-5 Perodic pointers with different polarity, e.g. T4 = 5 x T2
TB-2 Technical Background

2.1.4 Messing pointer: “Cancel (INC, DEC)”
✓ Condition: T4 = n x T2
T5 T4
T2
Fig. TB-6 Periodic pointers with one missing pointer, e.g. T4 = 5 x T2
2.2 Pointer burst with missing pointers:

“INC” or “DEC” with “Cancel (INC, DEC)”
✓ Condition: T4 >> nxT2
T4
T5 T5
n pointer
T2
Fig. TB-7 Pointer burst with missing pointers
2.3 Standard sequence
2.3.1 ”87-3” sequence
T4
87 pointer actions
T2 3 x no pointer action
Fig. TB-8 ”87-3” sequence

2.3.2 “43-44” sequence with double pointer
T4
43 pointer actions 44 pointer action
T2 T3 3 x no pointer action
Fig. TB-9 ”43-44” sequence with double pointer
2.4 ”86-4” sequence with missing pointer
T4
86 pointer actions
T2 4 x no pointer action
Fig. TB-10 ”86-4” sequence with missing pointer
2.5 Setting a new pointer
Setting a new pointer is executed with or without NDF.

Pointer ranges
STS pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 to 782
VT6 pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 to 427
VT2 pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 to 139
VT1.5 pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 to 103

2.6 Pointer sequences parameter
T1, T4: 0.25 ms to 600 s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .(2 to 4800000 frames)
T2, T3: 0.25 ms to 10 s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .(2 to 80000 frames)
T5: 0 ms to 600 s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .(0 to 4800000 frames)
n: 1 to 2000

3 Performance Analysis
VI: Performance Analysis (Physical layer instrument)
3.1 ANSI/BELL evaluation
Definitions from GR-253 and T1.231 are used for this performance analysis.
3.1.1 ANSI/BELL results
The following results are determined and displayed:
Error type Explanation
ES Errored Seconds Seconds containing at least one error.
EFS Error Free Sum of all error free seconds since the start of the measurement.
Seconds
SES Severely Errored Severely errored seconds (see Sec. 3.1.3, Page TB-7).
Seconds
SEFS Severely Errored Seconds containing OOF (LOF, LOS) in the Section Analysis.
Frame Seconds
UAS Unavailable UAS is issued after 10 consecutive SES.

Seconds The 10 SES are counted towards the UAS total and subtracted from
the SES total.
UAS is retracted when 10 consecutive seconds without SES occur.
These 10 seconds are subtracted from the UAS total.
No ES, SES and SEFS are counted during UAS.
Table TB-1 ANSI/BELL evaluation, results
The absolute and percentage values of the results are displayed.
These rules apply: The percentages quoted for ES, SES, SEFS and EFS refer to the available
time,
i.e. the measurement time less UAS.
The percentage quoted for UAS refers to the total measurement time:
ES (including SES, SEFS) + EFS = 100% (available time)
ES (including SES, SEFS) + EFS + UAS = total measurement time.
“Far End” evaluation is interrupted if certain alarms occur, e.g. LOS, LOF or
AIS. These alarm times are removed from the reference value for
calculating the ratio at the “Far end”.

3.1.2 ANSI/BELL parameter settings
If “ANSI/BELL” evaluation is selected, the following parameters are used:
Menu Explanation
• Hierarchy Select measurement point and hence the events used to perform the evaluation
(see Sec. 3.1.3).
• Settings For ANSI/BELL evaluation no function.
Table TB-2 ANSI/Bell parameters
3.1.3 Measurement point (SONET Performance Monitoring, PM)
The menu “Hierarchy” can be used for selecting the following Measurement points:
3.1.3.1 Section (B1)
Section Layer PM
Parameter Criterion SES thresholds
SEFS OOF, LOF, LOS -
ES B1-Bit error ≥1 or SEFS -
SES SEF or B1-Bit error ≥ X Rate X
OC1 52
OC3 155
OC12 616
OC48 2392
OC192 9568
UAS SES ≥ 10 -
EFS no ES or UAS -
Table TB-3 Section Layer PM

3.1.3.2 Line (B2SUM)
Line Layer PM for “Near End”
ES B2SUM-Bit error ≥1 or AIS-L -
SES B2SUM-Bit error ≥X or AIS-L Rate X
OC1 51
OC3 154
OC12 615
OC48 2459
OC192 9836
UAS SES ≥ 10 -
EFS no ES or UAS -
Table TB-4 Line Layer PM “Near End”
Line Layer PM for “Far End”
ES REI-L ≥1 or RDI-L -
SES REI-L ≥X or RDI-L Rate X
OC1 51
OC3 154
OC12 615
OC48 2459
OC192 9836
UAS SES ≥ 10 -
EFS no ES or UAS -
Table TB-5 Performance Monitoring Line Layer PM “Far End”
3.1.3.3 STS-Path (B3)
STS Path Layer PM for “Near End”
ES B3 ≥1 or AIS-P or LOP-P -
SES B3-Bit error ≥X or AIS-P or LOP-P SPE X
STS1 2400
STS3c 2400
STS12c 2400
STS48c 2400
UAS SES ≥ 10 -
EFS no ES or UAS -
Table TB-6 STS Path Layer PM “Near End”

STS Path Layer PM for “Far End”
ES REI-P ≥1 or RDI-P -
SES REI-P ≥X or RDI-P SPE X
STS1 2400
STS3c 2400
STS12c 2400
STS48c 2400
UAS SES ≥ 10 -
EFS no ES or UAS -
Table TB-7 STS Path Layer PM “Far End”
3.1.3.4 VT-Path (BIP-V)
VT Path Layer PM for “Near End”
ES BIP-V ≥1 or AIS-V or LOP-V -
SES BIP-V ≥X or AIS-V or LOP-V Path X
VTx 600
UAS SES ≥ 10 -
EFS no ES or UAS -
Table TB-8 VT Path Layer PM “Near End”
VT Path Layer PM “Far End”
ES REI-V ≥1 or RDI-V -
SES REI-V ≥X or RDI-V Path X
VTx 600
UAS SES ≥ 10 -
EFS no ES or UAS -
Table TB-9 VT Path Layer PM “Far End”

3.1.3.5 BPV
DSn Performance Monitoring, Line Analysis
ES BPV ≥1 or LOS -
SES BPV ≥X or LOS X(DS1) = 1544

X(DS2) = 6312
X(DS3) = 44
UAS SES ≥ 10 -
EFS no ES or UAS -
Table TB-10 DSn Line Analysis
3.1.3.6 DS3 Frame, DS3 P-Parity or DS 3 C-Parity (yellow)
DS3 Path Analysis (FE, Parity, FEBE)
ES EC1 ≥1, AIS or OOF or LOF -
SES EC1 ≥X, AIS or OOF or LOF X = 44
UAS SES ≥ 10 -
EFS no ES or UAS -
1 EC stands for FE, PBit, FEBE or CBit
Table TB-11 DS3 Path Analysis (FE, Parity, FEBE)
3.1.3.7 DS1 Frame or DS1 CRC-6
DS1 Path Analysis (FE, CRC6)
ES FE, CRC ≥1, AIS or OOF or LOF -
SES FE ≥X, AIS or OOF or LOF CRC ≥Y X=4

Y = 320
UAS SES ≥ 10 -
EFS no ES or UAS -
Table TB-12 DS1 Path Analysis (FE, CRC6)

3.1.3.8 TSE
Bit Performance Monitoring
ES TSE ≥1 or LSS -
SES TSE ≥X or LSS X = 10E-3
UAS SES ≥ 10 -
EFS no ES or UAS -
Table TB-13 Bit Performance Monitoring

3.2 ITU-T G.821 evaluation
ITU-T G.821 evaluation corresponds to Recommendation G.821 (Issue 07/95).

Degraded minutes (DM) are also evaluated.
The multiplex factor used in older versions of Recommendation G.821 (Annex D) can be
applied if required.
3.2.1 G.821 results
Result Explanation
ES Errored Seconds Errored seconds, as a numerical count and as an error rate.
EFS Error Free Seconds Determined as error count and error rate.
SES Severely Errored Determined as error count and error rate.

Seconds
DM Degraded Minutes Number and ratio of degraded minutes.
UAS Unavailable Number and ratio of unavailable seconds.

Seconds
VERDICT Accepted/Rejected;
Overall assessment of path: accepted/rejected.
The ES and SES error ratios are compared with the appropriate
target values.
PATH Path allocation setting.

ALLOCATION
Table TB-14 G.821 evaluation, results

3.2.2 G.821 parameter settings
If “G.821” evaluation is selected, the following parameters are used:
Menu Item Explanation
• Hierarchy Select measurement point and hence the events used to perform the evaluation.
PDH 140 Mb FAS140 bit error
PDH 2 Mb CRC4 CRC4 word error
PDH 2 Mb EBIT EBIT error
PDH 2 Mb FAS FAS2 bit error
TSE bit error
• Settings Dialog window for input of the following parameters:
Allocation1 Entry of path allocation in percent (%):

Setting range: 0.1% to 100%
Step width: 0.1%
Default: 100%
The actual limit values for ESR and SESR are calculated internally:
“HRX ESR” limit value = 8% x Allocation
“HRX SESR” limit value = 0.1% + (0.1% x Allocation)
SES-Threshold2 Threshold for SES count:

Setting range: 1E-2 to 1E-5
Setting values: 1E-2, 1E- 3, 1E-4, 1E-5
Default: 1E-3
DM Threshold3 Threshold for DM count:

Setting range: 1E-4 to 1E-7
Setting values: 1E-4, 1E- 5, 1E-6, 1E-7
Default: 1E-6
MUX Factor Multiplex factor input:

Off: Evaluation to the latest G.821 recommendation4
On: Evaluation to older G.821 recommendation5
Multiplex factor N = measurement bit rate/64 kbit/s.
Default: Off
1 “Allocation” indicates the percentage of the “End to End” target values for ESR (Errored Seconds Ratio) and SESR
(Severely Errored Seconds Ratio) which must be met for the measured path to be acceptable (VERDICT =
Accepted). The “End to End” target values are based on the “Hypothetical Reference Configuration” (HRX) of
length 27 500 km. The following “End to End” target values are specified by G.821: SESR <0.1%, ESR <8%. The
“End-to-End” target values for DM (Degraded Minutes) corresponding to older G.821 recommendations are not
taken into account.
2 This threshold indicates the bit error rate above which a second is counted as an SES (Severely Errored Second)
3 This threshold indicates the bit error rate above which DM (Degraded Minutes) are evaluated.
4 Regardless of the bitrate, an ES is a second in which at least one error occurs.
5 According to annex D.
ES is a second in which at least n errors occured.
Table TB-15 G.821 parameter settings

The ANT-20/ANT-20E can perform “In Service” (ISM) and “Out of Service” (OOS) G.826
evaluation.
3.3.1 G.826 results
Result Explanation
EB Errored Blocks Count of errored blocks
BBE Background Block Errored blocks not in SES as a count and as an error rate.
Errors
ES Errored Seconds Errored seconds as a count and as an error rate
EFS Error Free Seconds Error-free seconds as a count and as an error rate
SES Severely Errored Severely errored seconds as a count and as an error rate
Seconds
UAS Unavailable Unavailable seconds as a count and as an error rate

Seconds
VERDICT Accepted/Rejected: Overall assessment of the path quality.
PATH Path allocation setting

ALLOCATION
PATH UAS For “Far End” measurements, the “Unavailable Seconds” (UAS)
are determined for the complete path (Path UAS). They are
determined from the “Near End” and “Far End” results using a
logical OR function.
The following is recorded in the header line of the results table:

• Measurement point used to determine the results.
• Anomaly used to perform the “Near End” measurement.
• Anomaly used to perform the “Far End” measurement.
Example
G.826: PDH2CRC NEAR END: CRC4 FAR END: EBIT
A set of results for the “Near End” and for the “Far End” is determined in each case.
The PATH ALLOCATION is also displayed.
The “Unavailable Seconds” (UAS) for the entire path (Path UAS) are also determined in “Far
End” measurements. The “Path UAS” result is determined by logically ORing the “Near End”
and “Far End” UAS results.
The message “Attention: Check TIM/PLM Defect Evaluation please!” may be displayed. This
message indicates that you should check to see if evaluation of both these alarms has been
activated. These defects should normally be considered in a G.826 evaluation. Evaluation is
enabled or disabled in the “Overhead Analyzer”.

If “G.826 ISM” or “G.826 OOS” evaluation is selected, the following parameters are used:
• Hierarchy Select measurement point and hence the events used to perform the evaluation
(see Tab. TB-18). For G.826 OOS not available.

Step width: 0.1%
Default: 18.5 %
SES-Threshold2 Threshold for SES count

Setting range: 1 to 47563
Step width: 1
Default value as per G.826 (depends on signal structure).
UAS-Limit Switch and threshold value for taking UAS into account in the path
status (VERDICT)
Off: UAS do not affect the path status.
On: If the UAS threshold is exceeded, the path status is assessed as
“Rejected”.
Step width: 1
Default: 0
UAS-Mode Switch for separate or common rating of UAS for “Near” and
“Far End”.
Individual: Separate rating of UAS for “Near” and “Far End”.
Global: Common rating of UAS for “Near” and “Far End”.
The total path is “unavailable” as soon as one side is“unavailable”.
Default: Individual.
1 “Allocation” indicates what percentage of the “End to End” target values for ESR (Errored Seconds Ratio), SESR
(Severely Errored Seconds Ratio) and BBER (Background Block Error Ratio) must be met for the measured path
to be considered acceptable. The “End to End” target values are based on a hypothetical path of length 27 500 km.
The target values for various system bit rates are specified in Recommendation G.826.
2 This threshold indicates the number of EB (Errored Blocks) required before a one-second period is evaluated as
SES (Severely Errored Second).

3.3.3 G.826 measurement points and anomalies evaluated
• The measurement point where the G.826 ISM evaluation is made, is selected in the
“Hierarchy” menu. In the case of G.826 OOS, there is no “Hierarchy” menu, and evaluation
is always made on bit errors (TSE).
• “Near End” and “Far End” evaluations are simultaneous as soon as the set signal structure
allows the “Far End” measurement to be made.
The “Far End” evaluation requires the presence of REI or EBIT.
G.826: measurement point NEAR END: anomalies FAR END: anomalies
G.826: RSOH B1 no evaluation
G.826: MSOH B2SUM MS-REI
G.826: HP-POH HP-B3 HP-REI
G.826: LP-POH LP-BIP8 LP-REI
G.826: LP-POH LP-BIP2 LP-REI
G.826: PDH140 FAS140 no evaluation
G.826: PDH2CRC CRC4 EBIT
G.826: DS3 P-Parity P bits no evaluation
G.826: DS3 C-Parity CP bits FEBE bits
G.826: DS3-FAS frame error DS3 no evaluation
G.826: DS1-CRC6 CRC-6 error no evaluation
G.826: DS1-FAS frame error DS1 no evaluation
G.826: 140M G832 FAS140 no evaluation
G.826: 140M G832 EM140 REI
G.826: 34M G832 FAS34 no evaluation
G.826: 34M G832 EM34 REI
G.826: OOS TSE no evaluation
Table TB-18 G.826 measurement points and anomalies evaluated

3.3.4 G.826/G.828/M.2101 blocklengths
3.3.4.1 G.826 ISM/G.828/M.2101 (RSOH, MSOH, HP, LP)
Measurement point Blocklength [time] Blocklength [bit]
RSOH / STM64 B1 125 µs 1244160
RSOH / STM16 B1 125 µs 311040
RSOH / STM4 B1 125 µs 77760
RSOH / STM1 B1 125 µs 19440
RSOH / STM0 B1 125 µs 6480
MSOH / STM64 B2SUM 125 µs 1225728
MSOH / STM16 B2SUM 125 µs 306432
HP-POH / AU-4 VC-4-16C B3 125 µs 300672
HP-POH / AU-4 VC-4-4C B3 125 µs 75168
HP-POH / AU-4 VC-4 B3 125 µs 18792
HP-POH / AU-3 VC-3 B3 125 µs 6264
LP-POH / AU-4 VC-3 BIP8 125 µs 6120
LP-POH / VC-2 BIP2 500 µs 3424
LP-POH / VC-12 BIP2 500 µs 1120
LP-POH / VC-11 BIP2 500 µs 832
FAS140 21 µs 12
FAS34 44.7 µs 10
FAS8 100.4 µs 10
PDH2FAS 250 µs 7
PDH2CRC 1 ms 2048
DS3 FAS 106 µs 56
DS3 C-Parity 106 µs 4760
DS3 P-Parity 106 µs 4760
DS1/SF FAS 1.5 ms 12
DS1/ESF FAS 3 ms 24
DS1/ESF CRC6 3 ms 4632
140M G832 FAS 125 µs 16
Table TB-19 G.826 ISM/G.828/M.2101 (RSOH, MSOH, HP, LP), blocklength

140M G832 EM 125 µs 17408
34M G832 FAS 125 µs 16
34M G832 EM 125 µs 4296
Table TB-19 G.826 ISM/G.828/M.2101 (RSOH, MSOH, HP, LP), blocklength (continued)
3.3.4.2 G.826 OOS/G.828 (TSE)/G.829 (TSE)/M.2100 (TSE)/M.2101 (TSE)
DS1 unframed 3 ms 4632
DS1/ESF framed pattern 3 ms 4608
DS1/SF framed pattern 1.5 ms 2304
VC11 Bulk 3 ms 4800
Nx64 1 ms N x 64
Overhead Bytes 1 ms N x 64
RSOH: E1, F1, D1 to D3
MSOH: D4 to D12, E2
POH: F2, F2L
2M unframed 1 ms 2048
PCM31 framed pattern 1 ms 1984
PCM30 framed pattern 1 ms 1920
VC12 Bulk 1 ms 2176
8M unframed 500 µs 4224
8M framed pattern 500 µs 4168
VC2 Bulk 500 µs 3392
DS2 unframed 500 µs 3160
VC3 Bulk 125 µs 6048
DS3 unframed 106 µs 4760
DS3 framed pattern 106 µs 4704
VC4 Bulk 125 µs 18720
VC4-4c Bulk 125 µs 74880
VC4-16c Bulk 125 µs 299520
Table TB-20 G.826 OOS/G.828 (TSE)/G.829 (TSE)/M.2100 (TSE)/M.2101 (TSE), blocklength

G.828 evaluation conforms to ITU-T Recommendation dated 3/2000. The G.828 standard is a
further development of Recommendation G.826 for synchronous digital paths.
Recommendation G.828 specifies additional measurement values and measurement points:
• SEP (Severely Errored Period, declared as optional)
• B1
• B2SUM
• MS-REI
• B3
• HP-REI
• LP-BIP 2/8
• LP-REI
• Bit errors (TSE) blocks per s
3.4.1 G.828 results
Result Explanation
Seconds
BBE Background Block Number and ratio of background block errors

Error
SEP Severely Errored Number and ratio of severely errored periods

Period (number of SES between 3 and 9)
Seconds
VERDICT - Accepted/Uncertain/Rejected:
Overall assessment of the path quality
PATH - Path allocation setting

ALLOCATION
PATH UAS - For “Far End” measurements, the “Unavailable Seconds”

(UAS) are determined for the complete path (Path UAS).
They are determined from the “Near End” and “Far End”
results using a logical OR function.

RSOH B1 B1 block errors
MSOH B2SUM Common evaluation of B2 and MS-REI block errors
HP B3 Common evaluation of B3 and HP-REI block errors
LP BIP2/8 Common evaluation of BIP2/8 and LP-REI block errors
TCM1 TC-Diff block error
TSE Bit errors

Step width: 0.1%
Default: 18.5%

Step width: 1
UAS-Limit Switches and threshold for taking UAS into account in the path
status (VERDICT):
Off: UAS have no influence on path status.
On: If UAS limit exceeded, path status is rated as “Rejected”
Step width: 1
Default: 0
“Far End”.
SEP used in Toggle for including SEP in the verdict.

Verdict The measurement values are determined and displayed regardless
of the toggle setting.
Default: ON
1 In preparation
2 “Allocation” indicates how many percent of the end-to-end target specs are to be met for the path under test to be
acceptable.

G.829 evaluation conforms to ITU-T Recommendation dated 3/2000. The G.829 standard
describes the recording and classification of error performance events for SDH multiplex and
regenerator-sections. The Recommendation does not discuss allocations and does not specify
objectives to be met. An assessment verdict is therefore not possible. The measured values are
determined on a block basis in the sense that the individual bits of an EDC (Error Detection
Code) each monitor separate blocks. This is in contrast with the G.826 and G.828 evaluations,
where the entire EDC only monitors a single block in each case.
• B1
• B2SUM
• MS-REI
3.5.1 G.829 results
Result Explanation
SES Severely Errored Seconds Severely errored seconds as a count and as an error rate
BBE Background Block Error Number and ratio of background block errors
UAS Unavailable Seconds Unavailable seconds as a count and as an error rate
3.5.2 G.829 Multiplex section: blocks per second
Bit rate Block length Blocks per frame Blocks per second Error detection code
STM-0 801 Bits 8 64 000 8xBIP-1
STM-1 801 Bits 24 192 000 24xBIP-1
STM-4 801 Bits 96 768 000 96xBIP-1
STM-16 801 Bits 384 3 072 000 384xBIP-1
STM-64 801 Bits 1 536 12 288 000 1536xBIP-1
Table TB-24 G.829 evaluation, Multiplex section: blocks per second

RSOH B1 B1 block error
MSOH B2SUM B2 and MS-REI block error
TSE Bit errors

Setting range: 1 to 2 147 483 647
Step width: 1

3.6 ITU-T M.2100 evaluation
ITU-T M.2100 evaluation conforms to Recommendation M.2100 07/95.

The M.2100 evaluation can be performed on the following events:
• CRC errors (CRC-4 and CRC-6)
• EBIT errors
• PBIT errors
3.6.1 M.2100 results
Result Explanation
Seconds

Seconds
ALLOCATION - Path allocation setting
BISO-ES, ES-S1, - Threshold values, calculated internally

ES-S2
BISO-SES, SES-S1, - Threshold values, calculated internally

SES-S2
Table TB-26 M.2100 evaluation, results

3.6.2 M.2100 parameter settings
If “M.2100” evaluation is selected, the following parameters are used:
PDH 2 Mb CRC4 CRC4 word error1

PDH 2 Mb FAS FAS2 bit error
DS3 P-Bit Error
DS3 FAS45 bit error
DS1 CRC6 word error
DS1 FAS1.5 bit error
TSE bit error

Step width: 0.1%
Default: 100%
BISO Multiplier3 Weighting factor for BIS[P]O4

Setting range: 0.1 to 100
Step width: 0.1
Default: 1.0
status (VERDICT):
Step width: 1
Default: 0
“Far End”.
1 CRC4 word error and EBIT error are computed parallel.
acceptable (see Tab. TB-28).
3 The BISO value is internally computed for ES and SES (see Sec. 3.6.2.2).
4 Bringing into Service (Performance) Objectives.
Table TB-27 M.2100 parameter settings

3.6.2.1 End-to-end error reference performance objectives (EERPO)
Network level Max. ES Max. SES

% of time % of time
64 kbit/s 4.0 0.1
Primary 2.0 0.1
Secondary 2.5 0.1
Tertiary 3.75 0.1
Quaternary 8.0 0.1
Table TB-28 EERPO: End-to-end error reference performance objectives
3.6.2.2 BIS[P]O, S1 and S2: Threshold definition and computing
The BISO value is internally computed for ES and SES. It is defined as follows:
BISO ES[SES] = (Allocation x EERPO ES[SES] x Test Period x BISO Multiplier) / 2
From BISO, the thresholds S1 and S2 are computed for ES and SES:
S1 Limit ES[SES] = BISO ES[SES] - 2 x sqrt(BISO ES[SES])
S2 Limit ES[SES] = BISO ES[SES] + 2 x sqrt(BISO ES[SES])
For meas. times ≤ 15 minutes: BISO = S1 = S2 = 0
For meas. tiemes ≥ 7 days: BISO = S1 = S2
The computed values for BISO, S1 and S2 for ES and SES are displayed below the result page.
For determining the path status, the measurement results are compared with the thresholds S1
and S2 as follows:
Meas. value ES or SES > S2 or EFS = 0: Path status = rejected

Meas. value ES or SES between S1 and S2: Path status = uncertain
Meas. value ES and SES ≤ S1: Path status = accepted
Meas. value UAS may also be taken into account, cf. switch UAS-limit (see Tab. TB-27).

3.7 ITU-T M.2101 evaluation
M.2101 evaluation takes the issue of Recommendation M.2101 dated 6/2000 as well as the
version M.2101.1 of April 1997 into account. You can switch between the two versions via a list
box in the “Settings” menu. The main differences between the Recommendation M.2101
(4/1997) and the Recommendation M.2101 (6/2000) concern additional measurement values
as well as differences in the error performance objectives:
• BBE (Background Block Error)
• SEP (Severely Errored Period)
SEP evaluation is optional in the new Recommendation M.2101 (6/2000). The “Settings” menu
therefore includes a separate switch for including or excluding SEP from the assessment
verdict.
M.2101 evaluation can be performed on the following events:
• B1
• B2SUM
• MS-REI
• B3
• HP-REI
• LP-BIP 2/8
• LP-REI
3.7.1 M.2101 results
Result Explanation
Seconds
BBE Background Block Number and ratio of background block errors

Error
SEP Severely Errored Number and ratio of severely errored periods

Period (number of SES between 3 and 9)

Seconds
ALLOCATION - Path allocation setting
BISO-ES, ES-S1, - Threshold values, calculated internally

ES-S2

Result Explanation
BISO-SES, SES-S1, - Threshold values, calculated internally

SES-S2
BISO-BBE, BBE-S1, - Threshold values, calculated internally

SES-S2
BISO-SEP, SEP-S1, - Threshold values, calculated internally

SEP-S2
3.7.2 M.2101 parameter settings
If “M.2101” evaluation is selected, the following parameters are used:
RSOH B1 B1 block errors
MSOH B2SUM Common evaluation of B2 and MS-REI block errors
HP B3 Common evaluation of B3 and HP-REI block errors
LP BIP2/8 Common evaluation of BIP2/8 and LP-REI block errors
TSE Bit errors

Step width: 0.1%
Default: 100%
BISO Multiplier2 Weighting factor for BIS[P]O3

Setting range: 0.1 to 100
Step width: 0.1
Default: 1.0
status (VERDICT):
Step width: 1
Default: 0
UAS-Mode4 Switch for separate or common rating of UAS for “Near” and
“Far End”.
Table TB-30 M.2101 parameter settings

M.2101-Version This list box allows you to select between evaluation according to
M.2101.1 (4/1977) or M.2101 (6/2000).
The two Recommendations differ in the specified performance ob-
jective values. The newer Recommendation also includes evalua-
tion of BBE and SEP.
Default: 6/2000
SEP used in Toggle for including SEP in the verdict.

Verdict5 The measurement values are determined and displayed regardless
of the toggle setting.
Default: ON
acceptable (see Tab. TB-32).
2 The BISO value is internally computed for ES and SES (see Sec. 3.7.2.3).
3 Bringing into Service (Performance) Objectives.
4 Only selectable for meas. points for which both near end and far end are evaluated
5 SEP is only included in the verdict for measurement times ≥ 7 days.
Table TB-30 M.2101 parameter settings (continued)

3.7.2.1 End-to-end performance objectives (EEPO) for M.2101.1 (4/1997)
The End to End Performance Objectives (EEPOs) are listed in table 3 of the M.2101.1
recommendation of 04/1997:
EEPO values for1
Bit rate ESR SESR
≤ 5 Mbit/s 2% 0.1%
5 Mbit/s ≤ Bit rate ≤ 15 Mbit/s 2.5 % 0.1%
15 Mbit/s ≤ Bit rate ≤ 55 Mbit/s 3.75% 0.1%
55 Mbit/s ≤ Bit rate ≤ 160 Mbit/s 8% 0.1%
160 Mbit/s ≤ Bit rate ≤ 3500 Mbit/s NA2 0.1%
> 3500 Mbit/s NA2 0.1%

1 There is no BBE and no SEP in the M.2101.1 recommendation of 4/1997.
2 NA (Not Applicable) means that this value is not taken into account in the “VERDICT”.
Table TB-31 End to End Performance Objectives (EEPOs) from the recommendation M.2101.1 (4/1997)
3.7.2.2 End-to-end performance objectives (EEPO) for M.2101 (6/2000)
The End to End Performance Objectives (EEPOs) are listed in the following tables of the
Recommendation M.2101 (06/2000):
:
Table 3a/M.2101: International paths

Table 3b/M.2101: International multiplex sections
The following values are used for measurement points that are not defined in the
recommendation:
Measurement Bit rate EEPO values for

point
ESR SESR SEP1 BBER
M.2101: RSOH B1 STM-0 1% 0.1% 1E-4 2.5E-5
STM-1 2% 0.1% 1E-4 5E-5
STM-4 bis STM-64 NA2 0.1% 1E-4 5E-5
M.2101: TSE ≤ 15 Mbit/s 0.5% 0.1% 1E-4 2.5E-5
15 Mbit/s < Bit rate ≤ 55 Mbit/s 1% 0.1% 1E-4 2.5E-5
> 55 Mbit/s 2% 0.1% 1E-4 5E-5
VC4-nC NA2 0.1% 1E-4 5E-5

1 SEP is only included in the verdict for measurement times ≥ 7 days.
2 NA (Not Applicable) means that this value is not taken into account in the “VERDICT”
Table TB-32 End-to-end performance objectives (EEPO) that are not defined in the recommendation

3.7.2.3 BIS[P]O, S1 und S2: Threshold definition and computing

for M.2101.1 (4/1997)
The BISO value is internally computed for ES, SES, BBE and SEP. The threshold values S1
and S2 are also determined from BISO. The values calculated for BISO, S1 and S2 are
displayed on the results page.
The BISO value is computed as follows:
Path section (B3, LPBIP 2/8) and regenerator section (B1)
BISO ES = (Allocation x EEPO ES x Test Period x BISO Multiplier)/2

S1 Limit ES = BISO ES - 2 x sqrt(BISO ES)
S2 Limit ES = BISO ES + 2 x sqrt(BISO ES)
BISO SES = (Allocation x EEPO SES x Test Period x BISO Multiplier)/2

S1 Limit SES = BISO SES - 2 x sqrt(BISO SES)
S2 Limit SES = BISO SES + 2 x sqrt(BISO SES)
Table TB-33 “BISO” formulae for the path section (B3, LPBIP 2/8) and regenerator section (B1)
Multiplex section (B2SUM)


Table TB-34 “BISO” formulae for the multiplex section (B2SUM)
Measurements on patterns (TSE)

Table TB-35 “BISO” formulae for measurements on patterns (TSE)
The measurement results are compared with the threshold values S1 and S2 as follows when
determining the section status (Verdict).
Measured value of ES [SES, BBE, SEP] > S2 or EFS = 0: Path status = rejected
Measured value of ES [SES, BBE, SEP] between S1 and S2: Path status = uncertain
Measured value of ES [SES, BBE, SEP] ≤ S1: Path status = accepted

3.7.2.4 BIS[P]O, S1 und S2: Threshold definition and computing

for M.2101 (6/2000)
The BISO value is internally computed for ES, SES, BBE and SEP. The threshold values S1
and S2 are also determined from BISO. The values calculated for BISO, S1 and S2 are
displayed on the results page.
The BISO value is computed as follows:
Path section (B3, LPBIP 2/8) and regenerator section (B1)


BISO SEP = (Allocation x EEPO SEP x Test Period x BISO Multiplier)/2

S1 Limit SEP = BISO SEP - 2 x sqrt(BISO SEP)
S2 Limit SEP = BISO SEP + 2 x sqrt(BISO SEP)
VC-1/VC-2
BISO BBE = (Allocation x EEPO BBE x Test Period x 2000 x BISO Multiplier)/2
S1 Limit BBE = BISO BBE - 2 x sqrt(BISO BBE)
S2 Limit BBE = BISO BBE + 2 x sqrt(BISO BBE)
VC-3/VC-4/VC-4-XC
Table TB-36 “BISO” formulae for the path section (B3, LPBIP 2/8) and regenerator section (B1)

Multiplex section (B2SUM)



STM-0
STM-1
STM-4
STM-16
STM-64
Table TB-37 “BISO” formulae for the multiplex section (B2SUM)

Measurements on patterns (TSE)


BISO BBE = (Allocation x EEPO BBE x Test Period x no. of blocks per sec.1x BISO Multiplier)/2

1 Number of blocks per second: see G.826/G.828/M.2101 block lengths
Table TB-38 “BISO” formulae for measurements on patterns (TSE)
The measurement results are compared with the threshold values S1 and S2 as follows when
determining the section status (Verdict).
Measured value of ES [SES, BBE, SEP] > S2 or EFS = 0: Path status = rejected
Measured value of ES [SES, BBE, SEP] between S1 and S2: Path status = uncertain
Measured value of ES [SES, BBE, SEP] ≤ S1: Path status = accepted

3.7.2.5 SES thresholds
The SES thresholds are defined in the following tables of the

Recommendation M.2101 (06/2000):
• Table B.1/M.2101: LO Path Layer
• Table B.2/M.2101: HO Path Layer
• Table B.3/M.2101: Section Layer
A SES threshold of 30% of all evaluated blocks per second is used for all measurement points
except B2SUM.
The recommendation does not define all the values for the Section Layer. These undefined
values have been selected as follows:
Bit rate Measurement point Threshold value
STM-01 B2-SES 9 600 BIP-1

MS-REI-SES 9 600 MS-REI
STM-1 B2-SES 28 800 BIP-1
STM-4 B2-SES 192 000 BIP-1

STM-161 B2-SES 921 600 BIP-1

STM-641 B2-SES 3 686 400 BIP-1

1 Values not defined for the Section Layer
Table TB-39 SES thresholds

Maintenance
8
Contents
Maintenance
1 Cleaning the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-1
2 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-1
3 Exchanging Versacon inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-2
4 Replacing the fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-3
5 Replacing the air filter pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-4

5.1 ANT-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-4
5.2 ANT-20E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-6
i
Notes:
ii
Maintenance
1 Cleaning the instrument

First disconnect the ANT-20 from the AC line and all measurement circuits.
Simply turning the instrument off using the AC power switch is not sufficiently safe.
To clean the housing of the ANT-20, use warm water to which a little detergent has been added.
Never use cleaning fluids which contain solvents such as methylated spirits or petroleum. Such
solvents may attack the lettering on the instrument. Cleansers for plastic or furniture should also
be avoided as these often contain polishing agents which may damage the lettering or leave
shiny patches on the instrument finish.
Simply dampen a cloth with the warm water and detergent solution and wipe the instrument
clean. Make sure that drops of water do not enter the instrument. Wipe off excess moisture
using a clean, dry cloth to ensure that no spots or drying marks are left on the housing.
Always use a damp cloth to clean the screen in order to prevent scratching and electrostatic
charges.
2 Tools
The following tools are included with your instrument. These tools are required for maintenance
operations, e.g. opening the instrument in order to replace the air filter.
• Hexagon key wrench (Allen key)
for the hex socket head screws holding the housing together.
• Fitting wrench
for the Versacon 9 system connector inserts.
Maintenance M-1
3 Exchanging Versacon inserts

Some of the inputs and outputs are equipped with Versacon® 9 system connectors.
These inputs and outputs will be fitted with the inserts which you ordered (standard fitting is
BNC inserts).
The inserts can be replaced at any time with other inserts from the Versacon® 9 system (see
Fig. M-1). The fitting wrench is required for this job.
Versacon® 9 insert
Fig. M-1 Versacon® 9 insert for BNC socket
Removing the socket

1. Loosen the lock nut by turning it anticlockwise with the fitting wrench.
2. Screw the lock nut forward by hand as far as it will go.
3. If the insert cannot now be removed by unscrewing it by hand, use the fitting wrench to
loosen it.
Fitting the socket

1. Screw the lock nut onto the insert as far as it will go.
2. Screw the insert as far as it will go into the basic socket on the instrument.
3. Screw the lock nut down by hand (clockwise) and tighten it using the fitting wrench.
M-2 Maintenance
4 Replacing the fuse

If the instrument does not work when it is switched on and the AC line cord is OK, the fuse may
have blown.
To replace the fuse, proceed as follows (see Fig. M-2):
1. First disconnect the ANT-20 from the AC line and all measurement circuits.
2. Pull out the fuse holder using a small screwdriver.
3. Check the fuse for continuity.
4. If the fuse is faulty, replace it with a new one (two spare fuses are supplied with the
instrument).
5. Put the fuse holder back into the instrument.
6. Connect the instrument to the AC line and switch on.
If the replacement fuse also blows, contact your nearest Wavetek Wandel Goltermann Service
Center for advice.
Fig. M-2 AC power connector with voltage selector and fuse
Maintenance M-3
5 Replacing the air filter pad

Air for cooling the ANT-20 is sucked in mainly through the left-hand half of the instrument
housing. An air filter pad behind the left-hand side panel cleans this air flow.
The air filter should be cleaned at regular intervals. The frequency of cleaning will depend on
the use and operating conditions of the instrument. If the filter is not cleaned or if the instrument
is operated without the filter, the dust and dirt deposited may damage the instrument.
5.1 ANT-20
To replace the air filter, proceed as follows:

1. First disconnect the ANT-20 from the AC line and all measurement circuits.
2. Remove the five hex socket screws shown in the figure below.
Fig. M-3 Removing the ANT-20 from its housing
3. Pull the ANT-20 upwards out of the housing.

4. Replace the filter pad (see Fig. M-4).
5. Slide the ANT-20 back into the housing.
6. Do up the five hex socket screws again.
M-4 Maintenance
Filter pad
Fig. M-4 Replacing the ANT-20 filter pad
Maintenance M-5
5.2 ANT-20E
To replace the air filter, proceed as follows:

1. First disconnect the ANT-20E from the AC line and all measurement circuits.
2. Remove the nine hex socket screws shown in the figure below.
Fig. M-5 Removing the housing covers
3. Remove the housing covers of the ANT-20E (see Fig. M-6).

4. Replace the filter pad.
5. Replace the housing covers.
6. Replace and tighten the nine hex socket screws.
M-6 Maintenance
Filter pad housing covers
Fig. M-6 Replacing the ANT-20E filter pad
Maintenance M-7
Notes:
M-8 Maintenance
Remote Operation
9
Contents
Remote operation
1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RO-1
2 Remote Operation via Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RO-2

2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RO-2
2.2 Items included in delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RO-2
2.3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RO-3
2.3.1 Hardware installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RO-3
2.3.2 Software installation under Windows 3.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . RO-3
2.3.3 Software installation under Windows95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RO-4
3 Remote Operation via Ethernet (IEEE 802.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RO-6

3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RO-6
3.2 Items included in delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RO-6
3.3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RO-6
3.3.1 Hardware installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RO-6
3.3.2 Software installation under Windows 3.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . RO-7
3.3.3 Software installation under Windows95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . RO-11
i
Notes:
ii
Remote operation
With options BN 3035/95.30 and BN 3035/95.31 only.
1 Introduction
The remote operation options allow you to access a distant ANT-20 (or DominoCOM ANT-20)
from any Windows PC over a dial-up link via modems or over an Ethernet LAN.
Here are just some of the things you can do:
Remote control
Once connected to the distant ANT-20, you can use you mouse and keyboard to operate the
ANT-20 just as if you where sitting in front of it.
File transfer
Move or copy files quickly and reliably between ANT-20 and PC.
Chat between ANT-20 and PC

Type messages that appear instantaneously at the other side.
Remote printing
Redirect print jobs, e.g. from the distant ANT-20 to your local printer.
All this is accomplished with the remote access software called ReachOut from Stac Electronics
Inc.
In terms of ReachOut, the controlling PC is the Viewer and the distant ANT-20 is the Host.
For detailed information refer to the ReachOut user’s guide.
Remote operation RO-1

2 Remote Operation via Modems
2.1 Overview
The Remote Operation Option 3035/95.30 includes the software required to operate a distant
ANT-20 (or DominoCOM ANT-20) from a Windows PC over a dial-up link via modems or over
a direct connection via a null modem cable. The direct connection may be used for testing
purposes or for operating a DominoCOM ANT-20 from a PC over short distances.
A null modem cable (3 meters long) with both 9-way and 25-way SUB-D female connectors on
each end is included.
The remote access software used, ReachOut (from Stac Electronics Inc.), handles hundreds of
different modem types, including ISDN modems and cellular modems. You can even define a
new modem if yours isn’t listed. For detailed information refer to the ReachOut user’s guide.
The modems should be purchased in the country where they are to be operated, to conform to
national regulations.
For ANT-20 with Windows 3.11 only:
• PCMCIA card modems require a standardized PCMCIA system software with Card and
Socket Services. CardWare (from Award Software Inc.) is included as PCMCIA system
software for the ANT-20. For detailed information refer to the CardWare user’s manual.
• The CardWare software contained on the ANT-20 PCMCIA System disk is already
configured for use with the ANT-20.
2.2 Items included in delivery
The Remote Operation Option 3035/95.30 comprises:

• ReachOut User’s Guide
• ReachOut installation disks (Host & Viewer, Modem & Network, 1 Node)
• Null modem cable, 3 meters long (part number K 764)
• CardWare User’s Manual (Award Software Inc.)
• CardWare Version 2.0 distribution disk (Award Software Inc.)
• ANT-20 PCMCIA System installation disk (configured CardWare 2.0)
RO-2 Remote operation

2.3 Installation
2.3.1 Hardware installation
PCMCIA card modem

Insert the PCMCIA card modem into a free PCMCIA socket just like you insert a disk into a
floppy drive.
You do not need to power down the ANT-20 when you insert or remove the card.
External modem or null modem cable

Connect the modem (or null modem cable) to the V.24 interface connector of the ANT-20 (serial
port COM1 of the built in PC-AT).
2.3.2 Software installation under Windows 3.11
To install and configure the software on a DominoCOM ANT-20 in the same way as on an
ANT-20, connect an external monitor, keyboard and mouse to the built in PC-AT.
If you ordered the Remote Operation Option 3035/95.30 together with your ANT-20, the
CardWare and ReachOut software packages are already installed on the ANT-20 (in the
directories C:\CARDWARE and C:\REACHOUT) and the ReachOut program icon is shown in
the Windows “Program Manager”. The ReachOut security options are pre-configured as
follows:
The ReachOut “Password List” contains an entry with the “User Name” ANT-20 and the
accompanying password ANT-20. The option “Passwords Required” is set to “No”.
For detailed information about configuration options refer to the ReachOut user’s guide.
If you ordered the Remote Operation Option 3035/95.30 separately, install the software
packages as follows:
Installing the PCMCIA System software

(only required if you use a PCMCIA card modem)
1. Start or return to Windows.
2. Insert the installation disk ANT-20 PCMCIA System into drive A:.
3. Choose “Run …” from the “File” menu in the “Program Manager” window and type the
following command into the dialog box:
A:\setup
4. After complete installation exit Windows, remove the installation disk from drive A:, and
reboot the ANT-20.
5. Run C:\CARDWARE\doscard /d (from MS-DOS) for querying the assigned COM port of your
PCMCIA card modem. You need the assigned COM port (usually COM3) for configuring
ReachOut.

Installing the ReachOut software

2. Insert the ReachOut for Windows&DOS installation disk 1 into drive A:.
A:\install
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation. For detailed information refer
to the ReachOut user’s guide.
If you are installing ReachOut on a DominoCOM ANT-20, answer the on-screen question
“Would you like ReachOut Host to be started automatically when you start Windows?” with
“Yes”.
All configuration parameters can be changed after installation by configuring ReachOut.
reboot the ANT-20.
After this installation procedure on the ANT-20 (the “Host” in terms of ReachOut) you can start
the ReachOut Host and configure it as required.
To prevent a Viewer from accidentally tying up the Host, it is recommended setting the Host
configuration parameter “Inactivity Timeout” to a non zero value (in “Preferences …/Host
Options” menu).
After installing ReachOut on the controlling PC (the “Viewer” in terms of ReachOut) and
configuring the ReachOut Viewer as required, you can start remote access to the ANT-20.
2.3.3 Software installation under Windows95
ANT-20, connect an external monitor, keyboard and mouse to the built in PC-AT.
If you ordered the Remote Operation Option BN 3035/95.30 together with your ANT-20, the
ReachOut software is already installed on the ANT-20 (in the directory C:\REACHOUT) and the
ReachOut program icon is shown in the Windows95 file folder “Programs”.
The ReachOut security options are pre-configured as follows:
The ReachOut “Password List” contains an entry with the “User Name“ ANT-20 and the
For detailed information about configuration options refer to the ReachOut user‘s guide.

If you ordered the Remote Operation Option 3035/95.30 separately, install the ReachOut
software as follows:
Querying the assigned COM port of the PCMCIA card modem

(only if you use a PCMCIA card modem)
1. Start or return to Windows95.
2. Click the Windows95 “Start” button, choose “Settings” and then choose “Control Panel”.
3. Double-click “Modems”, select your PCMCIA modem type on the “General” tab, and then
click “Properties”. You need the assigned COM port (usually COM3) for configuring
ReachOut.

2. Insert the ReachOut for Windows & DOS installation disk 1 into drive A:.
3. Click the Windows95 “Start” button, choose “Run …” and type the following command into
the dialog box:
A:\install
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation. For detailed information refer
to the ReachOut user‘s guide.
“Yes”.
5. After complete installation exit Windows95, remove the installation disk from drive A:, and
reboot the ANT-20.
After this installation procedure on the ANT-20 (the “Host” in terms of ReachOut ) you can start
Options” menu).
For detailed information refer to the ReachOut user‘s guide.

3 Remote Operation via Ethernet (IEEE 802.3)
3.1 Overview
The Remote Operation Option 3035/95.31 includes the software required to operate a distant
ANT-20 (or DominoCOM ANT-20) from a Windows PC over an Ethernet LAN using the Internet
protocol TCP/IP.
The PCMCIA Ethernet card required (with 10Base2 and 10BaseT connectors) for the ANT-20 is
also included.
The remote access software used is ReachOut (from Stac Electronics Inc.). For detailed
information refer to the ReachOut user’s guide.
• PCMCIA cards require a standardized PCMCIA system software with Card and Socket
Services. CardWare (from Award Software Inc.) is included as PCMCIA system software for
the ANT-20. For detailed information refer to the CardWare user’s manual.
• The CardWare software contained on the ANT-20 PCMCIA System disk is already
configured for use with the ANT-20.
• TCP/IP implementation for the ANT-20 is by means of MS TCP/IP-32 stack (from Microsoft).
3.2 Items included in delivery
The Remote Operation Option BN 3035/95.31 comprises:

• ReachOut User’s Guide
• ReachOut installation disks (Host & Viewer, Modem & Network, 1 Node)
• SCM Ethernet LAN card (SCM Microsystem GmbH) including:
– Media Coupler for 10Base2 and 10BaseT
– Distribution disk
– Installation Guide
• CardWare User’s Manual (Award Software Inc.)
• CardWare Version 2.0 distribution disk (Award Software Inc.)
• ANT-20 PCMCIA System installation disk (configured CardWare 2.0)
• ANT-20 TCP/IP Interface installation disk
3.3 Installation
3.3.1 Hardware installation
Insert the SCM Ethernet LAN card into a free PCMCIA socket just like you insert a disk into a
floppy drive.
You do not need to power down the ANT-20 when you insert or remove the card.
Connect the SCM Ethernet LAN card to your LAN using the Media Coupler cable included.

3.3.2 Software installation under Windows 3.11
ANT-20, connect an external monitor, keyboard and mouse to the built-in PC-AT.
If you ordered the Remote Operation Option 3035/95.31 together with your ANT-20, the
CardWare, MS TCP/IP-32 and ReachOut software packages are already installed on the
ANT20 (CardWare in the directory C:\CARDWARE, MS TCP/IP-32 in the directory
C:\WINDOWS and ReachOut in the directory C:\REACHOUT) and the Microsoft TCP/IP-32 and
ReachOut icons are shown in the Windows “Program Manager”.
The ReachOut security options are pre-configured as follows:
The ReachOut “Password List” contains an entry with the “User Name” ANT-20 and the
For detailed information about configuration options refer to the ReachOut user’s guide.
You now have to modify the pre-configured network setup to meet the specific requirements of
your network:
Modify the C:\WINDOWS\hosts file

The C:\WINDOWS\hosts file is merely an example. It must be modified to adapt to your
network:
The hosts file must contain the IP addresses of all network nodes with which you want to
communicate, including the IP address of the ANT-20 itself and the IP address of the gateway
(if any) between the ANT-20 and the controlling PC. The first entry in the file is the mapping for
“localhost” and must be left unchanged (see sample hosts file C:WINDOWS\hosts.sam).
Ask your network administrator for the required entries for the hosts file to adapt to your
network.
Modify the MS TCP/IP-32 configuration

2. In the “Network” group in the “Program Manager”, double-click the “Network Setup” icon.
3. Choose “Drivers …” and select “Microsoft TCP/IP-32 3.11b” from the list, then choose
“Setup”.
4. Set the “IP Address” of the ANT-20, the “Subnet Mask”, and (if required) the address of the
“Default Gateway”. Ask your network administrator for the required entries to adapt to your
network.
Confirm with “OK”.
5. Back in the “Network Drivers” dialog box, choose “Close”.
6. Back in the “Network Setup” dialog box, confirm with “OK”.
7. Confirm the modification prompt with “OK”.
8. Answer the question “Restart Windows now?” with “Continue”.
9. In the “Main” group in “Program Manager”, double-click the “Control Panel” icon.
10. Choose “Network” and then set “Computer Name” (must be unique in the network),
“Workgroup” etc. to suit your requirements.
11. Answer the question “Restart your computer now?” with “Restart Computer”.

Installing the PCMCIA System software

2. Insert the ANT-20 PCMCIA System installation disk into drive A:.
A:\setup
reboot the ANT-20.
5. Run C:\CARDWARE\doscard /d (from MS-DOS) for querying the assignments for the SCM
Ethernet LAN card. You need the assigned I/O Base and Interrupt Request (IRQ) for
configuring the MS TCP/IP-32 software. Usually I/O Base will be 300h and IRQ 5.
Modify the “hosts” file

The “hosts” file in directory TCP32WFW of the ANT-20 TCP/IP Interface installation disk is
merely an example. It must be modified to adapt to your network:
“localhost” and must be left unchanged (see sample hosts file “hosts.sam” in the same
directory).
network.
Installing the MS TCP/IP-32 software

2. Insert the ANT-20 TCP/IP Interface installation disk into drive A:.
3. In the “Network” group in the “Program Manager”, double-click the “Network Setup” icon.
4. Choose “Networks …” and select “Install Microsoft Windows Network”. Confirm with “OK”.
5. Choose “Drivers …” and subsequently choose “Add Adapter …”.
Select “NE2000 Compatible” from the list. Confirm with “OK”.
6. Set “Interrupt” to the value which was assigned to the SCM Ethernet LAN card (Interrupt is
usually 5).
7. Set “Base I/O Port” to the value which was assigned to the SCM Ethernet LAN card (Base
I/O Port is usually 0x0300).
8. Select “NE2000 Compatible [NDIS2/NDIS3]” from the “Network Drivers” list and then
choose “Add Protocol …”.
9. Select “Unlisted or Updated Protocol” from the list and confirm with “OK”.
10. Type the pathname A:\TCP32WFW in the dialog box and confirm with “OK”.
11. Select “Microsoft TCP/IP-32 3.11b” from the list and confirm with “OK”.
(The Microsoft TCP\IP-32 for Windows for Workgroups distribution files will be copied to
your hard disk.)
12. When the “Network Drivers” dialog box appears, select “Microsoft NetBEUI” from the list,
then click “Remove” and confirm with “Yes”.
13. Select “IPX/SPX Compatible Transport with NetBIOS” from the list, then click “Remove” and
confirm with “Yes”.
14. Select “Microsoft TCP/IP-32 3.11b” from the list, then choose “Setup”.

15. Set the “IP Address” of the ANT-20, the “Subnet Mask”, and (if required) the address of the
“Default Gateway”. Ask your network administrator for the required entries to adapt to your
network.
16. Back in the “Network Drivers” dialog box, choose “Close”.
17. Back in the “Network Setup” dialog box, confirm with “OK”.
18. Type in the “Computer Name” (must be unique in the network) and the “User Name”.
19. Back in the “Windows Setup” dialog box, remove the installation disk from drive A:, and
choose “Restart Computer”.
After this installation procedure, a NE2000 compatible driver is installed. It is not therefore
necessary to install the driver supplied together with the SCM Ethernet LAN card.
Select the startup mode

When using the ANT-20 in remote operating mode, it is not normally desirable to receive a log-
on request during startup. When using a DominoCOM ANT-20, it is essential that the log-on
request is disabled.
To disable the log-on request
2. In the “Main” group in the “Program Manager”, double click the “Control Panel” icon.
3. Choose “Network” and then select “Startup”.
4. Deactivate “Log On at Startup” and confirm with “OK”.
5. Confirm with “OK”.
Verify the network installation

1. To test the installations of CardWare and SCM Ethernet LAN card, insert the ANT-20
TCP/IP Interface installation disk into drive A: and execute (from MS-DOS)
A:\NETWARE\ODI\lsl and then execute A:\NETWARE\ODI\ne2000.
If successful, the ANT-20 displays the Ethernet address of the SCM Ethernet LAN card
(Node Address) and the assigned I/O Base (Port) and Interrupt Request (IRQ).
2. Test the connection to the controlling PC:
Start or return to Windows.
In the “Main” group in the “Program Manager”, double-click the “MS-DOS Prompt” icon.
Execute C:\ping <ip_address>, where <ip_address> is the IP address of the controlling PC.
If no connection can be established, the C:\WINDOWS\hosts file may have incorrect or missing
entries or the address for the “Default Gateway” in Microsoft TCP/IP-32 3.11b Setup may be
incorrect or missing.

Modifying the system files config.sys and autoexec.bat

In contrast to the DominoCOM ANT-20, the ANT-20 can be operated using different startup
configurations that can be selected by keystrokes during startup.
This may be useful, for example, when an ANT-20 with installed network is also to be used
without a network connection and without an SCM Ethernet LAN card. You can modify the files
config.sys and autoexec.bat to control the startup procedure.
An example is given below. The lines to be added are shown in bold type.
Before modifying the C:\config.sys and C:\autoexec.bat files, make copies of the original
versions. You cannot use the A:\CONFIG\config.sys and A:\CONFIG\autoexec.bat files on the
ANT-20 TCP/IP Interface installation disk to replace them, but you can use parts of the files to
edit the original files by using the “copy” and “paste” functions.
• Modifying C:\config.sys: [menu]

menuitem=org,Standard Mode
menuitem=tcp,CardWare and TCP/IP Stack
menudefault=tcp,10
menucolor=14,1
[cardware]
rem ---- PCMCIA Driver ----
DEVICEHIGH=C:\CARDWARE\PCSS.EXE
DEVICEHIGH=C:\CARDWARE\PCCS.EXE
DEVICE=C:\CARDWARE\PCRM.EXE /AUTODETECT
DEVICE=C:\CARDWARE\PCENABLE.EXE
DEVICE=C:\CARDWARE\PCDISK.EXE
[org]
[tcp]
include=cardware
LASTDRIVE=Z
• Modifying C:\autoexec.bat @ECHO OFF
IF NOT %CONFIG%==tcp GOTO :LABEL1

C:\WINDOWS\net start
:LABEL1
REM --- Start Windows ---

IF NOT %CONFIG%==tcp GOTO :LABEL2
WIN
GOTO :LABEL3
:LABEL2
WIN /n
:LABEL3


2. Insert the ReachOut for Windows&DOS installation disk 1 into drive A:.
A:\install
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation. Select connection type
Internet (using Windows Sockets). For detailed information refer to the ReachOut user’s
guide.
“Yes”.
reboot the ANT-20.
After this installation procedure on the ANT-20 (the “Host” in terms of ReachOut) you can start
Options” menu).
3.3.3 Software installation under Windows95
ANT-20, connect an external monitor, keyboard and mouse to the built-in PC-AT.
If you ordered the Remote Operation Option BN 3035/95.31 together with your ANT-20, the
required software packages are already installed on the ANT-20 (ReachOut in the directory
C:\REACHOUT) and the ReachOut icon is shown in the Windows95 file folder “Programs”.
The ReachOut security options are pre-configured as follows: The ReachOut “Password List”
contains an entry with the “User Name” ANT-20 and the accompanying password ANT-20. The
option “Passwords Required” is set to “No”.
For detailed information about configuration options refer to the ReachOut user‘s guide.

You now have to modify the pre-configured network setup to meet the specific requirements of
your network:

network:
network.
Modify the network configuration

In the “Control Panel” window, double-click the “Network” icon.
3. In the “Configuration” tab of the “Network” window, double-click “TCP/IP”:
In the “IP Address” tab of the “TCP/IP Properties” window set the “IP Address” of the ANT-20
and the “Subnet Mask”.
In the “Gateway” tab of the “TCP/IP Properties” window set the address of the default
gateway.
Ask your network administrator for the required entries to adapt to your network.
Confirm with OK.
4. Back in the “Network” window, choose “Identification” tab, and then set “Computer Name”
(must be unique in the network), “Workgroup” etc. to suit your requirements.
5. Reboot the ANT-20.
Installing the driver software for the SCM Ethernet LAN card
2. Insert the SCM Ethernet LAN card into a free PCMCIA socket.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions of the “Update Device Driver Wizard” to install the driver
software:
– Insert the SCM distribution disk into drive A:
– Click “Other Locations …”, and then type the following folder name into the dialog box:
A:\WIN95
– Confirm with “OK”.
Back in the Update Device Driver Wizard” window, click “Finish”.
4. After complete installation, remove the SCM distribution disk from drive A:, and answer the
question “Do you want to restart your computer now?” with “Yes”.

Verify the driver installation

To show the “SCM Ethernet Combo card Properties” window
In the “Control Panel” window, double-click the “System” icon.
3. In the “Device Manager” tab of the “System Properties” window, choose “View devices by
type”, double-click “Network adapters” in the list, and then double-click “SCM Ethernet
Combo card”.

network:
network.
Configure the network setup

3. In the “Configuration” tab of the “Network” window, click “Add …”.
4. In the “Select Network Component Type” window, double-click “Protocol”.
5. In the “Manufacturers” list of the “Select Network Protocol” window click on “Microsoft”, and
in the “Network Protocols” list click on “TCP/IP”. Confirm with “OK”.
6. Back in the “Configuration” tab of the “Network” window, remove all other protocol entries
(except TCP/IP) from the list, and then double-click on “TCP/IP”.
7. In the “IP Address” tab of the “TCP/IP Properties” window choose “Specify an IP address”
and set the “IP Address” of the ANT-20 and the “Subnet Mask”.
In the “Gateway” tab of the “TCP/IP Properties” window type the address of the default
gateway into the dialog box “New gateway”, then click “Add …”.
Ask your network administrator for the required entries to adapt to your network.
8. Back in the “Network” window, choose “Identification” tab, and then set “Computer Name”
(must be unique in the network), “Workgroup” etc. to suit your requirements.
9. Reboot the ANT-20 now.

Select the startup mode

When using the ANT-20 in remote operating mode, it is not normally desirable to receive a log-
on request during startup. When using a DominoCOM ANT-20, it is essential that the log-on
request is disabled.
To disable the log-on request
3. In the “Configuration” tab of the “Network” window, select “Windows Logon” in the “Primary
Network Logon” list and confirm with “OK”.
4. Reboot the ANT-20 now.
Verify the network installation

Test the connection to the controlling PC:
2. Click the Windows95 “Start” button, choose “Programs” and then choose “MS-DOS
Prompt”.
3. Execute C:\ping <ip_address>, where <ip_address> is the IP address of the controlling PC.
If no connection can be established,
• the C:\WINDOWS\hosts file may have incorrect or missing entries or
• the “Gateway” tab in the “TCP/IP Properties” window of the “Network” setup may have
incorrect or missing entries.

2. Insert the ReachOut for Windows & DOS installation disk 1 into drive A:.
3. Click the Windows95 “Start” button, choose “Run …” and type the following command into
the dialog box:
A:\install
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation. Select connection type
Internet (using Windows Sockets). For detailed information refer to the ReachOut user‘s
guide.
“Yes”.
5. After complete installation exit Windows95, remove the installation disk from drive A:, and
reboot the ANT-20.
After this installation procedure on the ANT-20 (the “Host” in terms of ReachOut ) you can start
Options” menu).
After installing ReachOut on the controlling PC (the “Viewer” in terms of ReachOut ) and
For detailed information refer to the ReachOut user‘s guide.

Specifications
10
Contents
Specifications
1 Generator section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2

1.1 Digital signal outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2
1.1.1 LINE signal output [15], electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2
1.1.2 LINE/AUXILIARY signal output [13], electrical . . . . . . . . . . . S-3
1.2 Clock generation and bit rates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-3
1.2.1 Internal clock generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-3
1.2.2 Synchronization to external signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-4
2 Receiver section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-5

2.1 Digital signal inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-5
2.1.1 LINE signal input [14], electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-5
2.2 LINE/AUXILIARY signal input [12], electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . S-7
2.2.1 Clock recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-8
3 DS1 and DS3 signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-9

3.1 Error insertion and alarm generation (TX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10
3.1.1 Error insertion (anomalies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10
3.1.2 Alarm generation (defects) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11
3.2 Error measurement and alarm detection (RX) . . . . . . . . . . S-12
3.2.1 Error measurement (anomalies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-12
3.2.2 Alarm detection (defects) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-13
3.3 Drop&Insert / Through Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-14
3.3.1 Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-14
3.3.2 Clock generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-15
3.3.3 Anomaly insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-15
3.3.4 Defect generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-15
3.3.5 Measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-15
4 E1 to E4 signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-16
4.1 Error insertion and alarm generation (TX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-17
4.1.1 Error insertion (anomalies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-17
4.1.2 Alarm generation (defects) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-17
i
4.2 Error measurement and alarm detection (RX) . . . . . . . . . . S-18

4.2.1 Error measurement (anomalies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-18
4.2.2 Alarm detection (defects) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-19
4.3 Drop&Insert / Through Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-20
4.3.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-20
4.3.2 Clock generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-21
4.3.3 Anomaly insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-21
4.3.4 Defect generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-21
4.3.5 Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-21
5 Measurement modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-22

5.1 Evaluation to ANSI/BELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-22
5.2 Evaluation to ITU-T G.821 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-22
5.6 Evaluation to ITU-T M.2100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-25
5.7 Evaluation to ITU-T M.2101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-26
6 Automatic measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-27

6.1 Auto configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-27
6.1.1 Check Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-27
6.1.2 Check Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-27
6.1.3 Check Payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-28
6.1.3.1 PDH signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-28
6.1.3.2 ATM signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-28
6.1.4 Structure and results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-29
6.2 Automatic “Scan” function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-30
6.3 Automatic “Search” function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-31
6.4 Automatic “Trouble Scan” function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-32
6.5 Automatic “Signal Delay” measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-34
7 Other inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-36

7.1 DCC/ECC [21]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-36
7.2 TRIGGER [26]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-37
7.3 REF CLOCK IN [25] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-37
7.4 CLOCK [22]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-38
ii
8 Built-in operation and control computer (PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-39
9 General specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-42

9.1 Power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-42
9.2 Climatic and mechanical ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . S-42
9.2.1 Climatic and mechanical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-43
9.3 EC conformance declaration/CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-43
9.3.1 EMC interference suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-43
9.3.2 EMC interference immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-44
9.4 Noise emission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-45
9.5 Calibration/Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-45
9.6 Dimensions/Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-45
9.7 Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-46
9.7.1 Mainframe ANT-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-46
9.7.2 Mainframe ANT-20E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-46
9.7.3 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-47
9.7.4 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-49
9.7.5 Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-50
9.7.6 Test automation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-50
9.7.7 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-50
9.7.8 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-50
9.7.9 Retrofitting of options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-50
iii
Notes:
iv
Specifications
The numbers in square brackets […] correspond to the numbers printed on the instrument.
Calibrated specifications for the SDH Version ANT-20 3035/01 or ANT-20E 3035/21
are marked ***.
Calibrated specifications for the SONET Version ANT-20 3035/02 or ANT-20E 3035/22
are marked **.
Specifications S-1
1 Generator section
1.1 Digital signal outputs
1.1.1 LINE signal output [15], electrical
Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . unbalanced (coaxial)
Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UNI 9 (Versacon)
Output impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Ω
Max. applied peak voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ± 5 V
Interface3 Bit rate Line code Output voltage Output voltage Reflexion
(Mbit/s) tolerance coefficient
STS-3 155.520 *** CMI ± 0.5 V ± 0.05 V ≥ 15 dB

STM-1 ** 100 kHz to
240 MHz
STM-0 51.840 ** HDB3 ± 1.0 V ± 0.1 V ≥ 18 dB

50 kHz to 52 MHz
STS-1 B3ZS DS High: ± 0.909 V
DS3 44.7362 B3ZS DSX3: High + Sim 450

feet 728A cable4
DS Low: High -13.8 dB4
DS2 6.3122 B8ZS ± 2 V4 ± 0.2 V
DS1 1.5442 B8ZS, ± 2.37 V ± 0.237 V

AMI
E4 139.2641 CMI ± 0.5 V ± 0.05 V ≥ 15 dB

100 kHz to
240 MHz
E3 34.3681 *** HDB3 ± 1.0 V ± 0.1 V ≥ 18 dB

50 kHz to 52 MHz
E2 8.4481 HDB3 ± 2.37 V ± 0.2 V
E1 2.0481 HDB3
1 3035/02 requires option 3035/90.33
2 3035/01 requires option 3035/90.34
3 depends on ANT-20 versions and options
4 from H series onwards
Table S-1 LINE output [15] signal specifications, electrical
S-2 Specifications
1.1.2 LINE/AUXILIARY signal output [13], electrical
Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . balanced
Socket: 3035/01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lemo SA

Socket: 3035/02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bantam
Output impedance
2.048 Mbit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Ω
1.544 Mbit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Ω
Max. applied peak voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ± 5 V
Bit rate (Mbit/s) Line code Output voltage Output voltage Reflexion
tolerance coefficient
2.0481 *** HDB3 ± 3.0 V ± 0.3 V ≥ 18 dB

50 kHz to 3 MHz
1.5442 ** B8ZS, AMI DSX-1 compatible
1 3035/02 requires option 3035/90.33
2 3035/01 requires option 3035/90.34
Table S-2 LINE/AUXILIARY output [13] signal specifications, electrical
1.2 Clock generation and bit rates
1.2.1 Internal clock generation
Bit rate range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.544 Mbit/s to 155.52 Mbit/s
Frequency deviation ***, ** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .± 2 ppm ±1 ppm/year
Settable offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ± 500 ppm
Minimum setting step width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.001 ppm (1 ppb)
Intrinsic jitter (clock) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.010 UI
Specifications S-3
1.2.2 Synchronization to external signals
Derived from RX clock
The TX bit rate is derived from the RX clock. The jitter of the incoming signal is suppressed.
TX side offset setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ± 500 ppm
Limit frequency above which jitter is suppressed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . approx. 100 Hz
Max. permissible receive clock (receive signal) offset:

TX bit rate ≥ 51.84 Mbit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ± 10 ppm
TX bit rate < 51.84 Mbit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 ppm
No TX offset is possible for DROP&INSERT operation (Option 3035/90.20).
Derived from reference clock

The TX bit rate is derived from:
• reference clock T3 (2.048 MHz)
• data signal 2.048 Mbit/s
• reference clock DS1 (1.544 MHz)
• data signal 1.544 Mbit/s
The jitter in the incoming signal is suppressed (see Sec. 7.3, Page S-37).
Settable offset, referred to 1.544 MHz or 2.048 MHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ± 500 ppm
Limit frequency above which jitter is suppressed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . approx. 1 Hz
Max. permissible reference signal offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ≤ 10 ppm
S-4 Specifications
2 Receiver section
2.1 Digital signal inputs
2.1.1 LINE signal input [14], electrical
Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . unbalanced (coaxial)
Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UNI 9 (Versacon )
Input impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Ω
Max. permissible frequency offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ± 500 ppm
Max. number of consecutive zeros for

code = AMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Switchable input voltage ranges ***, **

“ITU-T” (“High”) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 dB attenuation referred to nominal level
“PMP” (“Low”) CMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 to 23 dB attenuation referred to nominal level
“PMP” (“Low”) B3ZS, B8ZS, HDB3, AMI . . . . 15 to 26 dB attenuation referred to nominal level
Max. peak input voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ± 5 V
Specifications S-5
Interface3 Bit rate (Mbit/s) Line code Signal equalization Reflexion coefficient
(adaptive)
STS-3 155.520 CMI max. 12.7 dB/78 MHz ≥ 15 dB

STM-1 100 kHz to 240 MHz
STM-0 51.840 HDB3 max. 12 dB/17 MHz4 ≥ 18 dB

50 kHz to 52 MHz
STS-1 B3ZS
DS3 44.7362 B3ZS
DS1 1.5442 B8ZS, AMI max. 6 dB/0.772 MHz5
DS2 6.3122 B8ZS max. 6 dB/3 MHz ≥ 18 dB

100 kHz to 52 MHz
E4 139.2641 CMI max. 12 dB/70 MHz ≥ 15 dB

100 kHz to 240 MHz
E3 34.3681 HDB3 max. 12 dB/17 MHz ≥ 18 dB

50 kHz to 52 MHz
E2 8.4481 HDB3 max. 6 dB/4 MHz
E1 2.0481 HDB3 max. 6 dB/1 MHz

1 3035/02 requires option 3035/90.33
2 3035/01 requires option 3035/90.34
3 depends on ANT-20 versions and options
4 Adaptive equalizer allows ≥ 450 ft 728A cable (DSX3 level)
5 Adaptive equalizer allows ≥ 655 ft 22AWG cable
Table S-3 LINE input [14] signal specifications, electrical
Tolerance to jitter
Measured using PRBS 15 (≥ 8 Mbit/s) and PRBS 23 (> 8 Mbit/s) with “ITU-T” and “PMP” receive
levels attenuated by 20 dB referred to the nominal level.
Jitter amplitude
A1
A2
f2 f3 f4 Jitter frequency
Fig. S-1 Relationship between jitter amplitude and jitter frequency
S-6 Specifications
Bit rate Line code A1 f2 A2 f3 f4

Mbit/s UIpp kHz UIpp kHz kHz
1.5442 B8ZS 5 0.5 0.25 20 200
2.0481 HDB3 10 0.5 0.25 20 200
6.312 B8ZS 10 1.5 0.25 60 600
8.4481 HDB3 10 2 0.25 80 800
34.3681 HDB3 10 6 0.25 240 2000
44.7362 B3ZS 10 6 0.25 240 2000
51.840 B3ZS 10 6 0.25 240 2000
139.2641 CMI 10 20 0.25 800 3500
155.520 CMI 10 22 0.25 880 3500

1 3035/02 requires option 3035/90.33
2 3035/01 requires option 3035/90.34
Table S-4 ANT-20 tolerance to jitter at system bit rates
LOS (Loss of Signal) status display

LED is on if the signal input is active but no signal is present.
2.2 LINE/AUXILIARY signal input [12], electrical
Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . balanced
Socket: 3035/01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lemo SA

Socket: 3035/02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bantam
Input impedance
2.048 Mbit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Ω
1.544 Mbit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Ω
Max. permissible frequency offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ± 500 ppm

Max. number of
consecutive zeros for code = AMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Switchable input voltage ranges

“ITU-T” (“High”) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 dB attenuation referred to nominal level
“PMP” (“Low”) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 to 26 dB attenuation referred to nominal level
Specifications S-7
Bit rate (Mbit/s) Line code Reflection

coefficient
2.0481 HDB3 ≥ 18 dB
50 kHz to 3 MHz
1.5442 B8ZS, AMI
1 3035/02 requires option 3035/90.33
2 3035/01 requires option 3035/90.34
Table S-5 Input signal specifications “LINE/AUXILIARY” [12], electrical
Tolerance to jitter
As per Tab. S-4, Page S-7
LOS (Loss of Signal) status display

LED is on if the signal input is active but no signal is present.
2.2.1 Clock recovery
The appropriate bit clock is derived from the input signal and the offset from the nominal clock
rate is measured.
Offset display, in ppm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-digit
Display resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ppm
No offset measurement is possible for “Through Mode” and “TX clock from RX”.
The recovered clock can be used for synchronizing the TX bit rate (see Sec. 1.2.2, Page S-4).
S-8 Specifications
3 DS1 and DS3 signals

Available with ANT-20 version 3035/02 or
with ANT-20 version 3035/01 and option 3035/90.34.
Test signals for bit error measurements.
Signal structure for all bit rates

• unframed test pattern
• framed test pattern (except DS2)
Test pattern
Digital word. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . length 16 bits
Pseudo-random bit sequences. . . . . . .PRBS 11, PRBS 11 invers, PRBS 15, PRBS 15 invers,
PRBS 20, PRBS 23, PRBS 23 invers,
QRSS 20 (QRSS 20 with max. 14 zeros)
Frames
DS3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M13 frame, C-Parity
DS2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . unframed only
DS1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D4 (SF), ESF (ANSI T1.107)
Specifications S-9
3.1 Error insertion and alarm generation (TX)
3.1.1 Error insertion (anomalies)
Error insertion (anomalies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bit errors in test pattern (TSE),

code errors (single errors only)
Trigger types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single

or Rate
Tip: When Rate triggering is selected a bit error rate is inserted.
Anomaly Single Rate1
FE-DS1 yes 2E-3 to 1E-8
CRC6 yes 2E-3 to 1E-8
FE-DS3 yes 2E-3 to 1E-8
P-Parity-DS3 yes 2E-3 to 1E-8
CP-Parity-DS3 yes 2E-3 to 1E-8
FEBE-DS3 (REI 45) yes 2E-3 to 1E-8
TSE yes 1E-2 to 1E-8
BPV yes -
1 Mantissa: 1 to 9 (only 1 for TSE), exponent: -1 to -8 (whole numbers)
Table S-6 Available anomalies and trigger modes
The insertion of errors (anomalies) and alarms (defects) is mutually exclusive. The first action
selected is active. The second action is rejected.
S-10 Specifications
3.1.2 Alarm generation (defects)
Defect Test sensor Test sensor threshold

function
AIS-DS1, AIS-DS3, On/Off -

IDLE-DS3, FEAC-DS3
LOF-DS1 On/Off 2/4, 2/5, 2/61
LOF-DS3 On/Off 2/2, 2/3, 3/3, 3/15, 3/16, 3/171
YELLOW-DS1, On/Off -
YELLOW-DS3 (RDI)
1 (see Tab. S-8)
Table S-7 Available defects
DS1 DS3 Insertion
2 in 4 - 1st and 4th Ft bit in every second (E)SF inverted
- 2 in 2 1st and 2nd F bit in every multiframe inverted
- 2 in 3 1st and 3rd F bit in every multiframe inverted
- 3 in 3 1st, 2nd and 3rd F bit in every multiframe inverted
- 3 in 15 1st, 8th and 15th F bit in every multiframe inverted
Table S-8 DS1/DS3 alarm generation
Specifications S-11
3.2 Error measurement and alarm detection (RX)
3.2.1 Error measurement (anomalies)
Evaluation
All errors (anomalies) are counted simultaneously and stored.
.
Gate times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 99 seconds

or 1 to 99 minutes
or 1 to 99 hours
or 1 to 99 days
Intermediate results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 99 seconds

or 1 to 99 minutes
Display
of anomalies via LEDs:
CURRENT LED (red) is on when the anomaly is present
HISTORY LED (yellow) is on if the anomaly occurred at least once or is active within the
started measurement interval.
Anomaly LED
FE-DS1, FE-DS3, MFE-DS3 FAS/CRC
CRC6 FAS/CRC
P-DS3, CP-DS3 -
TSE TSE
BPV -
DS3-REI -
Table S-9 LED display of available anomalies
S-12 Specifications
3.2.2 Alarm detection (defects)
Evaluation
All alarms (defects) which occur are evaluated simultaneously where possible and stored.
Storage takes place only within a started measurement interval
.
Time resolution of defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 ms
Display
of defects via LEDs:
CURRENT LED (red) is on when the defect is present.
HISTORY LED (yellow) is on if the defect occurred at least once or is active within the
Defect LED
AIS-DS1, AIS-DS3 AIS
LOF-DS3, OOF-DS3 LOF/LCD

LOF-DS1, OOF-DS1
DS1-YELLOW, DS3-YELLOW RDI(AIS-)/YELLOW
IDLE-DS3, FEAC-DS3 -
Table S-10 LED display of available defects
Tip: DS3-AIC is used for autoconfiguring the instrument and can only be read out via remote
control.
Specifications S-13
3.3 Drop&Insert / Through Mode
Option: BN 3035/90.20
3.3.1 Functions
This Option provides the following functions for all PDH multiplex options fitted to the ANT-20.
Drop&Insert
This function is only available in conjunction with the following options:
• PDH MUX/DEMUX chain: BN 3035/90.30 to BN 3035/90.31

M13 MUX/DEMUX chain: BN 3035/90.32
– or –
• STM-1 mappings: BN 3035/90.01 to BN 3035/90.05

STS-1 mappings: BN 3035/90.10 to BN 3035/90.13
– or –
• Optical interfaces: BN 3035/90.40 to BN 3035/90.48

BN 3035/90.50 and BN 3035/90.51
The characteristics and specifications for the Drop&Insert function are given in the descriptions
for the various options.
Through Mode
The received signal is looped through the ANT-20 and re-transmitted by the generator.
The ANT-20 operates in Through Mode as a signal monitor without affecting the signal.
Fig. S-2 Through Mode: Generator and receiver coupled
The ANT-20 provides access to the tributary channels within the “MUX/DEMUX” chain when
used in conjunction with the “PDH MUX/DEMUX” and “M13 MUX/DEMUX” options, BN 3035/
90.30 to BN 3035/90.32. This also applies if the PDH signal is transmitted in a container.
The looped-through signal can also be jittered using the Jitter Generator options (Jitter
Generator up to 155 or 622 Mbit/s, BN 3035/90.60 to 61). This function is available for all bit
rates fitted to the instrument.
S-14 Specifications
Fig. S-3 Through Mode: Adding jitter to the looped-through signal
3.3.2 Clock generator
Through Mode
In Through Mode, clock generation is always derived from the receive signal clock.
No offset is possible in this operating mode (see Sec. 1.2.2, Page S-4).
3.3.3 Anomaly insertion
Through Mode
Anomaly insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BPV, B1, B2 and REI-L
3.3.4 Defect generation
Through Mode
Defect generation is not possible.
3.3.5 Measurements
There are no restrictions on measurements (see Sec. 3.2, Page S-12).
Specifications S-15
4 E1 to E4 signals
Available with ANT-20 version 3035/01 or
with ANT-20 version 3035/02 and option 3035/90.33.
Test signals for bit error measurements.
Signal structure for all bit rates

• unframed test pattern
• framed test pattern
Test pattern
Digital word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . length 16 bits
Pseudo-random bit sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRBS 11, PRBS11 invers, PRBS 15,

PRBS 20, PRBS 23, PRBS 23 invers
Frames
E1 (2.048 Mbit/s; G.704/706) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM 30/31 with and without CRC
E2 (8.448 Mbit/s; G.742) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM 120
E3 (34.368 Mbit/s; G.751) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM 480
E4 (139.264 Mbit/s; G.751) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM 1920
S-16 Specifications
4.1 Error insertion and alarm generation (TX)
4.1.1 Error insertion (anomalies)
Error insertion (anomalies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bit errors in test pattern (TSE),

code errors (single errors only)
Trigger types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Single

or Rate
Tip: When Rate triggering is selected a bit error rate is inserted.
Anomaly Single Rate1
FAS-140, FAS-3, FAS-8, FAS-2 yes 2E-3 to 1E-8
TSE yes 1E-2 to 1E-8
BPV yes -
1 Mantissa: 1 to 9 (only 1 for TSE), exponent: -1 to -10 (whole numbers)
Table S-11 Available anomalies and trigger modes
4.1.2 Alarm generation (defects)

.
Defect Test sensor function Test sensor thresholds
- On/Off M in N
AIS-140, AIS-34, yes -

AIS-8, AIS-2
LOF-140, LOF-34, yes M = 1 to N-1

LOF-8, LOF-2 N = 1 to 1000
RDI -140, RDI-34, yes M = 1 to N-1

RDI-8, RDI-2 N = 1 to 1000
Table S-12 Available defects
The insertion of alarms (defects) and errors (anomalies) is mutually exclusive. The first action
Specifications S-17
4.2 Error measurement and alarm detection (RX)
4.2.1 Error measurement (anomalies)
Evaluation
All errors (anomalies) are counted simultaneously and stored.
.
Gate times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 99 seconds

or 1 to 99 minutes
or 1 to 99 hours
or 1 to 99 days
Intermediate results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 99 seconds

or 1 to 99 minutes
Display
of anomalies via LEDs:
CURRENT LED (red) is on when the anomaly is present
HISTORY LED (yellow) is on if the anomaly occurred at least once or is active within the
Anomaly LED
FAS-140, FAS-34, FAS-8, FAS-2 FAS/CRC
CRC-41 FAS/CRC
E bit1 -
TSE TSE
BPV -
1 Requires option 3035/90.30 or 3035/90.31
Table S-13 LED display of available anomalies
S-18 Specifications
4.2.2 Alarm detection (defects)
Evaluation
All alarms (defects) which occur are evaluated simultaneously where possible and stored.
Storage takes place only within a started measurement interval.
Time resolution of defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 ms
Display
Defect LED
AIS-140, AIS-34, AIS-8, AIS-2, AIS-64k AIS
LOF-140, LOF-34, LOF-8, LOF-2 LOF/LCD
LSS LSS
RDI-140, RDI-34, RDI-8, RDI-2 RDI(AIS-)/YELLOW
Table S-14 LED display of available defects
Specifications S-19
4.3 Drop&Insert / Through Mode
Option: BN 3035/90.20
4.3.1 Functions
This Option provides the following functions for all PDH multiplex options fitted to the ANT-20.
Drop&Insert
This function is only available in conjunction with the following options:
• PDH MUX/DEMUX
M13 MUX/DEMUX: BN 3035/90.30 to BN 3035/90.32
– or –
• STM-1 mappings: BN 3035/90.01 to BN 3035/90.05

STS-1 mappings: BN 3035/90.10 to BN 3035/90.13
– or –
• Optical interfaces BN 3035/90.40 to BN 3035/90.48

BN 3035/90.50 and BN 3035/90.51
The characteristics and specifications for the Drop&Insert function are given in the descriptions
for the various options.
Through Mode
The received signal is looped through the ANT-20 and re-transmitted by the generator.
The ANT-20 operates in Through Mode as a signal monitor without affecting the signal.
Fig. S-4 Through Mode: Generator and receiver coupled
The ANT-20 provides access to the tributary channels within the “MUX/DEMUX” chain when
used in conjunction with the “PDH MUX/DEMUX” and “M13 MUX/DEMUX” options, BN 3035/
90.30 to BN 3035/90.32. This also applies if the PDH signal is transmitted in a container.
The looped-through signal can also be jittered using the Jitter Generator options (Jitter
Generator up to 155 or 622 Mbit/s, BN 3035/90.60 to 61). This function is available for all bit
rates fitted to the instrument.
S-20 Specifications
Fig. S-5 Through Mode: Adding jitter to the looped-through signal
4.3.2 Clock generator
Through Mode
In Through Mode, clock generation is always derived from the receive signal clock.
No offset is possible in this operating mode (see Sec. 1.2.2, Page S-4).
4.3.3 Anomaly insertion
Through Mode
Anomaly insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BPV, B1, B2 and MS-REI
4.3.4 Defect generation
Through Mode
Defect generation is not possible.
4.3.5 Measurements
There are no restrictions on measurements (see Sec. 4.2, Page S-18).
Specifications S-21
5 Measurement modes
5.1 Evaluation to ANSI/BELL
Evaluations can be performed on the following levels (alternatives):
• SONET: Section, line, STS path, VT path

• DS3: Line, path
• DS1: Line, path
• Bit
“Near End” and “Far End” analyses are performed simultaneously if available.
ES, SES, EFS, SEFS and UAS are evaluated.
The SES and UAS threshold settings correspond to GR-253 (Performance Monitoring) and
T1.231.
5.2 Evaluation to ITU-T G.821
ES, EFS, SES and UAS are evaluated; DM (degraded minutes) are also evaluated.
The multiplex factor used in older versions of Recommendation G.821 (Annex D) can be
applied if required.
• FAS bit errors (FAS 2, FAS 8, FAS 34, FAS 140)
• CRC errors
• E bit errors
• Bit errors (TSE, Test Sequence Error)
The following signals can be measured when performing G.821 evaluation of bit errors (TSE):
• unframed patterns
• n x 64 kbit/s
• framed patterns and bulk signals
• Overhead bytes E1, E2, F1, F2, D1 to D3 and D4 to D12
Pass/fail assessment in conjunction with path allocation of between 0.1 and 100%.
The SES threshold can be set as required.
Since G.821 evaluation requires evaluation of bit errors, facilities for evaluating block errors are
disabled.
Display
S-22 Specifications
The following are evaluated: EB, BBE, ES, EFS, SES and UAS.
Pass/Fail assessment depending on path allocation of 0.1 to 100%.
The thresholds for SES and UAS can be set by the user.
In-service measurement (ISM)

Simultaneous in-service measurement of “near end” and “far end” of a selected path:
Near end: HP-B3, LP-B3, BIP2, FAS bei 140/34/8 oder 2M, CRC 4, DS3FAS,
DS3-P-Parity, DS3-C-Parity, DS1FAS, D1-CRC6
Far end: HP-REI, LP-REI, E-Bit bei 2M, DS3-FEBE
Out-of-service measurement (OOS)

Out-of-service measurement using bit errors in a test pattern (for PDH and SDH).
Display
ES, EFS, SES, UAS, BBE and SEP are evaluated.

Pass/fail assessment in conjunction with path allocation of between 0.1 and 100%.
The thresholds for SES and UAS can be set by the user.
• B1
• B2SUM
• MS-REI
• B3
• HP-REI
• LP-BIP 2/8
• LP-REI
Evaluation of the near end and the far end is simultaneous as soon as the signal structure set
allows a far end measurement.
Far end evaluations can only be made if REI is available.
Specifications S-23
Bit errors can be evaluated for:

of SDH signals
As the G.828 evaluation measures block errors, bit error evaluation cannot be activated.
Display
of defects using LED indicators
(also in the Anomaly/Defect Analyzer – Summary display window):
ES, EFS, SES, UAS and BBE are evaluated..

The SES threshold can be set as required.
• B1
• B2SUM
• MS-REI
• Bit errrors (TSE)
of SDH signals
The special block error evaluation using BIP-1 blocks means that the instrument is run in bit er-
ror evaluation mode. It is therefore not possible to switch to block error evaluation. This does not
apply to the TSE meas. point, for which real block errors are evaluated. Therefore you cannot
switch to bit error evaluation when making a G.829 evaluation on TSEs.
S-24 Specifications
Display
5.6 Evaluation to ITU-T M.2100
ES, EFS, SES and UAS are evaluated.

Pass/Unknown/Fail assessment based on the threshold values S1 and S2 for ES and SES. The
threshold values are calculated internally as per M.2100 and displayed in the results window.
Settings for S1 and S2:
Path allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.1 to 100%
BISO (“Bringing into Service Objectives”) multiplication factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.1 to 100

• CRC-4 errors
• CRC-6 errors
• EBIT errors
• PBIT errors
For PCM30CRC signals, evaluation is made at the “Near End” and at the “Far End”
simultaneously.
• n x 64 kbit/s
• Overhead bytes E1, E2, F1, F2, D1 to D3 and D4 to D12
Since M.2100 evaluation requires evaluation of bit errors, facilities for evaluating block errors
are disabled.
Display
Specifications S-25
5.7 Evaluation to ITU-T M.2101
ES, EFS, SES, UAS, BBE and SEP are evaluated.

Pass/Unknown/Fail assessment based on the threshold values S1 and S2 for ES, SES, BBE
and SEP. The threshold values are calculated internally as per M.2101 and displayed in the
results window.
Settings for S1 and S2:
Path allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.1 to 100%
BISO (“Bringing into Service Objectives”) multiplication factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.1 to 100

• B1
• B2SUM
• MS-REI
• B3
• HP-REI
• LP-BIP 2/8
• LP-REI
of SDH signals
As the M.2101 evaluation measures block errors, bit error evaluation cannot be activated.
Exception: B2SUM. BIP-1 blocks are used for this. These are only accessible in the instrument
via a bit error measurement. For this reason, block error evaluation is not available for a M.2101
evaluation on B2SUM.
Display
of defects via LEDs
S-26 Specifications
6 Automatic measurements
6.1 Auto configuration
The auto configuration function sets the ANT-20 receiver automatically. The routine searches
for the presence of standard SDH, SONET, PDH or ATM signals at the electrical inputs (for the
input level ranges “ITU-T”/“High” or “PMP”/“Low”), or at the optical inputs. The instrument
version and options fitted are taken into account. The main emphasis is placed on detecting the
signal structure. Detailed matching to the signal contents can be carried out manually if desired.
The sequence is divided into three parts:
• Check Interface
• Check Mapping
• Check Payload
6.1.1 Check Interface
Matching to the physical parameters (bit rate/code)
Allowed-for defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOS
Other factors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . input bit rate frequency offset > 150 ppm
6.1.2 Check Mapping
A check is made for the mapping structure using the Signal Label and the pointer bytes (to
differentiate between AU-4 and AU-3). The check is always made in channel #1.
With STM-16 / OC-48 signals, a check is made for an AU-4 structure only in “ITU-T” mode or for
an AU-3 structure only in “ANSI” mode.
OC-12c/STM-4c Virtual Concatenation is not recognized by the autoconfiguration function.
Allowed-for defects:
Defect (SDH) Defect (SONET)
LOF/OOF LOF/OOF
AU-AIS AIS-P
MS-AIS AIS-L
TU-AIS AIS-V
AU-LOP LOP-P
TU-LOP LOP-V
LOM LOM
Table S-15 Defects allowed for during auto configuration
If UNEQuipped is detected, the mapping previously selected or a default mapping will be set.
Auto configuration recognizes “C-11 via TU-12” mapping as “C-12” mapping.
Specifications S-27
6.1.3 Check Payload
The check only takes account of the test patterns recommended in the relevant standards.
6.1.3.1 PDH signals
Checks for unframed or framed payload signals on all hierarchy levels
Allowed-for defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOF/(OOF)

AIS
6.1.3.2 ATM signals
Checks for ATM signals
Allowed-for defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOF/(OOF), AIS, LCD

LOF PLCP, AIC, IDLE DS3
S-28 Specifications
6.1.4 Structure and results
STM-64 opt. unequipped (HO) 140 unframed

OC-192 C4 (140 Mbit/s) 140 framed
Check Check Check
STM-16 opt.
INTER- MAPPING C4 (ATM) PAY- 140/34 framed
FACE OC-48 C4 BULK (O.181) LOAD
140/8 framed
STM-4 opt. C4-4c (ATM) 140/2 framed
OC-12 140/2 CRC framed
C4-4c BULK (O.181)
STM-1 opt.
C4-16c BULK (O.181)
OC-3 34 unframed
unequipped (LO)
OC-1 34 framed
STM-0 opt. 34/8 framed

C3 (34 Mbit/s)
STM-1 el. 34/2 framed
C3 (45 Mbit/s)
STS-3 34/2 CRC framed
C3 (ATM)
STM-0 el. C3 BULK (O.181)
8 unframed
STS-1
C2 (6 Mbit/s) 8 framed
STM-16 unbal. NRZ
C2 BULK 8/2 framed
STM-16 unbal. NRZ
8/2 CRC framed
STM-1 unbal. NRZ
C12 asynch. (2 Mbit/s)
C12 bytesync. (2 Mbit/s) 2 unframed
C12 BULK (O.181) 2 framed
2 CRC framed
C11 asynch. (1.5 Mbit/s)

ATM (STM4/STS12)
C11 bytesync. (1.5 Mbit/s)
ATM (STM1/STS3)
C11 bitsync. (1.5 Mbit/s)
ATM (STS1)
C11 BULK (O.181)
ATM (E4)
uncertain ATM (DS3, PLCP)
ATM (E3)
140 Mbit/s (E4) ATM (E1)
34 Mbit/s (E3) ATM (DS1)
8 Mbit/s (E2)
DS3 unframed
2 Mbit/s (E1) (bal/unbal)
DS3 framed (M13)
DS3 framed (C-Par)
DS3
DS3/DS1 (C-Par/ESF)
DS2
DS3/DS1 (C-Par/SF)
DS1 (bal/unbal)
DS3/DS1 (M13/ESF)
DS3/DS1 (M13/ESF)
Autoconfiguration failed
DS2 unframed
DS1 unframed
DS1 framed (ESF)
DS1 framed (SF)
uncertain
Fig. S-6 Structure and results
Specifications S-29
6.2 Automatic “Scan” function
The “Scan” function permits sequential testing of all tributary channels in an SDH or SONET
signal. The appropriate mapping options are needed for this.
SDH signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-12 mapping

C-11 mapping
C-11/TU-12 mapping
C2 mapping
SONET signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VT1.5 mapping

VT2 mapping
VT6 mapping
The test is performed within an AU (SDH version) or a SPE (SONET version). Selection of the
various AUs / SPEs for signals with higher bit rates is done manually.
The settings for the generator and receiver must be matched for loop measurements.
The channel scan takes place synchronously on the transmit and receive sides. If the signal
structure settings differ, only the receive channel settings will be altered.
The ANT-20 receiver checks the receive signal defects and those of the corresponding SDH or
SONET structure and of the channel and enters the results of the single channels in a matrix.
LOS LOS
LOF/OOF (SDH) LOF/OOF (SONET)
AU-AIS AIS-P
MS-AIS AIS-L
TU-AIS AIS-V
AU-LOP LOP-P
TU-LOP LOP-V
HP-UNEQ UNEQ-P
LP-UNEQ UNEQ-V
TU-LOM LOM
AIS (2 Mbit/s) AIS (E1)
LOF (2 Mbit/s) LOF (E1)
AIS (1.5 Mbit/s) AIS (DS1)
LOF (1.5 Mbit/s) LOF (DS1)
OOF (1.5 Mbit/s) OOF (DS1)
AIS (64 kbit/s) AIS (64 kbit/s)
LSS LSS
Table S-16 Defects allowed for during the “Scan” function
S-30 Specifications
6.3 Automatic “Search” function
The “Search” function allows you to search for a tributary channel in a SDH or SONET signal.
The appropriate mapping options are needed for this.
SDH signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12 mapping

C-11 mapping
C-11/TU-12 mapping
C2 mapping

VT2 mapping
VT6 mapping
During the search, only the receive channels are altered.
LOS LOS
AU-AIS AIS-P
MS-AIS AIS-L
TU-AIS AIS-V
AU-LOP LOP-P
TU-LOP LOP-V
HP-UNEQ UNEQ-P
LP-UNEQ UNEQ-V
TU-LOM LOM
AIS (64 kbit/s) AIS (64 kbit/s)
LSS LSS
Table S-17 Defects allowed for in the “Search” function
Specifications S-31
6.4 Automatic “Trouble Scan” function
The “Trouble Scan” function permits sequential testing of all tributary channels in an SDH or
SONET signal. The appropriate mapping options are needed for this.
SDH signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-12 mapping

C-11 mapping
C-11/TU-12 mapping
C2 mapping

VT2 mapping
VT6 mapping
During the “Trouble Scan”, only the receive channels are altered.
You can display a detailed alarm history by selecting an individual channel from within the
matrix.
LOS LOS
AU-AIS AIS-P
MS-AIS AIS-L
TU-AIS AIS-V
AU-LOP LOP-P
TU-LOP LOP-V
MS-RDI RDI-L
HP-RDI RDI-P
LP-RDI RDI-V
HP-UNEQ UNEQ-P
LP-UNEQ UNEQ-V
TU-LOM LOM
HP-PDI PDI-P
LP-PDI PDI-V
RDI (2 Mbit/s) RDI (E1)
Table S-18 Defects allowed for in the “Trouble Scan” function
S-32 Specifications
YELLOW (1.5 Mbit/s) YELLOW (DS1)
Table S-18 Defects allowed for in the “Trouble Scan” function (continued)
Specifications S-33
6.5 Automatic “Signal Delay” measurement
The ANT-20 measures the signal delay between the generator and receiver using characteristic
sequences in the selected PRBS. The signal delay measurement is automatic and continuous,
i.e. individual measurements are repeatedly performed. Practically any signal structure that can
be set on the ANT-20 can be used for the measurement.
Exceptions:
• ATM signal structures
• Overhead measurements
• Through Mode
• ADM test
The measurement range and measurement time depend on the pattern bit rate and the selected
pattern.
The maximum possible measurement value depends on the length of the PRBS. The maximum
value is calculated and shown in the results window. This value can be influenced by selecting
a shorter or a longer test pattern.
Signal structure Short test pattern Max. measured Long test pattern Max. measured
value, in ms value, in ms
C4 Bulk PRBS231 56 - 56
C3 Bulk PRBS231 173 - 173
C2 Bulk PRBS20 154 PRBS23 1236
140M unframed PRBS231 60 - 60
140M framed PRBS231 60 - 60
45M framed PRBS231 189 - 189

34M framed PRBS231 246 - 246
8M unframed PRBS20 124 PRBS23 992
8M framed PRBS20 125 PRBS23 985
6M framed PRBS20 169 PRBS23 1356
2M framed PCM30 PRBS20 546 PRBS23 4369
2M framed PCM31 PRBS20 528 PRBS23 4228
1.5M unframed PRBS20 679 PRBS23 5433
1.5M framed PRBS20 682 PRBS23 5461

1 Measurement only possible with this test pattern
2 depending on n
Table S-19 Max. measurement values as a function of signal structure and test pattern
S-34 Specifications
Signal structure Short test pattern Max. measured Long test pattern Max. measured
value, in ms value, in ms
n x 64 k unframed PRBS20 511 to 6552 PRBS23 4095 to 52422

(25 ≤ n ≤ 32)
(17 ≤ n ≤ 24)

(9 ≤ n ≤ 16)

(2 ≤ n ≤ 8)
64k unframed PRBS15 511 PRBS20 16383
1 Measurement only possible with this test pattern
2 depending on n
Table S-19 Max. measurement values as a function of signal structure and test pattern (continued)
The accuracy and display resolution also depend on the pattern bit rate.
Pattern bit rate Accuracy Resolution
64 kbit/s < 1.544 Mbit/s ± 200 µsec 100 µsec
1.544 Mbit/s ≤ 8.448 Mbit/s ± 10 µsec 10 µsec
> 8.448 Mbit/s ± 1 µsec 1 µsec
Table S-20 Delay measurement accuracy as a function of pattern bit rate
Specifications S-35
7 Other inputs and outputs
7.1 DCC/ECC [21]
Interface for inserting/outputting TOH/POH bytes.

The bytes are filled dynamically in real-time with a contradirectional clock and synchronization
signal for n x 64 kbit/s channels per frame.
The clock signal is smoothed. The RX data signal is sampled on the falling edge of the RX clock.
Exchange of TX data takes place on the rising edge of the TX clock.
64 kbit/s: 1 byte/frame
128 kbit/s: 2 bytes/frame
Interface to. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V.11 (ITU-T X.24 and X.27)
Socket [21]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MINI DELTA RIBBON, 20-pole
Pin no. Signal Input/Output
1 Ground
2 Ground
3 RX data Input
4 RX data (inv) Input
5 RX control Output
6 RX control (inv) Output
7 RX clock Input/Output
8 RX clock (inv) Input/Output
9 RX synch Input/Output
10 RX synch (inv) Input/Output
11 TX data Output
12 TX data (inv) Output
13 TX control Output
14 TX control (inv) Output
15 TX clock Output
16 TX clock (inv) Output
17 TX synch Output
18 TX synch (inv) Output
19 Ground
20 +5 V/100 mA
(inv): inverted signal
Table S-21 DCC/ECC interface pin signals (V.11)
S-36 Specifications
7.2 TRIGGER [26]
Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BNC
Input
Permitted pulse amplitude range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HCMOS level
Output
Reference clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.048 MHz

(derived form internal reference or from
external reference clock [25])
TSE (Test Sequence Error) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RZ pulses
TX frame trigger (SDH and SONET signal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RZ pulses
TX pattern trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RZ pulses

(not for “140 Mbit/s unframed/framed” with digital word)
Pulse amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HCMOS level
Max. permitted peak applied voltage level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ± 6 V
7.3 REF CLOCK IN [25]
Reference clock input
SDH version 3035/01
Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BNC
Max. permitted peak input voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ± 6 V
Specifications S-37
Input signal Line code, Amplitude Coupling Max. permitted offset

pulse shape
2.048 Mbit/s HDB3 2.34 V ± 10% DC ± 10 ppm
2.048 MHz (clock) square, sinewave 1 Vpp to 5 Vpp AC ± 10 ppm
1.544 Mbit/s B8ZS 2.34 V ± 10% DC ± 10 ppm
1.544 MHz (clock) square, sinewave 1 Vpp to 5 Vpp AC ± 10 ppm
Table S-22 Specifications for reference clock signals
SONET Version BN 3035/02
Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bantam
Input impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Ω
Max. permitted peak input voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ± 6 V
Input signal Line code, Amplitude Coupling Max. permitted offset

pulse shape
2.048 Mbit/s HDB3 3.0 V ± 10% DC ± 10 ppm
2.048 MHz (Clock) square, sinewave 1 Vpp to 5 Vpp AC ± 10 ppm

1.544 Mbit/s B8ZS 3.0 V ± 10% DC ± 10 ppm
1.544 MHz (Clock) square, sinewave 1 Vpp to 5 Vpp AC ± 10 ppm
Table S-23 Specifications for reference clock signals
LTI (Loss of Timing Interval) status display

The LED is on when TX clock generation is set to “Derived from reference clock [25]” and no
clock or signal is present. The LED is also on if the clock or signal has a frequency offset of more
than 10 ppm (trigger threshold is between 10 and 30 ppm).
7.4 CLOCK [22]
Clock output with unjittered TX clock
Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BNC
Bit rate range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.544 MHz to 155.52 MHz
at STM-4/OC-12, STM-16/OC-48, STM-64/OC-192 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155.52 MHz
Output impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .approx. 10 Ω
Pulse amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ≥ 400 mV into 75 Ω, AC coupled
Max. permitted peak applied voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ± 6 V
S-38 Specifications
8 Built-in operation and control computer (PC)
Operating system
ANT-20 (series A through W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS-DOS 6.22

Windows 3.11
ANT-20 (series X ...), ANT-20E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windows95 
The relevant copyright conditions must be observed.
CPU
The CPU is constantly being updated. The current CPU and hard disk characteristics are
displayed after switching on the instrument during the boot-up screen display.
CPU, ANT-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486/DX 2-50 or better

CPU, ANT-20E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486/DX 4-100 or better
3.3 V technology
Memory ANT-20 (series A through W)
DRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 MB, PS/2 module
expandable to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . max. 32 Mbyte
Hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . at least 340 Mbyte
Memory ANT-20 (series X ...), ANT-20E
DRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 MB, PS/2 module
expandable to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . max. 64 Mbyte
Hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . at least 540 Mbyte
Floppy drive
Disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5"; 1.44 Mbyte
Specifications S-39
PCMCIA interface [02]
Controller conforms to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCMCIA 2.1
Drive A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCMCIA Type I + II + III cards
Drive B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCMCIA Type I + II cards
The PCMCIA interface provides access to a wide range of remote-control interfaces:

• IEEE bus remote control, BN 3035/92.10
• For using other PCMCIA cards, “Card and Socket Services” are required. These are
included with the remote-control options.
Display
Built-in display ANT-20
Monochrome LCD screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.5"; 16 greyscale
Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . set using potentiometer [07]
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640 x 480 pixels (standard VGA)
Option 3035/93.10
Alternative color TFT screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5"; 512 colors
Built-in display ANT-20E
Color TFT screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5"; 512 colors
Connector for external display [04]

The built-in and external displays can be operated simultaneously
.
Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .standard VGA
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640 x 480 pixels
Refresh rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . approx. 60 Hz
Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-way 3-row submin. D socket
S-40 Specifications
Keyboard
Built-in
Standard PC keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . US-ASCII
External keyboard connector [03]

The PC configuration must be matched to the type of external keyboard used.
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IBM-AT/PS/2
Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-pole Mini-DIN socket
Mouse connector [01]
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PS/2 mouse interface
Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-pole Mini-DIN socket
Parallel interface [05]
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IEEE 1284
Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-way 2-row submin. D socket
Serial interface [06]
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V.24/RS 232
Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-way 2-row submin. D socket
Battery
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lithium
Life time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .>5 years
The battery serves as the buffer for the PC clock’s supply voltage and for saving the CMOS
setup.
Specifications S-41
9 General specifications
9.1 Power supply
Nominal voltage (automatic range switching) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 to 127 V and 200 to 240 V
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 to 140 V and 193 to 264 V
AC line frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 or 60 Hz ±5%
Power consumption ANT-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .< 300 VA
Power consumption ANT-20E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .< 600 VA
Safety class to IEC 1010-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
9.2 Climatic and mechanical ambient conditions
IEC 721-3 ETS 300 019-1
Storage Class IE 12 Class 1.1

1
Transport Class IE 23 Class 2.31
Operation Class IE 72 Class 7.1

1 With temperature range restrictions (see Tab. S-25))
Table S-24 Applicable IEC and ETS classes
S-42 Specifications
9.2.1 Climatic and mechanical data
Storage: Transport: Operation:

IE 12 (1K3, 1M2) IE 23 (2K4, 2M3) IE 72 (7K1, 7M2)
ETS 1.1 ETS 2.3 ETS 7.1
Temperature -5 to +45 °C -40 to +70 °C +5 to +40 °C

(limited to (limits operating
-25 to +70 °C) range: 0 to +50 °C)
Humidity: < 30 °C 5 to 95% 5 to 95% 5 to 85%
Humidity: > 30 °C 1 to 29 g/m3 1 to 29 g/m3 1 to 25 g/m3
Condensation yes yes yes
Precipitation no 6 mm/min no
Water no 1 m/s no
Ice formation yes yes no
Damp - damp loading surface -
Sinusoidal 9 to 200 Hz: 5 m/s2 8 to 200 Hz: 20 m/s2 9 to 200 Hz: 10 m/s2
vibration 200 to 500 Hz: 40 m/s2 200 to 500 Hz: 15 m/s2
Shock: 11 ms duration - 300 m/s2 100 m/s2

Shock: 6 ms duration - 1000 m/s2 300 m/s2
Free drop - 1.0 m 0.1 m
Toppling - all edges all edges
Table S-25 Major parameters for the classes (see Fig. S-24)
9.3 EC conformance declaration/CE mark
Interference generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . to EN 50 081-1
Interference immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . to EN 50 082-1
9.3.1 EMC interference suppression
Interference suppression
This instrument meets the requirements of EN 50 081-1 and hence limit value class B of
EN 55 022 (identical with CISPR 22:1985 modif., DIN VDE 0878 part 3) and FCC Rules Part 15
Subpart J Class A. The instrument conforms to the safety aims of European regulation
89/336/EWG of 03.05.89 in respect of interference suppression. A special permit for operation
is not required.
The instrument has been tested such that the requirements in respect of interference
suppression for this instrument will also be met if it is operated in a system.
This is conditional upon the correct construction of the system and the use of the specified
connecting cables, with particular attention being paid to adequate screening.
Specifications S-43
If the device under test connected to this instrument is in itself capable of generating interfering
radiation, e.g. when the screening to the device under test is not continuous, the user must
ensure that any interference generated remains within the prescribed limits. Suitable screening
precautions may be additionally required.
.
Interference suppression corresponds to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EN 55022/CISPR 22 class B
Intrinsic magnetic scatter field
at AC line frequency and a distance of 30 cm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .< 3 A/m
9.3.2 EMC interference immunity
Tip: Reduced functionality, self-recovering:

During the presence of interference, the signal received by the instrument can be
affected to such an extent that an error is detected. This may, for example, be a code
error, and depending on the time of occurrence may be a bit, FAS or parity error. Error
bursts may lead to alarms.
Such errors and alarms only occur when interference is present.
To keep the effects of interference as small as possible, the system must be correctly
constructed using the prescribed cables, with particular attention being paid to adequate
screening.
When using standard PC accessories, make sure that these meet the requirements of
the EMC regulations (CE mark).
Immunity to electrostatic discharge

to IEC 1000-4-2 or IEC 801 - 2
Reduced functionality (self-recovering) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . up to 4 kV direct contact discharge

or up to 8 kV air path discharge
Immunity to radiated interference

to IEC 1000-4-3 or IEC 801-3
Full functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . up to 3 V/m
in the frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 MHz to 1000 MHz

and at 1890 MHz
Rapid transient interference immunity

to IEC 1000-4-4 or IEC 801-4
on signal circuits
Reduced functionality (self-recovering) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . up to 500 V
on AC line circuits
Reduced functionality (self-recovering) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . up to 1kV
S-44 Specifications
External magnetic field immunity

to IEC 1000-4-8
Full functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 A/m at 50 or 60 Hz
9.4 Noise emission
A-weighted noise pressure level at 1 m distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . approx. 48 dB (A)
9.5 Calibration/Maintenance
Recommended confirmation interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 years
9.6 Dimensions/Weight
ANT-20
Weight
including protective cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . approx. 9.6 kg
Dimensions (w x h x d) in mm
including protective cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . approx. 360 x 370 x 200
ANT-20E
Weight
including protective cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .approx. 15 kg
Dimensions (w x h x d) in mm
including protective cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . approx. 360 x 370 x 290
Specifications S-45
9.7 Ordering information
9.7.1 Mainframe ANT-20
Advanced Network Tester ANT-20

SDH version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/41
One STM-1 mapping is included in the price; select the mapping option you require.
With monochrome display, English and German language version.
.
Advanced Network Tester ANT-20

SONET version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/42
One STS-1 mapping is included in the price; select the mapping option you require.
With monochrome display, English language version.
9.7.2 Mainframe ANT-20E
Advanced Network Tester ANT-20E

SDH version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/21
One STM-1 mapping is included in the price; select the mapping option you require.
With TFT display, English and German language version.
Advanced Network Tester ANT-20E

SONET version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/22
One STS-1 mapping is included in the price; select the mapping option you require.
With TFT display, English language version.
S-46 Specifications
9.7.3 Options
Touchscreen (Touchscreen Version is supplied without trackball). . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/93.11

CPU RAM expansion to 32 MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/93.15
SONET mappings
STS-1 mappings for ANSI tributaries
VT1.5 SPE/STM-0 (1.5 Mbit/s in STS-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.10

VT6 SPE (6 Mbit/s, unframed in STS-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.11
STS-1 SPE (45 Mbit/s in STS-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.12
STS-1 mappings for ETSI tributaries
VT2 SPE/STM-0 (2 Mbit/s in STS-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.13
DS1 and DS3 interface
Bit error rate tests 1.5 /45 Mbit/s

(included in SONET version 3035/02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.34
STM-1 mappings
for ETSI tributaries
C-12 (2 Mbit/s in STM-1, AU-3/AU-4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.01

C-4 (140 Mbit/s in STM-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.03
for ANSI tributaries
C-11 (1.5 Mbit/s in STM-1, AU-3/AU-4, TU-11/TU-12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.04

C-2 (6 Mbit/s, unframed in STM-1, AU-3/AU-4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.06
Extended Overhead Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/90.15
Drop&Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/90.20
PDH functions
PDH MUX/DEMUX chain 64k/140M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.30

PDH DEMUX chain 64k/140M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.31
M13 MUX/DEMUX chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.32
Bit error rate tests 2/8/34/140 Mbit/s
(included in SDH version 3035/01). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.33
Specifications S-47
Optical interfaces
Optical STM-1, OC-1/3, 1310 nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/90.43

Optical STM-1, OC-1/3, 1550 nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/90.44
Optical STM-1, OC-1/3, 1310 and 1550 nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/90.45
Optical STM-1/4, OC-1/3/12, 1310 nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/90.46

Optical STM-1/4, OC-1/3/12, 1550 nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/90.47
Optical STM-1/4, OC-1/3/12, 1310 and 1550 nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/90.48
STM-16/OC-48 1550 nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/90.53

STM-16/OC-48 1310 nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/90.54
STM-16/OC-48 1310 and 1550 nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/90.59
STM-64/OC-192 1550 nm Generator/Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/91.40

STM-64/OC-192 1550 nm Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/91.41
STM-64/OC-192 1550 nm Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/91.42
Optical power splitter (90/10%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/90.49
Optical Attenuator (plug in)

SC-PC, 1310 nm, 15 dB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/90.61
OC-12c/STM-4c Options
OC-12c/STM-4c Bit Error Tester

(requires Optical Module BN 3035/90.46, 90.47 or 90.48) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/90.90
OC-12c/STM-4c ATM Testing
(requires Optical Module BN 3035/90.46, 90.47 or 90.48 and
ATM-Modul BN 3035/90.70) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/90.91
OC-12c/STM-4c Virtual Concatenation
(requires Optical Module BN 3035/90.90 oder 90.91;
the optiones BN 3035/90.38, 91.53, 91.54, 91.59 are alternatives) . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/90.92
Optical STM-16/OC-48, 15... nm
(Select a wavelength between 1530,33 nm and
1560,61 nm to G.692.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/90.38
OC-48c/STM-16c Bit Error Tester (Bulk)
(requires Optical Module BN 3035/90.46, 90.47 or 90.48) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/90.93
Optical test adapters
ST Type (AT&T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 2060/00.32

HMS-10/A, HFS-13/A (Diamond) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 2060/00.34
HMS-10, HFS-13 (Diamond) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 2060/00.35
“KEYED BICONIC”, with anti-twist device (AT&T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 2060/00.37
D4 (NEC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 2060/00.40
DIN 47256 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 2060/00.50
FC, FC-PC (NTT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 2060/00.51
SC, SC-PC (NTT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 2060/00.58
E 2000 (Diamond) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 2060/00.61
Wavetek Wandel Goltermann can supply a wide selection of optical power level meters,
sources, attenuators and accessories. Please ask your local sales office for information.
S-48 Specifications
O.172 Jitter and wander
O.172 Jitter Generator up to 155 Mbit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.81

O.172 Jitter Meter up to 155 Mbit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.82
O.172 Jitter Generator 622 Mbit/s
(requires BN 3035/90.81) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.83
O.172 Jitter Meter 622 Mbit/s
(requires BN 3035/90.82) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.84
O.172 Wander Generator up to 622 Mbit/s
(requires BN 3035/90.81 for up to 155 Mbit/s and 90.83 for 622 Mbit/s) . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.85
O.172 Wander Analysator up to 622 Mbit/s
(requires BN 3035/90.82 for up to 155 Mbit/s and 90.84 for 622 Mbit/s) . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.86
O.172 Wander Generator 2488 Mbit/s
(requires ANT-20E and BN 3035/90.81 and BN 3035/90.88) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.87
O.172 Jitter Generator/Analysator 2488 Mbit/s
(requires ANT-20E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.88
O.172 Wander Analysator 2488 Mbit/s
(requires ANT-20E and BN 3035/90.88) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.89
O.172 MTIE/TDEV Analysis
(requires BN 3035/90.86 for up to 622 Mbit/s
and BN 3035/90.89 for 2488 Mbits/s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/95.21
ATM functions
ATM module
Includes ATM mapping STM-1/STS-3c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.70
ATM Broadband Analyzer/Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.80
Additional ATM-Mappings
requires ATM-Module 3035/90.70 or BN 3035/90.80
STS-1 (51 Mbit/s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.71

E4 (140 Mbit/s)1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.72
DS3 (45 Mbit/s)2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.73
E3 (34 Mbit/s)1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.74
E1 (2 Mbit/s)1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.75
DS1 (1,5 Mbit/s)2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.76
VC-3 in STM-1 (AU-3/AU-4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/90.77
1 For SONET versions BN 3035/42, BN 3035/22 and BN 3038/12, option BN 3035/90.33 is required.
2 For SDH versions BN 3035/41, BN 3035/21 and BN 3038/11, option BN 3035/90.34 is required.
9.7.4 Remote control
V.24 remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/91.01
GPIB remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3035/92.10
LabWindows/CVI Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 3038/95.99
Specifications S-49
9.7.5 Remote operation
Remote operation via modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/95.30
Remote operation via LAN (TCP/IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/95.31
9.7.6 Test automation
CATS Test Sequencer and test case library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/95.90
9.7.7 Calibration
Calibration report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/94.01
9.7.8 Accessories
Included with instrument

• Trackball (not included with Touchscreen Version)
• Filter pads
• AC line cord
• 2 cables
Optional accessories
Carry bag, ANT-20 only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/92.02
Transport case TDK-960/32, ANT-20 only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 0960/00.08
Transport case, ANT-20E only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/92.03
External keyboard (US/English) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3035/92.04
Decoupler, -20 dB, m-f 1.6/5.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 3903/63
TKD-1 probe, 48 to 8500 kbit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BN 882/01
WG PenBERT Mini-PCM-Monitor (E1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BN 4555/11
9.7.9 Retrofitting of options
All options can be retrofitted by the Wavetek Wandel Goltermann worldwide service network
S-50 Specifications
Index
Symbols ATM Traffic Analyzer A-71

ATM-BERT A-66
“43-44” sequence (double pointer) TB-4 Autoconfiguration VI-8, A-4
“F3” APPL O-9 Automatic Protection Switching A-14
”86-4” sequence (pointer) TB-4 Automatic Scan function A-10
”87-3” sequence (pointer) TB-3 Automatic Search function A-12
Automatic Trouble Scan function A-7
Numerics
2-point cell delay variation A-74
B
Background load A-75
A Backup data O-44
Bellcore standards SA-4
AAL layer A-64 BIS[P]O (Thresholds, M.2101, 6/2000) TB-31
AAL-0 A-65 BIS[P]O (Thresholds, M.2101,1, 4/1997) TB-30
AAL-1 A-65 BIS[P]O (Thresholds, performance analysis) TB-25
Abbreviations SA-12 BISO Multiplier TB-24, TB-27
AC line operation G-8 Bit error rate test (BERT) A-17
AC line voltage G-1
Action buttons O-35
Add & Remove O-21, O-22
C
ADM Test VI-5 Calibration measurement (JTF) A-43, A-45
Air filter pad replacing M-4 Cancel button O-36
Alarm messages SA-9 CBR (constant bit rate) A-65
Allocation TB-20 CDV A-74
Allocation (Performance analysis) TB-13, TB-15, Cell delay variation A-74
TB-24, TB-27 Cell loss ratio A-81
Anomaly insertion VI-12 Cell Transfer Delay A-65
Anomaly/Defect Analyzer A-17 Cell transfer delay A-72, A-74
Anomaly/Defect Insertion A-17 Channel VI-7, A-4
ANSI (Performance analysis) VI-41 Check boxes O-35
ANSI standards SA-4 Cleaning the instrument M-1
ANSI T1.101 A-56 Clock source VI-7
ANSI T1.105-1995 (SONET Multiplexing Structure) CLOSE button O-36
TB-1 Close program button O-20
ANSI/BELL (Performance analysis) TB-6 CLR A-81
ANT-20/ANT-20E concept I-1 CONCAT. VI-5
Application Manager O-13, A-1 Configure menu O-19
Application menu O-17 Connector panel O-2, O-3, O-4, O-5
APS VI-10 Connectors O-5
APS commands VI-25 Consecutive Identical Digit (CID) Test A-61
APS switching time measurement A-14 Control elements O-1, O-5
Arranging windows O-34 Count (anomaly result) VI-17
ATM Advanced O-14
ATM Background Generator A-75
ATM bit error test A-66
D
ATM Forum recommendations SA-6 DCC bit error test A-34
ATM latency test A-71 Defect insertion VI-12
ATM layer A-64 Delay VI-9
ATM Signal Structure A-63 Descriptor A-31
ATM Standard O-14 Descriptor (Overhead Generator) VI-25
i
Disabling entries O-16 I

DM Threshold (Performance analysis) TB-13
Double pointer TB-2 I.356 A-74
Idle VI-3
Installing a printer O-38
E Instruments menu O-18
ECC bit error test A-34 Interface VI-7, A-4
Edit TCM Sequence VI-26 Interpreter A-32
EN 302084 A-56 Interpreter (Overhead Analyzer) VI-28
Enabling entries O-16 ITU-T G.707 (SDH Multiplexing Structure) TB-1
Entry boxes O-36 ITU-T G.821 (Performance analysis) TB-12
Error Free Seconds (Performance analysis) ITU-T recommendations SA-1
TB-6 to TB-34
Error Related Performance A-65 J
Errored Seconds (Performance analysis)
TB-6 to TB-34 Jitter amplitude A-40
ETSI EN 302084 A-50, A-58 Jitter frequency A-40, A-42
ETSI ETS 300462 A-56 JTF (Jitter Transfer Function) A-43
ETSI standards SA-5
Export Format O-42 K
Keyboard O-36
F
F3 O-9 L
F-MTJ (Fast MTJ) A-40
Front panel O-1 LED array O-7
Function key “F3” APPL O-9 Linear APS VI-28
Fuse replacing M-3 List boxes O-35
Loading an application O-25
Loss of cell delineation (LCD) A-78
G
G.811 A-53, A-56 M
G.812 A-53, A-56
G.813 A-53, A-56 M.2100 A-22
G.821 A-22 M.2100 (Performance analysis) VI-41, TB-23
G.821 (Performance analysis) VI-41 M.2101 A-22
G.823 A-37, A-43, A-50, A-53, A-58 M.2101 (Performance analysis) TB-26
G.824 A-50, A-53, A-58 M.2101-Version TB-28
G.825 A-37, A-50, A-53, A-58 Manually triggered measurements O-45
G.826 A-22 Maximize button O-20
G.826 ISM (Performance analysis) VI-41 Mean cell rate A-83
G.826 OOS (Performance analysis) VI-41 Measurement duration O-27, A-2
G.828 A-22 Measurement menu O-18
G.828 (Performance analysis) VI-41, TB-19 Measuring O-27
G.829 A-22 Minibar O-15
G.829 (Performance analysis) VI-41, TB-21 Minimize button O-20
G.958 A-37, A-43 Modulation period A-52
GR 253 A-23 MTIE A-54, A-55
MTIE/TDEV Analysis A-56
MTJ (Maximum Tolerable Jitter) A-37
H MTW (Maximum Tolerable Wander) A-58
Help menu O-19 Multiplexing structures TB-1
Histogram (Anomaly/Defect Analyzer) VI-14 MUX Factor (Performance analysis) TB-13
HUNC error A-67
ii
N Repair instructions G-2

Result display (Anomaly/Defect Analyzer) VI-14
NFD VI-33 Ring APS VI-28
O S
O.172 A-37, A-43, A-50, A-53, A-58 Safety class G-1
Offset VI-3 Save as dialog O-42
OK button O-36 Saving an application O-25
On-line help O-33 Selecting instruments O-21
Optical power splitter A-6 Sensor test A-78
Option buttons O-35 SEP used in Verdict TB-20, TB-28
Overhead Analyzer A-29 SES-Threshold (Performance analysis) TB-13,
Overhead Generator VI-23, A-29 TB-20, TB-22
Setting a new pointer TB-4
P Severely Errored Frame Seconds (Performance
analysis) TB-6 to TB-34
Packing G-6 Severely Errored Seconds (Performance analysis)
Path Overhead A-29 TB-6 to TB-34
PDH Generator/Analyzer VI-38, VI-40 Signal input [12] S-7
Peak cell rate A-83 Signal input [14] S-5
Peak-to-peak CDV A-74 Signal output [13] S-3
Performance Analysis A-22 Signal output [15] S-2
Performance analysis VI-41, TB-6 Signal Structure O-23, A-3
Performance monitoring (SONET) TB-7 SOH VI-23
Periodic pointer TB-2 Standard sequence TB-3
Phase hits A-47 Start/stop measurement O-29
Physical layer O-14, A-63 Storage under damp conditions G-6
POH A-29
Pointer action generation TB-2
Pointer Analyzer VI-35, A-26
T
Pointer burst VI-33, TB-3 T1.231 A-23
Pointer Generator VI-32, A-26 TCM Sequence VI-26
Pointer sequence VI-33, A-25 TDEV (Time Deviation) A-56
Pointer sequenzes parameter TB-5 Testcell A-65
Pointer stress test A-25 Through mode VI-4, A-5
Print dialog O-40 TIE A-55
Print Header O-39, O-41 TIM A-33
Print menu – Application manager O-19, O-39 Timer O-30
Print menu – Virtual instruments O-40 Timer-controlled measurements O-46
Printer Setup O-41 Title bar O-20
TOH VI-23, A-29
R Trace Identifier VI-29
Trace identifier A-31
Ratio (anomaly result) VI-17 Trace Identifier Mismatch A-33
Receiver section Traffic signal icon O-29
Specifications Transport Overhead A-29
Reference clock input[25] (REF CLOCK IN) Trigger VI-3
S-37
Trigger input/output [26] S-37
Recovery time G-7
iii
U
UAS-Limit TB-20, TB-24, TB-27
UAS-Mode TB-20, TB-24, TB-27
Unavailable Seconds (Performance analysis)
TB-6 to TB-34
Unpacking G-6
V
VBR A-82
Ventilation G-7
Versacon inserts M-2
Virtual instruments O-14, A-1
VPI/VCI parameters A-72
W
Wander A-53, A-55
Wander analysis (MTIE/TDEV) A-55
Wander Generator A-50
Wander modulation period A-52
iv

Sonet Operating Manual

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document informationANT-20 comes with a pre-installed demo version of our ANT-20 Test Sequencer tool. ANT-20 Test Sequencer is a stand-alone application that runs on the instrument's internal PC. Demo is not protected by a password.

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sonet Operating Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sonet Operating Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ANT-20, ANT-20E,

Software Version 7.20

Wavetek Wandel Goltermann

CVI Application Test Sequences

Operation of the ANT-20 Test Sequencer Demo

2 ANT-20: Supremely easy to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-4

2 Packing and unpacking, transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-6

3 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-8

4 Protective cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-12

5 Carrying handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-13

6 Instrument checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-14

7 Data backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-14

8 DominoCOM ANT-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-16

2 Basic operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-8

3 Switching on the ANT-20/ANT-20E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-8

4 ANT-20 windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-13

5 Creating, saving and loading applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-21

7 On-line help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-33

8 How to use the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-34

9 Printing and exporting results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-37

10 ANT-20/ANT-20E behavior in the event of an

2 Signal Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-3

3 Anomaly/Defect Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-12

4 Anomaly/Defect Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-14

5 Overhead Generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-23

6 Overhead Analyzer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-27

7 Pointer Generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-32

8 Pointer Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-35

9 PDH Generator/Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-38

10 Performance Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI-41

2 In-Service Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5

3 Automatic Trouble Scan function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7

4 Automatic Scan function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10

5 Automatic Search function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12

6 APS switching time measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14

7 Bit error rate test (BERT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17

8 Performance analysis to G.821, G.826, G.828, G.829,

9 Pointer stress test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25

10 Editing and analyzing the Transport/Path overhead . . . . . . . . . . A-29

11 DCC/ECC bit error test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34

12 Maximum Tolerable Jitter (MTJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-37

13 Fast Maximum Tolerable Jitter (F-MTJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40

14 Jitter Transfer Function (JTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-43

15 Phase Hit Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-47

16 Wander Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-50

17 Wander Analysis to 2.5 Gbit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-53

18 Maximum Tolerable Wander (MTW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-58

19 Consecutive Identical Digit (CID) Test

20 Setting the ATM signal structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-63

21 ATM bit error rate test (ATM-BERT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-66

22 ATM latency test for ATM switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-71

23 ATM latency test with background load

24 Sensor test - loss of cell delineation (LCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-78

2 Alarm messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SA-9

2 Pointer action generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TB-2

3 Performance Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TB-6

3 Exchanging Versacon inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-2

4 Replacing the fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-3